6500 R12.4 Installation-14-Slot Shelves)

6500 Packet-Optical Platform
Installation - 14-slot Shelves

Release 12.4
What’s inside...
New in this release and documentation roadmap
Installing 6500 14-slot shelves
Installing OMX, fiber manager, DSM, passive equipment, and routing/connecting related cables
See also:
Installation - General Information, 323-1851-201.0
Installation - 2-slot Shelves, 323-1851-201.1
Installation - 7-slot & 6500-7 packet-optical Shelves, 323-1851-201.2
Installation - 32-slot Shelves, 323-1851-201.4
Installation - Passive Chassis (2150 & Photonics), Filters, and Modules, 323-1851-201.5
Installation - T-Series Shelves, 323-1851-201.6
323-1851-201.3 - Standard Issue 2

March 2019
Copyright© 2014-2019 Ciena® Corporation. All rights reserved.
LEGAL NOTICES
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND TRADE SECRET INFORMATION OF CIENA
CORPORATION AND ITS RECEIPT OR POSSESSION DOES NOT CONVEY ANY RIGHTS TO REPRODUCE
OR DISCLOSE ITS CONTENTS, OR TO MANUFACTURE, USE, OR SELL ANYTHING THAT IT MAY DESCRIBE.
REPRODUCTION, DISCLOSURE, OR USE IN WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SPECIFIC WRITTEN
AUTHORIZATION OF CIENA CORPORATION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN.
EVERY EFFORT HAS BEEN MADE TO ENSURE THAT THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS
COMPLETE AND ACCURATE AT THE TIME OF PUBLISHING; HOWEVER, THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN
THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO CHANGE.
While the information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable, except as otherwise expressly agreed
to in writing CIENA PROVIDES THIS DOCUMENT “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. The information and/or products described in this document are subject to
change without notice. For the most up-to-date technical publications, visit www.ciena.com.
Copyright© 2014-2019 Ciena® Corporation. All Rights Reserved
The material contained in this document is also protected by copyright laws of the United States of America and
other countries. It may not be reproduced or distributed in any form by any means, altered in any fashion, or stored
in a data base or retrieval system, without express written permission of the Ciena Corporation.
Security
Ciena® cannot be responsible for unauthorized use of equipment and will not make allowance or credit for
unauthorized use or access.
Contacting Ciena
Corporate Headquarters 410-694-5700 or 800-921-1144 www.ciena.com
Customer Technical Support/Warranty
In North America 1-800-CIENA-24 (243-6224)
410-865-4961
In Europe, Middle East, 800-CIENA-24-7 (800-2436-2247)
and Africa +44-207-012-5508
00 0800 77 454 (Slovenia)
In Asia-Pacific 800-CIENA-24-7 (800-2436-2247)
+81-3-6367-3989
+91-124-4340-600
120 11104 (Vietnam)
000 8004401369 (India)
In Caribbean and Latin 800-CIENA-24-7 (800-2436-2247)
America 1230-020-0845 (Chile)
009 800-2436-2247 (Colombia)
0800-77-454 (Mexico and Peru)
00 008000442510 (Panama)
Sales and General Information North America: 1-800-207-3714 E-mail: sales@ciena.com
International: +44 20 7012 5555
In North America 410-694-5700 or 800-207-3714 E-mail: sales@ciena.com
In Europe +44-207-012-5500 (UK) E-mail: sales@ciena.com
In Asia +81-3-3248-4680 (Japan) E-mail: sales@ciena.com
In India +91-22-42419600 E-mail: sales@ciena.com
In Latin America 011-5255-1719-0220 (Mexico City) E-mail: sales@ciena.com
Training E-mail: learning@ciena.com
For additional office locations and phone numbers, please visit the Ciena web site at www.ciena.com.
6500 Packet-Optical Platform Installation - 14-slot Shelves

Release 12.4 323-1851-201.3 Standard Issue 2
Copyright© 2014-2019 Ciena® Corporation March 2019
READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT (“LICENSE”) CAREFULLY BEFORE INSTALLING OR USING CIENA
SOFTWARE OR DOCUMENTATION. THIS LICENSE IS AN AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU AND CIENA
COMMUNICATIONS, INC. (OR, AS APPLICABLE, SUCH OTHER CIENA CORPORATION AFFILIATE
LICENSOR) (“CIENA”) GOVERNING YOUR RIGHTS TO USE THE SOFTWARE. BY INSTALLING OR USING
THE SOFTWARE, YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS LICENSE AND AGREE TO BE BOUND
BY IT.
1. License Grant. Ciena may provide “Software” to you either (1) embedded within or running on a hardware
product or (2) as a standalone application, and Software includes upgrades acquired by you from Ciena or a Ciena
authorized reseller. Subject to these terms, and payment of all applicable License fees including any usage-based
fees, Ciena grants you, as end user, a non-exclusive, non-transferable, personal License to use the Software only in
object code form and only for its intended use as evidenced by the applicable product documentation. Unless the
context does not permit, Software also includes associated documentation.
2. Open Source and Third Party Licenses. Software excludes any open source or third-party programs supplied
by Ciena under a separate license, and you agree to be bound by the terms of any such license. If a separate
license is not provided, any open source and third party programs are considered “Software” and their use
governed by the terms of this License.
3. Title. You are granted no title or ownership rights in or to the Software. Unless specifically authorized by Ciena in
writing, you are not authorized to create any derivative works based upon the Software. Title to the Software,
including any copies or derivative works based thereon, and to all copyrights, patents, trade secrets and other
intellectual property rights in or to the Software, are and shall remain the property of Ciena and/or its licensors.
Ciena's licensors are third party beneficiaries of this License. Ciena reserves to itself and its licensors all rights in
the Software not expressly granted to you.
4. Confidentiality. The Software contains trade secrets of Ciena. Such trade secrets include, without limitation, the
design, structure and logic of individual Software programs, their interactions with other portions of the Software,
internal and external interfaces, and the programming techniques employed. The Software and related technical
and commercial information, and other information received in connection with the purchase and use of the
Software that a reasonable person would recognize as being confidential, are all confidential information of Ciena
(“Confidential Information”).
5. Obligations. You shall:
i) Hold the Software and Confidential Information in strict confidence for the benefit of Ciena using your best efforts
to protect the Software and Confidential Information from unauthorized disclosure or use, and treat the Software
and Confidential Information with the same degree of care as you do your own similar information, but no less than
reasonable care;
ii) Keep a current record of the location of each copy of the Software you make;
iii) Use the Software only in accordance with the authorized usage level;
iv) Preserve intact any copyright, trademark, logo, legend or other notice of ownership on any original or copies of
the Software, and affix to each copy of the Software you make, in the same form and location, a reproduction of the
copyright notices, trademarks, and all other proprietary legends and/or logos appearing on the original copy of the
Software delivered to you; and
v) Issue instructions to your authorized personnel to whom Software is disclosed, advising them of the confidential
nature of the Software and provide them with a summary of the requirements of this License.
6. Restrictions. You shall not:
i) Use the Software or Confidential Information a) for any purpose other than your own internal business purposes;
and b) other than as expressly permitted by this License;
ii) Allow anyone other than your authorized personnel who need to use the Software in connection with your rights
or obligations under this License to have access to the Software;
iii) Make any copies of the Software except such limited number of copies, in machine readable form only, as may
be reasonably necessary for execution in accordance with the authorized usage level or for archival purposes only;
iv) Make any modifications, enhancements, adaptations, derivative works, or translations to or of the Software;
v) Reverse engineer, disassemble, reverse translate, decompile, or in any other manner decode the Software;
vi) Make full or partial copies of the associated documentation or other printed or machine-readable matter provided
with the Software unless it was supplied by Ciena in a form intended for reproduction;
vii) Export or re-export the Software from the country in which it was received from Ciena or its authorized reseller
unless authorized by Ciena in writing; or

viii) Publish the results of any benchmark tests run on the Software.
7. Audit: Upon Ciena's reasonable request you shall permit Ciena to audit the use of the Software to ensure
compliance with this License.
8. U.S. Government Use. The Software is provided to the Government only with restricted rights and limited rights.
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions set forth in FAR Sections 52-227-14 and
52-227-19 or DFARS Section 52.227-7013(C)(1)(ii), as applicable. The Software and any accompanying technical
data (collectively “Materials”) are commercial within the meaning of applicable Federal acquisition regulations. The
Materials were developed fully at private expense. U.S. Government use of the Materials is restricted by this
License, and all other U.S. Government use is prohibited. In accordance with FAR 12.212 and DFAR Supplement
227.7202, the Software is commercial computer software and the use of the Software is further restricted by this
License.
9. Term of License. This License is effective until the applicable subscription period expires or the License is
terminated. You may terminate this License by giving written notice to Ciena. This License will terminate
immediately if (i) you breach any term or condition of this License or (ii) you become insolvent, cease to carry on
business in the ordinary course, have a receiver appointed, enter into liquidation or bankruptcy, or any analogous
process in your home country. Termination shall be without prejudice to any other rights or remedies Ciena may
have. Upon any termination of this License you shall destroy and erase all copies of the Software in your
possession or control, and forward written certification to Ciena that all such copies of Software have been
destroyed or erased. Your obligations to hold the Confidential Information in confidence, as provided in this License,
shall survive the termination of this License.
10. Compliance with laws. You agree to comply with all laws related to your installation and use of the Software.
Software is subject to U.S. export control laws, and may be subject to export or import regulations in other
countries. If Ciena authorizes you to import or export the Software in writing, you shall obtain all necessary licenses
or permits and comply with all applicable laws.
11. Limitation of Liability. ANY LIABILITY OF CIENA SHALL BE LIMITED IN THE AGGREGATE TO THE
AMOUNTS PAID BY YOU TO CIENA OR ITS AUTHORIZED RESELLER FOR THE SOFTWARE. THIS
LIMITATION APPLIES TO ALL CAUSES OF ACTION, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION BREACH OF
CONTRACT, BREACH OF WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, MISREPRESENTATION AND OTHER
TORTS. THE LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY DESCRIBED IN THIS SECTION ALSO APPLY TO ANY LICENSOR OF
CIENA. NEITHER CIENA NOR ANY OF ITS LICENSORS SHALL BE LIABLE FOR ANY INJURY, LOSS OR
DAMAGE, WHETHER INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL INCLUDING WITHOUT
LIMITATION ANY LOST PROFITS, CONTRACTS, DATA OR PROGRAMS, AND THE COST OF RECOVERING
SUCH DATA OR PROGRAMS, EVEN IF INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES IN ADVANCE.
12. General. Ciena may assign this License to an affiliate or to a purchaser of the intellectual property rights in the
Software. You shall not assign or transfer this License or any rights hereunder, and any attempt to do so will be void.
This License shall be governed by the laws of the State of New York without regard to conflict of laws provisions.
The U.N. Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply hereto. This License
constitutes the complete and exclusive agreement between the parties relating to the license for the Software and
supersedes all proposals, communications, purchase orders, and prior agreements, verbal or written, between the
parties. If any portion hereof is found to be void or unenforceable, the remaining provisions shall remain in full force
and effect.

vii
Contents 0
New in this release and documentation roadmap xi
Installing 6500 14-slot shelves 1-1

Circuit packs with 90-degree SFPs 1-3
Shelf front covers and extension kits—overview 1-4
Precautions 1-8
Abbreviations used in procedures 1-8
List of procedures
1-1 Installing a 6500 14-slot shelf (all variants), access panel, cooling fan
modules, and air plenum 1-13
1-2 Installing the maintenance interface card in the 14-slot shelf 1-58
1-3 Installing power input cards and connecting power cables in a 6500 14-slot
shelf (all variants) 1-61
1-4 Installing power cables and testing input power to the 1U BIP/FIP 1-75
1-5 Testing power to the 6500 shelf 1-89
1-6 Installing the shelf processor 1-96
1-7 Connecting control and communication cables 1-103
1-8 Installing circuit packs in the 6500 14-slot shelf 1-124
1-9 Inserting or removing circuit packs in the 6500 shelf 1-138
1-10 Installing and removing pluggable modules 1-141
1-11 Installing a CMD16, CMD24, CMD64, CMD96, CMD44, eCMD44, OMD4,
BMD2, GMD10, UBMD2, or MBMD2 module 1-155
1-12 Installing an OMC2 chassis and associated modules 1-175
1-13 Installing a Fiber Interconnect Module (FIM) 1-183
1-14 Installing electrical I/O hardware and I/O panels in the 6500 14-slot
shelf 1-191
1-15 Routing electrical I/O and Category 5e cables into the electrical interface area
of the 6500 14-slot shelf 1-207
1-16 Routing fiber-optic cables and electrical cables to circuit packs in the 6500
shelf 1-220
1-17 Guidelines for cable routing to electrical SFP and optical ports on the same
shelf 1-233
1-18 Installation guidelines for QSFP28-QSFP28 DAC cable 1-238
1-19 Connecting or disconnecting fiber-optic cables 1-245
1-20 Installing a 6500 14-slot Shelf Front Cover Extension Kit NTK509CY for use
with Shelf Front Cover NTK509CBE6 1-268

viii Contents
1-21 Installing or removing Shelf Front Cover NTK509CCE6 for 6500 14-slot
converged optical shelf NTK503ADE5 1-294
converged optical/rear electrical shelf NTK503CDE5 1-313
packet-optical shelf NTK503SA 1-327
1-24 Installing a 6500 14-slot Shelf Front Cover Extension Kit NTK509CZ for use
with Shelf Front Cover NTK509CCE6 1-337
1-25 Installing or removing a 6500 14-slot Shelf Front Cover Kit W/ Extended Depth
NTK509CD for 6500 14-slot converged shelf NTK503ADE5/
NTK503CDE5 1-354
1-26 Installing or removing on NTK503SA a 6500 14-slot Shelf Front Cover Kit W/
Extended Depth NTK509CD 1-376
1-27 Installing or removing Shelf Front Cover NTK509DCE6 on 6500 14-slot
converged optical/front electrical shelf NTK503BDE5 1-391
1-28 Installing a 6500 14-slot Optical/Front Electrical Shelf Cover Extension Kit
NTK509CX for use with Shelf Front Cover NTK509DCE6 1-408
1-29 Connecting a terminal server, a terminal, or a modem to the 6500 14-slot
shelf 1-416
Installing OMX, fiber manager, DSM, passive equipment, and

routing/connecting related cables 2-1
Abbreviations used in procedures 2-3
List of procedures
2-1 Installing and grounding equipment drawers 2-6
2-2 Installing a fiber manager equipment drawer 2-27
2-3 Installing a DSCM tray in a DSCM drawer (NT0H57LA) 2-32
2-4 Connecting OMX 4CH equipment drawers to the 6500 shelves 2-36
2-5 Connecting OMX 16CH DWDM equipment drawers to the 6500 shelves 2-41
2-6 Routing fiber-optic cables for the OMX 4CH equipment drawer 2-47
2-7 Routing fiber-optic cables for the OMX 16CH DWDM equipment drawer 2-51
2-8 Guidelines for routing fiber-optic cables in the NT0H57BB fiber
manager 2-56
2-9 Guidelines for routing fiber-optic cables in the 1U Bulk Fiber Management
Tray 174-0094-900 2-61
2-10 Installing the NTN458RA DSM breaker interface panel 2-72
2-11 Installing the DS1 service module (DSM) shelf 2-79
2-12 Connecting power cables to the DSM shelf (DSM OAM hardware release 5.0
or earlier) 2-87
2-13 Connecting power cables to the DSM shelf (DSM OAM hardware release 6 or
later) 2-95
2-14 Connecting alarm control and communication cables to the DS1 service
module 2-106
2-15 Connecting DS1 cables to the DS1 service module 2-115
2-16 Routing DS1 cables to/from the DS1 service module 2-118
2-17 Inserting or removing a DSM 84xDS1 termination module 2-119
2-18 Connecting the DS1 service module to the 6500 shelf 2-126

Contents ix
2-19 Installing and removing the DS1 service module front cover 2-129
2-20 Installing a 2110 shelf 2-131
2-21 Installing 2110-Tx-xxxx DCMs into the 2110 shelf 2-135

x Contents

xi
New in this release and documentation

roadmap 0
This technical publication contains information on how to install Release 12.4

of the 6500 Packet-Optical Platform 14-slot shelf assemblies (also called 6500
shelf in this technical publication) and related equipment. This technical
publication supports the 6500 Packet-Optical Platform (6500) Release 12.4
software and subsequent maintenance releases for Release 12.4.
Use Installation - 14-slot Shelves, 323-1851-201.3 (this technical publication)

In conjunction with Installation - General Information, 323-1851-201.0, which
contains the following topics:
• Observing product and personnel safety guidelines
• Regulatory information
• Preparing for installation
• Installing equipment racks and power to the rack
• Cleaning connectors
• Cable and connector details
For installation information specific to other 6500 shelf types and, respectively,
to passive chassis (2150 Optical Multiplexer and Photonics), refer to the
following technical publications:
• Installation - 2-slot Shelves, 323-1851-201.1
• Installation - 7-slot & 6500-7 packet-optical Shelves, 323-1851-201.2
• Installation - 32-slot Shelves, 323-1851-201.4
• Installation - Passive Chassis (2150 & Photonics), Filters, and Modules,
323-1851-201.5
For T-Series installation information, refer to Installation - T-Series Shelves,

323-1851-201.6.

xii New in this release and documentation roadmap
Issue 2
This technical publication was updated to include:
• a precautionary message that before closing the FIM door, the flexible
boots of the MPO cables connected to the FIM must be bent to avoid
pinching the fibers (in Procedure 1-13, “Installing a Fiber Interconnect
Module (FIM)”).
• an illustrated example of bending the flexible boots of the MPO cables (in
Procedure 1-19, “Connecting or disconnecting fiber-optic cables”)
• a correction in “Shelf front covers and extension kits—14-slot shelves” to
reflect that 6500 14-slot Shelf Front Cover Extension Kit NTK509CZ is not
supported on 14-slot packet-optical shelf NTK503SA
Issue 1
The following new/enhanced features are covered in this document:
• 96 Channel Mux/Demux (CMD96) 50 GHz C-Band module
(NTT862EA)—supported only on NTK503ADE5, NTK503BDE5, and
NTK503CDE5 shelf variants
• additional details on removing the connector protector at the rear of the
circuit pack before installing in the shelf (in “Installing circuit packs in the
6500 14-slot shelf” on page 1-124)
6500 technical publications

The following roadmaps identify the technical publications that support the
6500 D-Series and S-Series platforms and the technical publications that
support the 6500 T-Series platform for Release 12.4.

New in this release and documentation roadmap xiii
6500 D-Series and S-Series roadmap

Planning a Network Installing, Managing and Maintaining and Circuit Pack-Based
Commissioning and Provisioning Troubleshooting Documentation
Testing a Network a Network a Network
Documentation Installation - Administration Fault Management - Common Equipment

Roadmap General Information and Security Performance (323-1851-102.1)
(323-1851-090) (323-1851-201.0) (323-1851-301) Monitoring
(323-1851-520) Electrical
Planning - Installation - Configuration -
(323-1851-102.2)
Parts 1, 2, and 3 2-slot Shelves Provisioning &
(NTRN10ER) Operating Parts 1 & 2 Fault Management -
(323-1851-201.1) OC-n/STM-n
Data Comms (323-1851-310) Alarm Clearing
(323-1851-102.3)
Planning & User Guide Installation - 7-slot & Parts 1 and 2
(323-1851-101) 6500-7 packet-optical Configuration - (323-1851-543) WaveLogic Ai, Flex,
Shelves Protection Switching 100G+, 40G,
Ordering Information
(323-1851-201.2) (323-1851-315) Fault Management - OSIC ISS, & SLIC10
(323-1851-151)
Module (323-1851-102.4)
Manufacturing Installation - Configuration - Replacement
Discontinued Parts 14-slot Shelves Bandwidth & Data (323-1851-545)
(323-1851-155) (323-1851-201.3) Services Parts 1,2,3 Broadband/SMUX
(323-1851-320) OTN FLEX MOTR
CLI, REST API, gRPC Installation - Fault Management - (323-1851-102.5)
(323-1851-165) 32-slot Shelves Configuration - SNMP
(323-1851-201.4) Control Plane (323-1851-740) Photonics
Latency
(323-1851-330) Equipment
Specifications Passive Chassis
(323-1851-170) Encryption and FIPS Fault Management - (323-1851-102.6)
(2150 & Photonics), Customer Visible
Pluggable Security Policy
Filters, and Modules Logs Data and Layer 2
Datasheets Overview and
(323-1851-201.5) (323-1851-840) (323-1851-102.7)
and Reference Procedures
(323-1851-180) (323-1851-340)
Licensing OTN I/F, PKT I/F, &
TL-1 Description (323-1851-210) MyCryptoTool PKT/OTN I/F
(323-1851-190) Certificate (323-1851-102.8)
Commissioning Management and
CLI Reference and Testing Quick Start
(323-1851-193) (323-1851-221) (323-1851-341)
Site Manager
Fundamentals
(323-1851-195)
SAOS-based Command Fault and MIB

Configuration Reference
Packet Services Reference Performance
(323-1851-630) (323-1851-690)
Documentation (323-1851-610) (323-1851-650)
Supporting WaveLogic Photonics 6500 Data 6500 Control Plane Submarine Networking
Documentation Coherent Select Application Guide Application Guide Application Guide
(323-1851-980) (NTRN15BA) (NTRN71AA) (NTRN72AA)
6500 Photonic Common 6500 - 5400 / 8700 Fiber Node Return 6500 AC Rectifier
Layer Guide Photonic Layer Interworking Solution Configuration (323-1851-900)
(NTRN15DA) Technical Publications (323-1851-160) (323-1851-985)

xiv New in this release and documentation roadmap
6500 T-Series roadmap

Planning a Network Installing, Managing and Maintaining and
Commissioning and Provisioning Troubleshooting
Testing a Network a Network a Network
T-Series Administration Fault Management -

Installation - Performance
Shelf Guide and Security
T-Series Shelves Monitoring
(323-1851-103) (323-1851-301)
(323-1851-201.6) (323-1851-520)
Data Communications Configuration -
Planning and Licensing Provisioning and Fault Management -
User Guide (323-1851-210) Operating Parts 1 & 2 Alarm Clearing
(323-1851-101) for T-Series Parts 1 and 2
T-Series Shelf (323-1851-311) for T-Series
Manufacturing Guide
(323-1851-544)
Discontinued Parts (323-1851-103) Configuration -
(323-1851-155) Protection Switching Fault Management -
(323-1851-315) Module
CLI, REST API, gRPC
Replacement
(323-1851-165) Configuration - for T-Series
Bandwidth (323-1851-546)
TL-1 Description for T-Series
for T-Series (323-1851-321) Fault Management -
(323-1851-191) SNMP
CLI Reference Configuration - (323-1851-740)
for T-Series Control Plane
(323-1851-194) (323-1851-330) Fault Management -
Customer Visible
Site Manager Logs
Fundamentals (323-1851-840)
(323-1851-195)
SAOS-based Command Fault and MIB

Packet Services Configuration Reference
Reference Performance
Documentation (323-1851-630) (323-1851-690)
(323-1851-610) (323-1851-650)

1-1
Installing 6500 14-slot shelves 1-
This section contains information on how to install the Ciena 6500

Packet-Optical Platform (6500) 14-slot shelves and related equipment, as
applicable to your configuration, including:
• power cables
• control and communications cables
• power input cards
• circuit packs
• pluggable modules
• installing in the 6500 14-slot shelf:
— electrical I/O hardware and panels
— electrical cables and optical fiber cables
— shelf and air plenum covers
• locking and unlocking the 6500 14-slot shelf
• connecting a terminal or modem to the 6500 14-slot shelf
Note 1: The electrical interfaces described in this section are intended for
intra-building use only. All electrical I/O interfaces must be isolated from
external (outside) wiring through a channel bank, regenerator, repeater, or
protection equipment approved for that purpose.
Note 2: This section refers to the information in the engineering
documentation package (EDP), installation documentation package
(IDP), or equivalent site/network engineering plans. Ciena provides a
custom service that can provide this documentation (contact your Ciena
representative for details of this service). If not provided by Ciena, it is the
responsibility of the user to obtain the necessary information (for example,
from a OnePlanner design file).

1-2 Installing 6500 14-slot shelves
This section contains the following topics:

• Circuit packs with 90-degree SFPs
• Shelf front covers and extension kits—overview
• Abbreviations used in procedures
• Procedure list
To install other related equipment, see “Installing OMX, fiber manager, DSM,
passive equipment, and routing/connecting related cables”.
For installation procedures for the following passive equipment

• 2150 Passive Optical Multiplexer (6-slot)
• 6-Slot Passive Photonics Chassis (PPC6)
refer to Installation - Passive Chassis (2150 & Photonics), Filters, and

Modules, 323-1851-201.5.
For more information that can be useful in preparing to install the shelf
assembly, refer to the sections on the following topics in Planning,
NTRN10ER, and Planning - Ordering Information, 323-1851-151, as
applicable:
• bay/rack configurations—Planning, NTRN10ER, Part 1, feature overview
section
• bay equipping rules, including 6500 equipment rack space requirements
and rack unit spacing—Planning - Ordering Information, 323-1851-151,
configuration rules section
• shelf assemblies—Planning, NTRN10ER, Part 1, shelf and equipment
descriptions section
• 6500 shelf and equipment—Planning - Ordering Information,
323-1851-151, section on bays, shelf assemblies, and hardware
• additional front exhaust considerations—Planning, NTRN10ER, Part 1,
feature overview section
• engineering rules regarding the venting options—Planning - Ordering
Information, 323-1851-151, configuration rules section and section on
circuit packs, modules, pluggable modules, and interface hardware
• supported venting options on shelf variants—Planning, NTRN10ER,
Part 1, Shelf and equipment descriptions section
• power specifications—Planning, NTRN10ER, Part 3

• supported shelf processors—Planning - Ordering Information,

323-1851-151, section on circuit packs, modules, pluggable modules, and
interface hardware
For more information on the 6500 14-slot shelves, refer to the following
technical publications:
• Part 1 of Planning, NTRN10ER
• Planning - Ordering Information, 323-1851-151
Before you begin the procedures in this section, make sure that
• you have determined your site prerequisites
• you have determined your equipment prerequisites
• you have available all required tools and materials
Refer to the section on preparing for installation in Installation - General
Information, 323-1851-201.0 for information on the above.
• you have read the section on observing product and personnel safety
guidelines in Installation - General Information, 323-1851-201.0
Circuit packs with 90-degree SFPs

Adhere to the following recommendations if you use the shelf front cover (see
“Shelf front covers and extension kits—overview” on page 1-4) and circuit
packs that have 90-degree SFPs:
• Use fibers with standard short 42.5 mm flexible boots.
• It is not recommended to use in-line plug attenuators on the circuit pack
faceplate (recommend to install at the patch panel or far-end termination).
• However, if you want to use attenuators on circuit pack faceplates, see the
following requirements:
— Only current vintage optical circuit packs with angled optical ports
(SFP, XFP and bulkhead adapters) can be used. This instruction does
not constitute a requirement or imply that any new optical circuit packs
will be able to use fixed pad attenuators at the faceplate. Fixed LC pad
attenuators cannot be used on circuit packs with horizontal optical
ports such as SuperMux. Also, attenuators cannot be used on the
faceplate of the CMD44 or other similar designed product. Attenuators
cannot be used with fiber boot bending clips as they may result in an
interference with the inside of the shelf front cover thereby imparting
an unacceptable side load to the optical connector.
— It is recommended for use on the receive port as they are generally
oriented with more clearance between interface and the inside of the
shelf door. (The Rx port is typically the lower port on SFPs and XFPs.)
— Ciena-supplied LC fixed pad attenuators must be used.

— Ciena-supplied and/or Ciena-approved equivalent LC fiber patchcords

with 1.6 mm bend insensitive fiber and short, flexible LC boot must be
used.
• Use MSA-compliant optical SFPs (standard body length).
If using 2.0 mm diameter fibers, only the first (top) 14 SFPs can be used
due to congestion in the shelf fiber manager. If using 1.6 mm diameter
fibers, all 16 SFPs can be used. Bend-insensitive fibers are
recommended.
Shelf front covers and extension kits—overview

See “Shelf front covers and extension kits—14-slot shelves” on page 1-5.
Shelf front cover kits with extended depth extend the space between the circuit
pack faceplates and the shelf front cover to accommodate the use of long fiber
boots (greater than 42.5 mm) and/or in-line optical attenuators (fixed pads).
For additional details, see Planning - Ordering Information, 323-1851-151.

Table 1-1
Shelf front covers and extension kits—14-slot shelves
Shelf
Shelf front cover or extension kit 14-slot shelf 14-slot converged shelf 14-slot
and related procedure NTK503AA, TK503ADE5, packet-optical
NTK503AB, NTK503BDE5, shelf
NTK503BA, NTK503CDE5 NTK503SA
NTK503CAE5,
NTK503CCE55,
NTK503GA
NTK509CY: 6500 14-slot Shelf — supported —

Front Cover Extension Kit for use (NTK503ADE5 or
with Shelf Front Cover NTK503CDE5 only)
NTK509CBE6
Note: Shelf Front Cover
Procedure 1-20, “Installing a 6500
Extension Kit NTY509CY
14-slot Shelf Front Cover Extension
cannot be bolted to
Kit NTK509CY for use with Shelf
mounting brackets
Front Cover NTK509CBE6”
NTK509MAE6
(manufacture
discontinued).
NTK509CCE6: Shelf Front Cover — supported —

for 6500 14-slot converged optical (NTK503ADE5 only)
shelf NTK503ADE5
Procedure 1-21, “Installing or
removing Shelf Front Cover
NTK509CCE6 for 6500 14-slot
converged optical shelf
NTK503ADE5”
NTK509CCE6: 6500 14-slot — supported —

converged optical/rear electrical (NTK503CDE5 only)
shelf NTK503CDE5
converged optical/rear electrical
shelf NTK503CDE5”
NTK509CCE6: Shelf Front Cover — — supported

for 6500 14-slot packet-optical shelf
NTK503SA
packet-optical shelf NTK503SA”

Table 1-1
Shelf front covers and extension kits—14-slot shelves (continued)
Shelf
NTK503CAE5,
NTK503CCE55,
NTK503GA
NTK509CZ: 6500 14-slot Shelf — supported —

Front Cover Extension Kit (NTK503ADE5 and
NTK509CZ for use with Shelf Front NTK503CDE5 only)
Cover NTK509CCE6
Note: Shelf Front Cover
Procedure 1-24, “Installing a 6500
Extension Kit NTY509CZ
14-slot Shelf Front Cover Extension
cannot be bolted to
Kit NTK509CZ for use with Shelf
mounting brackets
Front Cover NTK509CCE6”
NTK509MAE6
(manufacture
discontinued).
NTK509CD: 6500 14-slot Shelf — supported —

Front Cover Kit W/ Extended Depth (NTK503ADE5,
for 6500 14-slot converged optical NTK503CDE5 only)
shelf NTK503ADE5 + 6500-14
Supplementary bracket kit
500-0095-001
removing a 6500 14-slot Shelf Front
Cover Kit W/ Extended Depth
NTK509CD for 6500 14-slot
converged shelf NTK503ADE5/
NTK503CDE5”

Table 1-1
Shelf
NTK503CAE5,
NTK503CCE55,
NTK503GA
NTK509CD: 6500 14-slot Shelf — — supported
Front Cover Kit W/ Extended Depth
NTK509CD for 6500 14-slot
packet-optical shelf NTK503SA
(new installations)
removing on NTK503SA a 6500 14-
slot Shelf Front Cover Kit W/
Extended Depth NTK509CD”
NTK509DCE6: Shelf Front Cover — The NTK509DCE6 front —

on 6500 14-slot converged optical/ cover can be used on the
front electrical shelf NTK503BDE5 14-slot converged optical/
Procedure 1-27, “Installing or front electrical
removing Shelf Front Cover (NTK503BDE5) shelf.
NTK509DCE6 on 6500 14-slot When used on the 14-slot
converged optical/front electrical converged optical/front
shelf NTK503BDE5” electrical shelf
(NTK503BDE5), the fan
grill must be removed and
discarded as it is mutually
exclusive with the shelf
front cover
NTK509DCE6.
NTK509DCE6 can also
be used on 14-slot optical/
front electrical, converged
optical/front electrical,
and Metro front electrical
shelves to replace
NTK509DAE6 and
NTK509DB, which are
Manufacture
Discontinued (MD).

Table 1-1
Shelf
NTK503CAE5,
NTK503CCE55,
NTK503GA
NTK509CX: 14-slot Optical/Front — supported —

Electrical Shelf Cover Extension Kit (NTK503BDE5 only,
for use with NTK509DCE6 using shelf front cover
Procedure 1-28, “Installing a 6500 NTK509DCE6 and
14-slot Optical/Front Electrical mounting brackets
Shelf Cover Extension Kit NTK509MDE6,
NTK509CX for use with Shelf Front NTK509MFE6,
Cover NTK509DCE6” NTK509MHE6, or
NTK509MKE6)
Precautions
CAUTION
Risk of equipment damage
Make sure you know how to handle electronic components
correctly before you begin installation procedures. Incorrect
handling can cause damage to static-sensitive components.
CAUTION
Risk of shelf malfunction
Ciena recommends that you do not use cellular phones at any
6500 site. The use of cellular phones in proximity to 6500
equipment can cause shelf malfunction.
Abbreviations used in procedures

1U one rack unit (1.75 in.)
BIP breaker interface panel
CFP C form-factor pluggable
DPO dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) pluggable optics
DSM DS1 service module
DVM digital voltmeter

EDP engineering drawing package
EEA Extended Equipment Aperture
EIA Electronics Industries Alliance
ESD electrostatic discharge
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
FIP fuse interface panel
FOTR flexible optical transponder
IDP installation drawing package
MOTR multiplexing optical transponder
OMX optical multiplexer
PTE Physical Telecommunication Environment
QSFP+ Enhanced quad (4-channel) small form-factor pluggable
QSFP28 Enhanced quad (4-channel) small form-factor pluggable 28
SFP small form-factor pluggable
SFP28 small form-factor pluggable 28
WT wavelength translator
XFP large form-factor pluggable
ZTP zero touch provisioning
Procedure list
Table 1-2 lists the procedures in this section.
ATTENTION
Make sure that you follow the recommendations described in “Circuit packs
with 90-degree SFPs” on page 1-3 if you use the shelf front cover circuit
packs that have 90-degree SFPs.
Note: After you have installed all shelves, the system is ready for system
line-up and testing (SLAT). Make sure the network element is powered
down before you proceed to SLAT. See Commissioning and Testing,
323-1851-221.

Table 1-2
Installation procedures
Procedure Comment
“Installing a 6500 14-slot shelf (all variants), access panel, cooling fan Required
modules, and air plenum” on page 1-13
“Installing the maintenance interface card in the 14-slot shelf” on page Required
1-58
“Installing power input cards and connecting power cables in a 6500 Required
14-slot shelf (all variants)” on page 1-61
“Installing power cables and testing input power to the 1U BIP/FIP” on Required if you have installed
page 1-75 a 1U BIP/FIP (For the
procedure to install a 1U BIP/
FIP, refer to Installation -
General Information,
323-1851-201.0.)
“Testing power to the 6500 shelf” on page 1-89 Required
“Installing the shelf processor” on page 1-96 Required.

• Before you perform this
procedure, make sure that
the cooling fan module and
applicable power input cards
are installed and tested.
• You must perform this
procedure before installing
any other circuit packs into
the shelf. Otherwise, you risk
damaging equipment.
“Connecting control and communication cables” on page 1-103 Required
“Installing circuit packs in the 6500 14-slot shelf” on page 1-124 Required.
Before you perform this
procedure, make sure that
• the shelf processor is
installed in the shelf and
operating correctly, and
• no power-related and cooling
fan module-related alarms
exist on the system
“Inserting or removing circuit packs in the 6500 shelf” on page 1-138 Perform as required or when
referred to from another
procedure.

Table 1-2
Installation procedures (continued)
Procedure Comment
“Installing and removing pluggable modules” on page 1-141 Perform as required or when
procedure.
“Installing a CMD16, CMD24, CMD64, CMD96, CMD44, eCMD44, Perform as required or when
OMD4, BMD2, GMD10, UBMD2, or MBMD2 module” on page 1-155 referred to from another
procedure.
“Installing an OMC2 chassis and associated modules” on page 1-175 Perform as required or when
procedure.
“Installing a Fiber Interconnect Module (FIM)” on page 1-183 Perform as required or when
procedure.
“Installing electrical I/O hardware and I/O panels in the 6500 14-slot Perform as required.
shelf” on page 1-191 Does not apply to the 14-slot
optical, converged optical, or
packet-optical shelf.
“Routing electrical I/O and Category 5e cables into the electrical Perform as required.
interface area of the 6500 14-slot shelf” on page 1-207 Does not apply to the 14-slot
optical, converged optical, or
“Routing fiber-optic cables and electrical cables to circuit packs in the Required
6500 shelf” on page 1-220
“Guidelines for cable routing to electrical SFP and optical ports on the Perform as required or when
same shelf” on page 1-233 referred to from another
procedure.
“Installation guidelines for QSFP28-QSFP28 DAC cable” on page Perform as required or when
1-238 referred to from another
procedure
“Connecting or disconnecting fiber-optic cables” on page 1-245 Required
“Installing a 6500 14-slot Shelf Front Cover Extension Kit NTK509CY Perform as required or when
for use with Shelf Front Cover NTK509CBE6” on page 1-268 referred to from another
procedure.
“Installing or removing Shelf Front Cover NTK509CCE6 for 6500 14- Perform as required or when
slot converged optical shelf NTK503ADE5” on page 1-294 referred to from another
procedure.

Table 1-2
Installation procedures (continued)
Procedure Comment
slot converged optical/rear electrical shelf NTK503CDE5” on page referred to from another
1-313 procedure.
slot packet-optical shelf NTK503SA” on page 1-327 referred to from another
procedure.
“Installing a 6500 14-slot Shelf Front Cover Extension Kit NTK509CZ Perform as required or when
for use with Shelf Front Cover NTK509CCE6” on page 1-337 referred to from another
procedure.
“Installing or removing a 6500 14-slot Shelf Front Cover Kit W/ Perform as required or when
Extended Depth NTK509CD for 6500 14-slot converged shelf referred to from another
NTK503ADE5/NTK503CDE5” on page 1-354 procedure.
“Installing or removing on NTK503SA a 6500 14-slot Shelf Front Cover Perform as required or when
Kit W/ Extended Depth NTK509CD” on page 1-376 referred to from another
procedure.
“Installing or removing Shelf Front Cover NTK509DCE6 on 6500 14- Perform as required or when
slot converged optical/front electrical shelf NTK503BDE5” on page referred to from another
1-391 procedure.
“Installing a 6500 14-slot Optical/Front Electrical Shelf Cover Extension Perform as required or when
Kit NTK509CX for use with Shelf Front Cover NTK509DCE6” on page referred to from another
1-408 procedure.
“Connecting a terminal server, a terminal, or a modem to the 6500 14- Perform as required or when
slot shelf” on page 1-416 referred to from another
procedure

Procedure 1-1
Installing a 6500 14-slot shelf (all variants), access
panel, cooling fan modules, and air plenum
Use this procedure to install the 14-slot 6500 shelf into a 19-inch, 23-inch, or
ETSI equipment rack.
This procedure includes instructions on the following:

• unpacking and inspecting
• removing the shipping bracket if circuit packs are shipped in place
• installing mounting brackets
• installing a 14-slot shelf into a rack
• grounding the 14-slot shelf
• installing access panel variants:
— SDH access panel (NTK505LA)
— SONET/SDH-J access panel (NTK505MA)
— SDH-J access panel (NTK505KA)
— SONET access panel with connections for eight external slots
(NTK505MBE5)
• preparing and installing the cooling fan modules as applicable
• installing and grounding the air plenum
For details on installing Power Input Cards, the maintenance interface card,
and circuit packs, see the related procedure in this section.
CAUTION
Do not insert any circuit packs—except the access panel and
maintenance interface card—into an unpowered 6500 14-slot
shelf. Otherwise, you risk damaging equipment. The figures in
this procedure show various components installed in their
slots, for illustration purposes only. Install only the components
indicated in this procedure.
After completing this procedure, you must install the
maintenance interface card, power input cards, connect power
cables, power up the 6500 14-slot shelf, test the power input
cards and cooling fan module, and install the shelf processor,
before seating any circuit packs into the backplane.

Procedure 1-1 (continued)

Installing a 6500 14-slot shelf (all variants), access panel, cooling fan modules, and air plenum
For the procedures on installing the shelf cover, see Table 1-1 on page 1-5.
The 14-slot 6500 shelves consist of multiple components that you must install
to make the shelf complete, as follows:
• for the optical and the optical/front electrical shelf - the card cage and,
depending on your shelf variant, the cooling fan module
• for the optical/rear electrical shelf - the card cage, and, depending on your
shelf variant, the cooling fan module and the air plenum
• for the metro shelf - the card cage and the fan units
• for the converged optical shelf, optical/front electrical shelf, and optical/
rear electrical shelf - the card cage and the fan units
The illustrations in this procedure show various components installed in their
respective slots in the 14-slot shelf.
Depending on your requirements, the card cage, the cooling fan module, the
air plenum, and the mounting bracket kits are shipped in different packaging
options. In each case, you must install the card cage, the cooling fan
module, and the mounting bracket kits, and the air plenum (if applicable),
respectively, to make the shelf complete. The cooling fan module is integrated
on the metro/front electrical shelf, converged optical shelf, optical/front
electrical shelf, and the optical/rear electrical shelf.
For examples of the 14-slot 6500 shelves and front views of the access
panels, see the following illustrations:
• “Example of a 6500 14-slot optical shelf”
• “Example of a 6500 14-slot optical/front electrical shelf”
• “Example of a 6500 14-slot optical/rear electrical shelf (including cooling
fan module and air plenum - rear side shown with covers)”
• “Example of a 6500 14-slot metro front electrical shelf”
• “Example of a 14-slot converged optical shelf or a 14-slot packet-optical
shelf and cooling fan module”
• “Example of a 14-slot converged optical/front electrical shelf and cooling
fan module”
• “Example of a 14-slot converged optical/rear electrical shelf and cooling
fan module”
• “Front views of access panels”
• “SONET/SDH-J access panel”


Figure 1-1
Example of a 6500 14-slot optical shelf


Figure 1-2
Example of a 6500 14-slot optical/front electrical shelf


Figure 1-3
Example of a 6500 14-slot optical/rear electrical shelf (including cooling fan module and air
plenum - rear side shown with covers)


Figure 1-4
Example of a 6500 14-slot metro front electrical shelf
Cooling
unit
Access panel
Card cage
Power input
ESD jack cards
Maintenance
Electrical interface interface card
circuit pack
ESD jack
Filler card
Cross-connect
circuit packs
Shelf
processor
E1 I/O module handle

E1 cables
E1 I/O module Filler plate


Figure 1-5
Example of a 14-slot converged optical shelf or a 14-slot packet-optical shelf and cooling fan
module


Figure 1-6
Example of a 14-slot converged optical/front electrical shelf and cooling fan module


Figure 1-7
Example of a 14-slot converged optical/rear electrical shelf and cooling fan module
Rear view of OPTICAL / REAR ELECTRICAL

(shown with rear facing blowers)


Figure 1-8
Front views of access panels
A ESI B A ESO B ESI/ESO DTE Alarm Telemetry COLAN-A COLAN-B ILAN In ILAN Out COLAN-X
Access Panel (SDH) (NTK505LA)
A ESO B ESI/ESO ACO Visual / Audible Alarms Telemetry COLAN-A COLAN-B ILAN In ILAN Out COLAN-X
DTE
6.312 MHz
Access Panel (SONET/J-SDH) (NTK505MA)
A ESO B A ESI/ESO B DTE Alarms Telemetry COLAN-A COLAN-B ILAN In ILAN Out COLAN-X
6.312 MHz
Access Panel (SDH-J) (NTK505KA)
External 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 DTE ESI/ESO/ 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 Telemetry COLAN-A COLAN-B ILAN In ILAN Out COLAN-X
Slots Alarms A
Access Panel with connections for eight external slots (SONET) (NTK505MBE5)
Figure 1-9
SONET/SDH-J access panel


Prerequisites
Make sure that
• The equipment rack is installed, secured, and grounded according to
manufacturer instructions.
• The position of existing cables is such that the addition of the 14-slot shelf
to the rack will not damage cables or interfere with traffic.
• You have two persons available to install the 14-slot shelf.
• For installations above shoulder level, a secure ladder is available.
Note: When CPL modules are co-located with a 6500 shelf in a cabinet
with a door or panel facing the shelf exhaust, the 6500 shelf must be
located above the CPL modules and the cabinet door/panel must be
perforated with at least 73% open area. The inlet air temperature to CPL
modules must not exceed 40°C for long-term (normal) operation when
measured at a distance of 2 inches from the module faceplate.
• You have the following tools and materials:

— Phillips screwdriver
— 7-mm socket
— 10-mm nut driver
— 5/16 in. torque wrench
— the installation kit, which includes the miscellaneous hardware
required for shelf mounting (bolts, lock washers, alignment studs, and
screws)
— No. 6 AWG (16 mm2), 7-strand copper insulated conductor grounding
wire and grounding lugs (included in the installation kit)
— crimping tool, No. 6 AWG (16 mm2) - #1/0 AWG
— the appropriate personal grounding device to dissipate electrostatic
charges
CAUTION
Risk of traffic loss
Shelves that are configured to exclusively exhaust air out the
front may affect the inlet air temperature of nearby shelves. If
front exhaust is required and a 6500 shelf is equipped in the
same rack as one or more other shelves configured for front
exhaust, refer to front exhaust considerations in the Bay/rack
configurations section in Part 1 of Planning, NTRN10ER.


• You have the correct mounting bracket (one kit for each shelf). You will
install one bracket, as required, to each side of the applicable 14-slot shelf.
See “Reference list of available mounting brackets, mounting bracket kits,
and front cover extension kits for 14-slot shelves” on page 1-24. For more
information, see the ordering information section, the configuration rules
section, and the hardware section in Planning - Ordering Information,
323-1851-151.
• If the shelf being installed is a replacement of a previously commissioned
shelf and if the initial shelf being replaced is part of a node managed by
OneControl:
— ensure you de-enroll the node in question before the shelf installation
activity. The node can be re-enrolled in OneControl after the newly
installed shelf is successfully commissioned.
— be aware that the MAC address that the network element will report for
the replacement shelf will be different than the MAC address of the
shelf you replaced
For more information, refer to the OneControl Unified Management

System Standard Operations Guide, 450-3201-301.
Table 1-3
Reference list of available mounting brackets, mounting bracket kits, and front cover extension
kits for 14-slot shelves
See Details
Table 1-4 on page 1-25 Mounting bracket kits for 14-slot converged optical and converged
optical/rear-electrical shelves NTK503ADE5/NTK503CDE5
Table 1-5 on page 1-28 Mounting bracket kits for 14-slot converged optical/front-electrical
shelves NTK503BDE5
Table 1-6 on page 1-30 Mounting bracket kits for 14-slot packet-optical shelf NTK503SA
Table 1-1 on page 1-5 Front cover extension kit NTK509CY to use with shelf cover
NTK509CBE6 for a 14-slot shelf
Front cover extension kit NTK509CZ to use with shelf cover

NTK509CCE5 for a 14-slot shelf


Table 1-4
Bracket kits for 6500 14-slot converged optical and converged optical/rear-electrical shelves
NTK503ADE5/NTK503CDE5
Rack Bracket kit PEC Hole Supported Center-to-center Mount panel width
type (Note 1) spacing setback distance between
(Note 9) bracket holes
19-inch/ NTZF99XD: This kit includes multiple bracket kits (which are also separately orderable).
ETSI/ Select and use one of the bracket kits as applicable. You can order this kit if you do not know
23-inch which frame type will be used or if you want to have all the brackets on site to accommodate
different frame types.
To mount the 14-slot shelf (NTK503ADE5/NTK503CDE5) into
• a 19-inch rack, use NTK509MCE6 (Note 2, Note 3, Note 4, and Note 5) or NTK509MGE6
(Note 2, Note 3, Note 4, and Note 6), as applicable
• an ETSI rack, use NTK509MEE6 (Note 2, Note 3, and Note 7)
• a 23-inch rack, use NTK509MJE6 (Note 2, Note 3, and Note 7)
Description: Bracket kit, 6500 14-slot shelf (NTK503ADE5/NTK503CDE5), includes brackets for
installation in 19-inch, ETSI, and 23-inch racks.
19-inch NTK509MCE6 EIA 127 mm 465 mm 483 mm

(Note 2, Note 3, 5 in. 18.31 in. 19 in.
Note 4, and Note
5)
Description: Bracket Kit, 6500 8U/10U, 465 mm center-to-center mounting holes, 127 mm setback,
EIA universal hole pitch.
19-inch NTK509MGE6 EIA 100 mm 465 mm 483 mm

(Note 2, Note 3, 3.9 in. 18.31 in. 19 in.
Note 4, and Note
6)

Table 1-4
NTK503ADE5/NTK503CDE5 (continued)
ETSI NTK509MEE6 25 mm 50 mm 515 mm 535 mm

(Note 2, Note 3, hole pitch 2 in. 20.28 in. 21.06 in.
and Note 7)
25 mm hole pitch.
23 inch NTK509MJE6 EIA 127 mm 567 mm 584 mm

(Note 2, Note 3, 5 in. 22.32 in. 23 in.
and Note 7)

Table 1-4
NTK503ADE5/NTK503CDE5 (continued)
23-inch NTK509LJ EIA 127 mm 567 mm 584 mm

(Note 8) 5 in. 22.32 in. 23 in.
Description: Bracket Kit, 6500-14, Extended Depth, Optical/Rear IO shelf, EIA-23" x 5" SB.
This bracket kit
• applies to 14-slot optical shelf NTK503ADE5 when using shelf front cover NTK509CCE6 and 14-slot
optical/rear IO shelf NTK503CA/NTK503CDE5, and
• extends the footprint to create additional space between the circuit pack faceplates and the shelf cover
to allow the use of different fiber boots and fixed pad attenuators.
Note 1: This table includes brackets that are also supported for use with the NTK503CA shelf variant
(manufacture discontinued). Your order includes one bracket kit as listed in this table. Bracket kits
include mounting screws. With bracket kit NTZF99XD, you install only one set of brackets, as applicable.
14-slot shelf air flow direction is front-to-rear or front-to-front, depending on the equipped cooling fan
modules (rear exhaust or front exhaust).
Note 2: When mounting two 14-slot optical/rear electrical shelves NTK503CA that are stacked to share
one external cooling unit shelf, two 8U/10U mounting bracket kits are required. One set of mounting
brackets for one air plenum and one cooling unit are then discarded.
Note 3: If you have already installed 14-slot shelf NTK503ADE5 or NTK503CDE5 using bracket kits
NTK509MCE6, NTK509MEE6, NTK509MGE6 or NTK509MJE6 and require extended room between
the faceplates and the shelf cover, you can use front cover extension kit NTK509CY with shelf front
cover NTK509CBE6 (manufacture discontinued) or use shelf front cover extension kit NTK509CZ with
shelf front cover NTK509CCE6, as applicable. See the related procedure in Table 1-2 on page 1-10.
Shelf front cover extension kits (NTY509CY and NTK509CZ) cannot be bolted to mounting brackets
NTK509MAE6 (manufacture discontinued).
Note 4: When using 19-inch rack bracket kit NTK509MCE6 or NTK509MGE6, power cables must be
routed in front of the right-side bracket as it is not possible to route power cables through the brackets
and along the right side of the shelf.
Note 5: For a PTE2000-EEA bay equipped with Adapter Rail Kit, 44U, PTE2000-EEA rack to EIA-19”
x 5” setback NTRU0570, use mounting bracket NTK509MCE6.
x 4” setback NTRU0560, use mounting bracket NTK509MGE6.
Note 7: Bracket kits NTK509MEE6 and NTK509MJE6 have cut-outs so that power cables (up to two 2
AWG / 35 mm2 cables per cut-out) can be routed towards the rear of the rack along the right side of the
shelf if required.
Note 8: Comparing to bracket kit NTK509MJE6, bracket kit NTK509LJ provides the same frame
mounting points, while moving the shelf front cover (door) mounting points forward.
Note 9: Use each bracket kit at the specified setback position(s) only. Attaching the brackets to an
unsupported setback position may prevent the installation of power input cards, power cables, or power
terminal safety covers.


Table 1-5
Bracket kits for 6500 14-slot converged optical/front-electrical shelf NTK503BDE5
Rack type Bracket kit PE C Hole Supported Center-to-center Mount

(Note 1) spacing setback (Note 6) distance between panel width
bracket holes
19-inch/ NTZF99XK: This kit includes multiple bracket kits (which are also separately orderable).
ETSI/ Select and use one of the bracket kits as applicable. You can order this kit if you do not
23-inch know which frame type will be used or if you want to have all the brackets on site to
accommodate different frame types.
To mount 14-slot shelf NTK503BDE5 into
• a 19-inch rack, use NTK509MDE6 (Note 2 and Note 3) or NTK509MHE6 (Note 2 and
Note 4), as applicable
• an ETSI rack, use NTK509MFE6 (Note 5)
• a 23-inch rack, use NTK509MKE6 (Note 5)
Description: Bracket kit, 6500 14-slot shelf (NTK503BDE5), includes brackets for installation in
19-inch, ETSI, and 23-inch racks.
19-inch NTK509MDE6 EIA 127 mm 465 mm 483 mm

(Note 2 and Note 5 in. 18.31 in. 19 in.
3)
Description: Bracket Kit, 6500 18U, 465 mm center-to-center mounting holes,127 mm setback, EIA
universal hole pitch.
19-inch NTK509MHE6 EIA 100 mm 465 mm 483 mm

(Note 2 and Note 3.9 in. 18.31 in. 19 in.
4)
ETSI NTK509MFE6 25 mm hole 50 mm 515 mm 535 mm

(Note 5) pitch 2 in. 20.28 in. 21.06 in.
Description: Bracket Kit, 6500 18U, 515 mm center-to-center mounting holes, 50 mm setback, 25 mm
hole pitch

Table 1-5
Bracket kits for 6500 14-slot converged optical/front-electrical shelf NTK503BDE5 (continued)
Rack type Bracket kit PE C Hole Supported Center-to-center Mount

(Note 1) spacing setback (Note 6) distance between panel width
bracket holes
23 in. NTK509MKE6 EIA 127 mm 567 mm 584 mm

(Note 5) 5 in. 22.32 in. 23 in.
Note 1: Your order includes one bracket kit as listed in this table. Bracket kits include mounting screws.
With bracket kit NTZF99XK, you install only one set of brackets, as applicable. 14-slot shelf air flow
direction is front-to-rear or front-to-front depending on the equipped cooling fan modules (rear exhaust
or front exhaust).
Note 2: Using 19-inch rack bracket kit NTK509MDE6, or NTK509MHE6, power cables must be routed
in front of the right-side bracket as it is not possible to route power cables through the brackets and
along the right side of the shelf.
x 5” setback NTRU6570, use mounting bracket NTK509MDE6.
x 4” setback NTRU6560, use mounting bracket NTK509MHE6.
Note 5: Bracket kits NTK509MFE6 and NTK509MKE6 have cut-outs so that power cables (up to two
2 AWG / 35mm2 cables per cut-out) can be routed towards the rear of the rack along the right side of
the shelf if required.


Table 1-6
Bracket kits for 6500 14-slot packet-optical shelf NTK503SA
Bracket kit Bracket kit PEC Hole Supported Center-to-center Mount panel
and rack type (Note 1) spacing setback (Note 5) distance between width
bracket holes
19-inch/ETSI/ NTZF99XF: This kit includes multiple bracket kits (which are also separately
23-inch orderable). Select and use one of the bracket kits as applicable. You can order this kit
if you do not know which frame type will be used or if you want to have all the brackets
on site to accommodate different frame types.
To mount 14-slot shelf NTK503SA into
• a 19-inch rack, use NTK509MR (Note 2 and Note 3)
• an ETSI rack, use NTK509MS (Note 2 and Note 4)
• a 23-inch rack, use NTK509MT (Note 2 and Note 4)
Description: Bracket kit, 6500 14-slot packet-optical shelf (NTK503SA), includes brackets for
installation in 19-inch, ETSI, and 23-inch racks.
19-inch NTK509MR EIA/ 100 mm/127 mm 465 mm 483 mm

(Note 2 and Note WECO 4 in./5 in. 18.31 in. 19 in.
3) hole pitch
Description: Bracket Kit, 6500-14, 19” rack, 465 mm center-to-center mounting holes, EIA/WECO hole
pitch.
ETSI NTK509MS ETSI hole 50 mm/100 mm 515 mm 535 mm

(600 mm) (Note 2 and Note pitch 20.28 in. 21.06 in.
4)
Description: Bracket Kit, 6500-14, 600 mm rack, 515 mm center-to-center mounting holes, ETSI hole
pitch.

Table 1-6
Bracket kits for 6500 14-slot packet-optical shelf NTK503SA (continued)
Bracket kit Bracket kit PEC Hole Supported Center-to-center Mount panel
and rack type (Note 1) spacing setback (Note 5) distance between width
bracket holes
23 inch NTK509MT EIA/ 100 mm/127 mm 567 mm 584 mm

(Note 2 and Note WECO 4 in./5 in. 22.32 in. 23 in.
4) hole pitch
Description: Bracket Kit, 6500-14, 23” rack, 567 mm center-to-center mounting holes, EIA/WECO hole
pitch.
Note 1: Your order includes one bracket kit as listed in this table. Bracket kits include mounting screws.
With bracket kit NTZF99XF, you install only one set of bracket kits, as applicable. 14-slot shelf air flow
direction is front-to-rear or front-to-front depending on the equipped cooling fan modules (rear exhaust
or front exhaust).
Note 2: When installing bracket kits NTK509MR, NTK509MS, and NTK509MT, you must install the
included washers to prevent the screws from entering the cooling fan module slot area.
Note 3: When using 19-inch rack bracket kit NTK509MR, power cables must be routed in front of the
right side bracket as it is not possible to route power cables through the brackets and along the right
side of the shelf.
Note 4: Bracket kits NTK509MS and NTK509MT have cut-outs so that power cables (up to four 2 AWG
/ 35 mm2 cables per cut-out) can be routed towards the rear of the rack along the right side of the shelf
if required.


Guidelines and precautions

For a raised floor (through-floor) application, install the 6500 shelves from the
bottom of the rack up to maximize space for routing cables coming through the
floor. For an overhead application, install the 6500 shelves from the top of the
rack down to maximize space for routing cables that come off the cable racks.
DANGER
Risk of electrical shock and equipment damage
Grounding is mandatory to satisfy local electrical codes/
regulations for the safe use of the equipment.
Ground the rack/cabinet to the common building network

(CBN), isolated bonding network (IBN) or ETSI Mesh Bonding
Network ground/protective earth. For details, see the
procedure on connecting the rack ground to the office ground
in Installation - General Information, 323-1851-201.0.
Correct grounding of the equipment rack/cabinet is mandatory

in accordance to electrical safety standards and mitigates the
electrostatic discharge (ESD) and operational concerns
described in Installation - General Information,
323-1851-201.0, the section on observing product and
personnel safety guidelines, the section on consequences of
incorrect grounding. For additional details, see the section on
working with power.
Also, ground every 6500 shelf and peripheral tray as described

in the related procedure. Make sure that you perform the
grounding steps in this procedure.


CAUTION
Risk of equipment damage (14-slot shelves with front exhaust
fans installed into a cabinet with a front door)
If you are installing a 14-slot shelf with front exhaust fans into
a cabinet with a front door (which must be perforated), do not
equip the 14-slot shelf with the exhaust air deflector grill
(NTK509FA/NTK509FAE6 included with front venting cooling
unit kits NTK507BA/NTK507BBE5/NTK507BCE5 and metro
front electrical shelf assembly NTK503GAE5.) Removal of the
exhaust air deflector grill improves the exhaust airflow through
a perforated cabinet door and helps mitigate the possibility of
the shelf overheating.
CAUTION
Risk of equipment damage and traffic loss
Install the 6500 shelf over a non-inflammable surface only.
CAUTION
The 6500 shelf is suitable for connection to intrabuilding or
unexposed wiring or cabling only.
CAUTION
Electrostatic discharge can damage electrostatic sensitive
devices. Use antistatic protection to avoid damaging circuit
packs.
Step Action
1 Verify that the equipment rack/cabinet is grounded. Also, you must ground
every 6500 shelf (and any peripheral trays as described in the applicable
installation procedure). Grounding is mandatory.
Follow the instructions in the precautionary message “Risk of electrical shock
and equipment damage” on page 1-32.


Step Action
2 Wear an appropriate ESD personal grounding device to dissipate

electrostatic charges. If you are wearing an antistatic wrist strap, connect the
cord to the ESD jack on another shelf installed and grounded in a grounded
rack/cabinet or clip to a suitable ground point.
3 Select your next step.
If Then
you are installing a14-slot shelf with do not equip the 14-slot shelf with
front exhaust fans into a cabinet with a the exhaust air deflector grill.
front door (which must be perforated) (The related ordering codes are as
follows: NTK509FA/NTK509FAE6
included with front venting cooling
unit kits NTK507BA/
NTK507BBE5/NTK507BCE5 and
metro front electrical shelf
assembly NTK503GAE5.)
Go to step 4.
otherwise go to step 4
Unpacking and inspecting the contents of the shipping containers

4 Unpack the contents of each shipping container.
5 Perform a visual inspection of the contents of the following shipping
containers for any signs of damage that can occur during shipment.
• for the optical shelf—10U card cage and cooling fan module
• for the converged optical shelf —13U card cage
• for the optical/front electrical shelf —18U card cage and cooling fan
module
• for the converged optical/front electrical shelf —18U card cage
• for the optical/rear electrical shelf—10U card cage, air plenum (can be
integrated, depending on shelf variant), and cooling fan module (can be
integrated, depending on shelf variant)
• for the converged optical/rear electrical shelf—13U card cage
• for the metro front electrical shelf—21U card cage and cooling fan
modules


Step Action
Unpacking components
6 Unpack the following components for each shelf and perform a visual
inspection of the contents of the containers (as applicable to the configuration
you ordered):
• common equipment: Power Input Cards (fused, breakered or
breakerless), maintenance interface card (MIC), shelf processor (SP)
circuit pack, access panel (SONET, SDH, SDH-J, or SONET/SDH-J type)
• circuit packs and interface filler cards, as applicable to the configuration
you ordered
• electrical I/O hardware, as applicable to the configuration you ordered:
up to eight E1 I/O modules, up to four E1 I/O panels, up to four DS-3/EC-1
I/O panels, up to four 48x10/100BT I/O panels, up to four 32xSTM-1e
panels
• various types of optical transponder circuit packs (as required for your
application) and filler cards
Depending on your requirements, the Power Input Cards, the MIC, the circuit
packs, and the filler cards can be shipped in place in the shelf.
Depending on your requirements, the E1 I/O modules can be shipped in place
in the metro front electrical shelf.
Preparing to install mounting brackets
7 Verify that the mounting brackets that correspond to the option you ordered
are present. See Table 1-3 on page 1-24 for details related to mounting
brackets for various rack types.
ATTENTION
The footprint of the 14-slot optical/rear IO shelf (NTK503ADE5/
NTK503CDE5/NTK503CA) can be extended to create additional space
between the circuit pack faceplates and the shelf cover to allow use of
different fiber boots and fixed pad attenuators. For details on the following
shelf cover extension kits, see Table 1-1 on page 1-5:
—14-slot front cover extension kit NTK509CY to use with shelf cover
NTK509CBE6
—14-slot front cover extension kit NTK509CZ to use with shelf cover
NTK509CCE6
These kits are used in the related shelves that are already installed.


Step Action
8 Follow the instructions listed before you install the mounting brackets.
• The shelf is shipped without mounting brackets assembled, but has
features on which to assemble the brackets. (In step 10, you will remove
the 10-mm nuts supplied with the shelf, install the brackets as indicated,
and then re-attach the nuts.)
• For the 14-slot packet-optical shelf, the 7U mounting bracket kit contains
left and right mounting brackets for one 14-slot packet-optical shelf. The
bracket kits also contain mounting screws and washers. The installation
of the washers is essential to prevent the screws from entering the
cooling fan module housing.
The NTK509MS and NTK509MT brackets include cut-outs to
accommodate 2x50A power cable feed-through (up to four 2 AWG
cables). These mounting brackets cannot be used in any other 14-slot
shelf type and the 14-slot packet-optical shelf cannot use any other
mounting bracket supported in other 14-slot shelf types.
• Make sure that you use a torque wrench to verify that torque has been
applied correctly: 27 lb-in. (or 311 g-m) for installation and 20 lb-in. (or
230 g-m) for inspection.
• The following mounting bracket kit extends the footprint to create

additional space between the circuit pack faceplates and the door to allow
the use of different fiber boots and fixed pad attenuators:
NTK509LJ for 14-slot optical shelf (NTK503ADE5) and 14-slot optical/
rear IO shelf (NTK503CDE5/NTK503CA)
• Do not use the 19-inch brackets at the ETSI bracket 50-mm setback
position because they interfere with the installation of 60 A Power Input
Cards (for NTK503ADE5, NTK503BDE5, NTK503CDE5, and NTK503SA
shelves) and 2x50A Power Input Cards (for NTK503SA shelf only).


Step Action
9 Determine the correct position for the shelf on the equipment rack.
Installing mounting brackets
10 Select the bracket kit to install. See “Example of shelf mounting brackets on
the optical shelf” on page 1-38.
If you are installing shelf Then you will perform the following for any
type of mounting bracket
NTK503ADE5/BDE5/CDE5 Use a wrench or socket driver to remove the
nuts from the studs in the side walls.
Install the brackets onto the studs.
Reinstall the nuts onto the studs. Torque to
27 lb-in. (or 311 g-m) for installation and
20 lb-in. (or 230 g-m) for inspection.
NTK503SA Place the bracket over the standoffs on the
side walls of the shelf based on the required
setback position.
Install the flat washer and SEMS screws.
Torque to 27 lb-in. (or 311 g-m) for installation
and 20 lb-in. (or 230 g-m) for inspection).
Example of installing 14-slot shelf bracket kit (NTK509LJ)

11 Perform step 12 to step 14 to install kit NTK509LJ onto a 14-slot optical shelf
(NTK503ADE5) or a 14-slot optical/rear IO shelf (NTK503CDE5/NTK503CA)
in a 23-inch equipment rack with a 127-mm setback.
Mounting bracket kit NTK509LJ extends the footprint to create additional
space between the circuit pack faceplates and the door to allow the use of
different fiber boots and fixed pad attenuators.
12 Install the left mounting bracket of the 14-slot shelf bracket kit (NTK509LJ) to
the left side of the 14-slot shelf using the M6 KEPS nuts from the shelf card
cage assembly (as shown in “Example of installing NTK509LJ” on page
1-39).


Step Action
Figure 1-10
Example of shelf mounting brackets on the optical shelf
13 Install the male hinges on the upper and lower left mounting bracket (which
you installed in step 12) with the M4 SEMS screws supplied with the 14-slot
shelf bracket kit.
14 Install the right mounting bracket of the 14-slot shelf bracket kit (NTK509LJ)
to the right side of the 14-slot shelf using the M6 KEPS nuts from the shelf
card cage assembly (as shown in “Example of installing NTK509LJ” on page
1-39).
You have completed installing the 14-slot shelf bracket kit (NTK509LJ) (see
“NTK509LJ installed—top view and front view” on page 1-40).


Step Action
Figure 1-11
Example of installing NTK509LJ


Step Action
Figure 1-12
NTK509LJ installed—top view and front view


Step Action

If you are installing Then
an optical/front electrical shelf, converged apply grommets onto the left
optical/front electrical shelf, or a metro and right side wall cutouts in
front electrical shelf the electrical cage area.
Then go to step 16.
Installing the shelf into the rack

16
CAUTION
Risk of dropping the equipment
To prevent the shelf from tipping and falling, you must
install the studs in the holes that match the bottom
holes of the shelf.
If applicable, align the alignment studs (fixed on the rear side of all brackets)
in the equipment rack, in the holes that match the bottom holes of the shelf.
See the following illustration for an example of mounting a 14-slot optical shelf
on an equipment rack.
Figure 1-13
Example of mounting a 14-slot optical shelf on an equipment rack


Step Action
17
WARNING
Risk of personal injury
The size of the 14-slot shelf requires that two persons
handle the shelf. If you are installing the shelf higher
than shoulder level, use a secure ladder to climb to the
necessary level.
While holding the shelf, use the alignment studs, if applicable, to support the
shelf.
18 Based on your rack type, select the mounting hardware from the shelf
deployment installation kit that you ordered.
For the front electrical shelves, use a minimum of six screws on each side.
For all other variants, use a minimum of four screws on each side.
If the rack type is Then select
PTE-2000 EEA the 12-24 thread-forming screws (from the shelf
installation kit, ANSI [imperial hardware]) to install
equipment onto the EIA adapter kit (5-inch or 4-inch
setback)
19-inch or 23-inch the 12-24 SEM screws or machine screws with lock
with tapped holes washers (from the shelf installation kit, ANSI
[imperial hardware])
19-inch or 23-inch the 12-24 thread-forming screws (from the shelf
with untapped holes installation kit, ANSI [imperial hardware])
ETSI the M6 SEM screws or machine screws with lock
washers, and M6 cage nuts (from the shelf
installation kit, ETSI [metric hardware])
19 Insert and tighten the appropriate mounting hardware in the top hole of each
bracket. Use a torque wrench to verify that torque has been applied correctly
according to rack manufacturer torque specifications. In the case of the
PTE2000 rack, for the M6 and 12-24 mounting options, that specification is
5.65 N-m (50 lb-in.) for installation and 4.52 N-m (40 lb-in.) for inspection.


Step Action
Grounding the shelf

Note: Use non-oxidizing compound before any crimp connections are made
on bare conductors. For details, see the grounding guidelines in
Installation - General Information, 323-1851-201.0, the section on preparing
for installation.
20
CAUTION
Risk of improper grounding due to poor contact with a
painted rack
If the rack is painted, follow company procedures to
remove the paint from the area where you will fasten
the bolt. Make sure that the bolt washer makes direct
contact with the rack.
Fasten one end of the ground cable (No. 6 AWG [16 mm2]) to the rack. Fasten
the other end of the ground cable to the ground studs located on the shelf
bracket (the location of the ground studs on the brackets is embossed with
the ground symbol). See “Example of a 6500 14-slot optical shelf” on page
1-44 for the grounding location on the left-hand side bracket (the illustration
shows an example of a 14-slot optical shelf. The locations are similar on the
other shelf variants).


Step Action
Figure 1-14
Example of a 6500 14-slot optical shelf
Installing the access panel

21 If standoff screws are present, unfasten and remove the standoffs. Standoffs
are present for shipping purposes and must be removed.
22 Position the access panel in the appropriate slot of the 14-slot shelf and slide
it in, engaging it in the tracks on the 14-slot shelf and into the backplane. See
“Installing the access panel (example shows an SDH access panel and an
optical shelf” on page 1-45.
23 Secure the access panel with the captive screws on the sides of the front of
the access panel. Use a Phillips screwdriver and torque to 1 N-m (9 lb-in.).


Step Action
Figure 1-15
Installing the access panel (example shows an SDH access panel and an optical shelf
Preparing the cooling fan module for installation

Note: The cooling fan module is integrated on the metro/front electrical shelf,
converged optical shelf, optical/front electrical shelf, and optical/rear electrical
shelf.
24 Remove the protective air grill from the cooling fan module by pulling the
retractable pins on both sides and pulling the protective air grill out.
If you will be installing Then
shelf cover NTK509CCE6 discard the protective air grill. It is no
or longer required. Then go to step 25.
shelf front cover kit with extended

depth NTK509CD
any shelf cover other than store the protective air grill in a safe
NTK509CCE6 or NTK509CD place. (You will re-install it later in
step 38.) Then go to step 25.


Step Action
25 For each fan unit, loosen the captive screw on the fan unit and remove the fan
unit. See Figure 1-16 and Figure 1-17.
CAUTION
Risk of circuit pack overheat
Hold and manipulate fan units by using the handle
provided on the front of the modules. Do not hold or
carry the fan units in a manner that could cause
detrimental contact to the printed circuit board or fan
backflow louvers. Backflow louvers must rotate freely
and close with reversed air flow in the event of a fan fail
condition. Failure to follow this caution can result in
damage to the backflow louvers and therefore impede
cooling air flow to the shelf in either regular operation or
in a fan fail condition.
Figure 1-16
Cooling fan module handling
Figure 1-17
Cooling fan module with damaged louvers


Step Action
26 Check that you have the correct type of cooling fan modules for your cooling
configuration. Refer to Planning - Ordering Information, 323-1851-151.
27 Store the fan units in a safe place. You will install them in step 35.
28 Use a 7-mm socket to unfasten and remove the standoffs (see “Standoff
locations on the cooling fan module (standoffs are shipping/packaging
hardware only)” on page 1-47). A total of three standoffs are present (for
shipping purposes) and must be removed from the cooling fan module.
Figure 1-18
Standoff locations on the cooling fan module (standoffs are shipping/
packaging hardware only)
Standoff
locations
Standoff


Step Action

If Then
you are installing a 14-slot shelf variant with an the cooling fan module is
integrated cooling fan module integrated into the shelf.
Go to step 38 to install the
cooling fan modules.
otherwise go to step 30 to install the
brackets onto the cooling
fan module
30 The cooling fan module is shipped without mounting brackets assembled, but
has features on which to assemble the brackets.
Remove the 10-mm nuts supplied with the cooling fan module, install the
brackets as indicated in the following table, and re-attach the nuts.
Use a torque wrench to verify that torque has been applied correctly: 27 lb-in.
(or 311 g-m) for installation and 20 lb-in. (or 230 g-m) for inspection.
If you are mounting the cooling fan module in Then install bracket type
a 19-in. equipment rack with a 100-mm setback A
a 19-in. equipment rack with a 50-mm setback B
a 19-in. equipment rack with a 127-mm setback C
a 23-in. equipment rack with a 127-mm setback D
an ETSI rack with a 50-mm setback E
Note: For the 14-slot packet-optical shelf, use the bracket kit NTK509MR,
NTK509MS, or NTK509MT.


Step Action
Installing the cooling fan module

32 Based on your rack type, select the mounting hardware from the installation
kit you ordered.
installation kit, ANSI [imperial hardware]) to
install equipment onto the EIA adapter kit (5-inch
or 4-inch setback)
19-inch or 23-inch with the 12-24 SEM screws or machine screws with
tapped holes lock washers (from the shelf installation kit, ANSI
[imperial hardware])
19-inch or 23-inch with the 12-24 thread-forming screws (from the shelf
untapped holes installation kit, ANSI [imperial hardware])
33
CAUTION
Risk of damage to equipment
When sliding the cooling fan module into place make
sure that you do not damage the power and alarm
ribbon cable.
Place the cooling fan module on the top of the card cage. Make sure to place
and slide in the cooling fan module horizontally so that you do not damage
the access panel. Secure the unit with four mounting screws. See “Securing
the cooling fan module (example shows a 14-slot optical shelf)” on page 1-50.


Step Action
Figure 1-19
Securing the cooling fan module (example shows a 14-slot optical shelf)
34 Connect the fan ribbon cable to the respective termination points on the fan
shelf backplane and tighten the jackscrews to 0.56 N-m (5 lb-in.).
35 Slide the fan unit into the slot.
36 Push with your thumb until the unit fully engages into the backplane.
37 Fasten the thumbscrew on the unit to a maximum torque of 0.56 N-m
(5 lb-in.).


Step Action
38 If applicable, re-install the protective grill by performing the substeps in step

24 in reverse order.
CAUTION
Do not re-install the protective air grill if you will be
installing shelf cover kit NTK509CD or shelf front cover
NTK509CCE6.
Re-installing the protective air grill with NTK509CD or

NTK509CCE6 results in overheating and equipment
damage.
Grounding the cooling fan module

Note: This step applies to non-integrated cooling fan modules.
39
CAUTION
Risk of improper grounding due to poor contact with a
painted rack
If the rack is painted, follow company procedures to
remove the paint from the area where you will fasten
the bolt. Make sure that the bolt washer makes direct
contact with the rack.
Connect a ground cable (No. 6 AWG [16 mm2]) between the ground bolt on
the left-hand side of the cooling fan module assembly and a suitable ground
point (for example, ground bolt on the main shelf). Attach the No. 10 AWG lug
from the ground cable on the cooling fan module to the card cage. Make sure
that the ground cable is tightened to a torque value of 4 N-m (35.4 lb-in.).
for installation.
See the following examples:
• “Example of a 6500 14-slot optical shelf” on page 1-44
The ground connections for the cooling fan module of the optical/rear
electrical shelf are similar to the optical shelf.
• “Example of a 6500 optical/front electrical shelf” on page 1-52


Step Action
Figure 1-20
Example of a 6500 optical/front electrical shelf


Step Action

If Then go to
you must install an air plenum step 41
otherwise step 47
Installing the air plenum

41 The air plenum is shipped without mounting brackets assembled, but has
features on which to assemble the brackets. Remove the 10-mm nuts
supplied with the air plenum, install the brackets as indicated in the following
table, and re-attach the nuts.
Note: The air plenum is integrated on the 14-slot converged optical shelf.
If you are mounting the air plenum in Then install

bracket type
a 19-inch equipment rack with a 100-mm setback A
a 19-inch equipment rack with a 50-mm setback B
a 19-inch equipment rack with a 127-mm setback C
a 23-inch equipment rack with a 127-mm setback D
an ETSI rack with a 50-mm setback E
42 Based on your rack type, select the air plenum mounting hardware from the
installation kit you ordered.
installation kit, ANSI [imperial hardware]) to install
equipment onto the EIA adapter kit (5-in. or 4-in.
setback)
19-inch or 23-inch the 12-24 SEM screws or machine screws with lock
with tapped holes washers (from the shelf installation kit, ANSI [imperial
hardware])
19-inch or 23-inch the 12-24 thread-forming screws (from the shelf
with untapped holes installation kit, ANSI [imperial hardware])


Step Action
43 Place the air plenum under the shelf. See “Example of a 6500 optical/rear
electrical shelf (including cooling fan module and air plenum - rear side shown
with covers)”.
Figure 1-21
Example of a 6500 optical/rear electrical shelf (including cooling fan module and air plenum - rear
side shown with covers)
Grounding the air plenum

for installation.
45 Fasten one end of the ground cable (No. 6 AWG [16 mm2]) to the ground point
on the left-hand side of the air plenum. Fasten the other end of the ground
cable to the ground point on the left-hand side of the shelf.


Step Action

If Then
you have ordered the a shipping bracket at the front of the 6500 shelf
option with equipment in secures the equipment in place.
place Go to step 47 to remove the shipping bracket.
otherwise you have completed this procedure
Removing the shipping bracket that secures components in place in the 14-slot shelf (if
applicable)
47 Pull the four spring-loaded plungers and remove the shipping brackets from
top and bottom, as follows:
• the NTYY99EG packs-in-place shipping bracket for the 14-slot shelf
cover NTK503ADE5, see Figure 1-22 on page 1-56.
This packs-in-place shipping bracket is used on the 14-slot shelf cover
that has been extended to create additional space between the circuit
pack faceplates and the shelf cover/door to allow use of different fiber
boots and fixed pad attenuators.


Step Action
Figure 1-22
Removing packs-in-place shipping bracket (NTYY99EG) from 14-slot shelf NTK503ADE5
• the NTYY99CRE6 packs-in-place shipping bracket for the 14-slot shelf,

see the following illustration. This packs-in-place shipping bracket is used
on 14-shelf covers with non-extended brackets.


Step Action
Figure 1-23
Removing packs-in-place shipping bracket (NTYY99CRE6) from 14-slot shelf cover
(non extended, regular footprint)
48 While holding onto the spring-loaded plungers, hold the bracket towards you
and lift to remove the bracket from the bottom pin.
Next perform “Installing the maintenance interface card in the 14-slot shelf”
on page 1-58.
—end—

Procedure 1-2
Installing the maintenance interface card in the 14-slot
shelf
Use this procedure to install the maintenance interface card (MIC) into
sub-slot 2 of slot 17 of the 14-slot shelf. For illustrations of the MIC, see the
“Shelf and equipment descriptions” section in Part 1 of Planning, NTRN10ER.
Prerequisites
Make sure that you
• have a slotted screwdriver and a 7-mm socket
• observe all the safety requirements described in Installation - General
Information, 323-1851-201.0
• have the appropriate personal grounding device to dissipate electrostatic
charges
Precautions
DANGER


working with power.

in the related procedure.


Installing the maintenance interface card in the 14-slot shelf
Step Action
CAUTION
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage electrostatic
sensitive devices. Use antistatic protection to avoid damaging
circuit packs.
cord to the ESD jack on the shelf installed and grounded in a grounded rack/
cabinet or clip to a suitable ground point.
3 Select the shelf shipping option you ordered.
If Then go to
the shipping bracket that secures step 4 to remove the shipping bracket
the equipment in place is present in
the 6500 shelf
otherwise step 10 to install the MIC
Removing the shipping bracket, if applicable

4 Pull out the spring-loaded pins at the top of the shipping bracket on both sides
of the shelf.
5 Flip the shipping bracket open.
6 Remove the shipping bracket (from the bottom pins).
7 Unfasten the captive thumbscrew on the MIC.
8 Remove the MIC from the shelf. You will re-install the MIC in step 10.
9 Remove the standoff using the 7-mm socket.
Installing the maintenance interface card
10 Insert the MIC (in sub-slot 2 of slot 17).


Installing the maintenance interface card in the 14-slot shelf
Step Action
11 Press the MIC to fully engage it into the backplane.

12
CAUTION
Risk of incorrect installation
Make sure that you hand-tighten the captive
thumbscrew to secure the MIC into place and to ensure
that it functions correctly.
13 Next perform “Installing power input cards and connecting power cables in a
6500 14-slot shelf (all variants)” on page 1-61.
—end—

Procedure 1-3
Installing power input cards and connecting power
cables in a 6500 14-slot shelf (all variants)
Use this procedure to install the power input cards (breakered, breakerless, or
fused) into their respective slots or sub-slots and connect power cables in a
6500 14-slot shelf (all variants),
For illustrations of the power input card variants, see the “Shelf and equipment
descriptions” section in Part 1 of Planning, NTRN10ER.
Prerequisites
Make sure that you
• have a slotted screwdriver and a 7-mm socket
• have the engineering documentation package (EDP) or international
documentation package (IDP) or equivalent site/network engineering
plans
charges
Note: All AC inputs to an AC-powered 6500 shelf or to any rectifier
supplying DC power to a 6500 shelf must be equipped with an external
surge protection device (SPD not supplied) to meet the Telcordia criteria
for lightning criteria for equipment interfacing with AC power port(s).
DANGER
Risk of electrocution
Working with live circuits is dangerous. Before you continue,
make sure that the shelf power is turned off at the power
distribution panel and cannot be turned on by accident. Use a
multimeter to verify that no potential exists.


Installing power input cards and connecting power cables in a 6500 14-slot shelf (all variants)
Precautions
DANGER


working with power.

DANGER
CAUTION
circuit packs.


Step Action
Making sure that power to the system is off
3 Make sure that power is off at the secondary power distribution panel (for
example, breaker distribution fuse box [BDFB] or other upstream protector).
If you are using Then make sure that
a breaker interface panel (BIP) or fuse the breakers on the panel are off
interface panel (FIP)
AC-powered shelf power A and power B are turned
off at the source

If want to Then go to
remove the shipping brackets that step 6
secure the power input cards in place
install the power input cards that were step 9
shipped separately
Preparing the power input cards for installation

6 Remove the power input cards from the shelf. You will re-install them in step 8.
7 Remove the shipping bracket that secures each power input card.
8 Push the power input card all the way into the backplane. Place the screw in
the second hole beside the power input card and tighten the screw.
If you are installing Then go to
fused power input cards step 10
otherwise step 11


Step Action
10 Carefully pull out the fuseholder assembly from the power input card by using
your thumb and index fingers to grip the assembly from the top and bottom.
You can also use the optional fuseholder pull tool to remove the fuseholder
from the fused power input card. The following illustration shows the
installation of the main fuse on the fused power input card.
Figure 1-24
Installing the main fuse and alarm indicator fuse on the fused power input card of 14-slot shelf


Step Action
The following illustration shows the removal of the main fuse on the fused
power input card using the fuseholder pull tool.
Figure 1-25
Removing the fuseholder from the fused power input cards using the
fuseholder pull tool
11 Select the correct type of fuse available for the power input card.
Note: See “Label sheet for 40A, 50A, and 60A fused power input cards” on
page 1-66 for the label sheets that apply to the instructions in this step.


Step Action
Figure 1-26
Label sheet for 40A, 50A, and 60A fused power input cards


Step Action
If the optional alarm indicator fuse is used, the matching label must be applied
to the fixed portion of power input card and not the holder assembly. See
“Label sheet for 40A, 50A, and 60A fused power input cards” on page 1-66
for label position.
Otherwise, the alarm indicator fuse slot on the front of the holder assembly
must be covered by applying the label matching the main fuse current rating.
See “Installing the main fuse on the fused power input card of 14-slot shelf”
for the label position.
Figure 1-27
Installing the main fuse on the fused power input card of 14-slot shelf
Fused Power
Input Card
Note: Use of the alarm indicator fuse provided with Fused Power Input Card
kits (NTK505EAE5, NTK605EAE5, or NTK505EEE5) is optional and requires
careful consideration. The fuse cartridge connects the main fuse and alarm
indicator fuse in parallel. If the main fuse is missing or already blown during
installation, the electrical path through the parallel alarm indicator fuse may
provide sufficient current to activate the Power OK LED on the card but
insufficient current to blow the fuse. Neither a Power Failure nor a Power
Failure - Fuse Blown alarm would be asserted, giving the impression of power
redundancy. Alarm indicator fuses are intended for use where required by the
installation practice. Otherwise, the indicator fuse position must be covered
with the label supplied with the power input card.


Step Action
12 Install the main fuse into the fuseholder.

Note: Ensure that you use the correct type of fuse according to the EDP.
The 14-slot packet-optical shelf can use 40A, 60A, or 2x50A power input
cards. See “2x50A power input card”.
Figure 1-28
2x50A power input card
13 Slide the fuseholder assembly into the power input card (the fuseholder
assembly is keyed in). An audible click indicates that the fuseholder assembly
is fully inserted.


Step Action
14 Insert the power input cards into sub-slots 1 and 3 of slot 17.
See the following illustrations for the sub-slot locations on the different shelf
types:
• “Example of a 6500 14-slot optical shelf” on page 1-15
Note: 2x50A power input card is only used with the 14-slot packet-optical
shelf and is mechanically blocked from insertion in other shelf types
(NTK503{Ax/Bx/Cx/Dx/Gx}[E5], which are only rated for 60A or less).
• “Example of a 6500 14-slot optical/front electrical shelf” on page 1-16
• “Example of a 6500 14-slot optical/rear electrical shelf (including cooling
fan module and air plenum - rear side shown with covers)” on page 1-17
• “Example of a 6500 14-slot metro front electrical shelf” on page 1-18
• “Example of a 14-slot converged optical shelf or a 14-slot packet-optical
shelf and cooling fan module” on page 1-19
• “Example of a 14-slot converged optical/front electrical shelf and cooling
fan module” on page 1-20
• “Example of a 14-slot converged optical/rear electrical shelf and cooling
fan module” on page 1-21


Step Action
15 To secure the power input cards in place, first hand-tighten the captive
screws. Then tighten as follows:
• For power input cards with a D-sub power connector or 2x50A power
input card with 2-hole lug terminations, use a screwdriver to tighten the
captive thumbscrew (located on the right side of the card) to between
0.45 and 0.68 N-m (4 and 6 lb-in.).
• For 60A power input cards with 2-hole lug terminations, use a screwdriver
to tighten the captive screw located at the left of the lug terminal block to
between 0.45 and 0.68 N-m (4 and 6 lb-in.).
The 60A Power Input Cards (NTK505CAE5/NTK505DAE5), Fused Power
Input Card - Max 60A (NTK505EAE5) and 2x50A Power Input Card
(NTK505DS) use protective covers to prevent access to powered terminals
and are required when the equipment is powered. Ensure the covers are
securely in place before applying power and remain in place at all times when
powered.
CAUTION
Risk of power brownout
Make sure the power input cards are fully seated and
secured, and that the covers are securely in place
before applying power. When applying power, the
Power OK LED will be activated even if the power input
card is not fully seated.
16 If required, insert the optional 18/100A Alarm Indicator fuse into the front of
the fuseholder assembly. See the Attention in step 11.


Step Action
Routing and connecting power cables

17 Route the power cables on the right hand side of the 14-slot packet-optical or
14-slot shelf, either up or down, as required. The following illustration
provides an example of power cabling on a 14-slot shelf.
Figure 1-29
Example of power cabling on a 14-slot shelf
Note: For a 14-slot shelf, if you plan to lock the shelf door, make sure that
you follow the instruction in “Locking tab on 14-slot shelves” on page 1-72.


Step Action
Figure 1-30
Locking tab on 14-slot shelves
If you plan to lock the shelf

door, make sure that
you rotate the locking tab
on the right hand side of
the shelf (as shown) before
installing the power cable.
Some types of power cables

prevent this locking tab from
being rotated in service.
Note: Fused power input cards can have variable capacity (20A, 30A, 40A,
50A, and 60A). Fused power input cards can be used in all 6500 shelf types.
When equipped in an optical shelf, optical/front electrical shelf, optical/rear
electrical shelf, or metro front electrical shelf, the fused power input card
cannot be equipped with a fuse greater than 40A.
If you are using 6500 shelf with Then go to
2x50A or 60A power input cards step 19
40A power input cards step 26

If compliance to ETSI EN 300 253 on the DC return conductor Then go to
(connected to the CBN at multiple points: DC-C power
distribution, or re-grounded BR)
is required on the 2x50A or 60A power input cards step 20
is not required on the 2x50A or 60A power input cards step 22


Step Action
20 Measure and cut the required #6 AWG green (ground) cable length needed
to reach between the rack or cabinet designated grounding point to the 30 cm
point of the power input card terminals. A tap and 2-hole lug must be used to
accommodate the given cable sizes.
for installation.
21 Tap one end of the ground cable onto each Battery RTN conductor cable and
terminate the other end of the ground cable with a 2-hole lug to the rack or
cabinet. Fasten the 2-hole lug to the rack or cabinet and ensure that a torque
of 27 lb-in. (or 311 g-m) for installation has been applied.
22 Remove the protective cover from the power input card A and power input
card B.
23 Remove the terminal nuts.
24 Connect the output power cables A to the power input card A and the output
power cables B to the power input card B and tighten the lug nuts. Use a
torque driver to verify that torque has been applied correctly: 20 lb-in.
for installation.
25 Re-install the protective cover.
The 60A Power Input Cards (NTK505CAE5/NTK505DAE5), Fused Power
Input Card - Max 60A (NTK505EAE5), and 2x50A Power Input Card
(NTK505DS) use protective covers to prevent access to powered terminals
and are required when the equipment is powered. Ensure the covers are
securely in place before applying power and remain in place at all times when
powered.
CAUTION
Go to step 28.
26 Attach the connector on the power cable assembly to power input card A and
power input card B and tighten the captive screws on the connector to
0.56 N-m (5 lb-in.).


Step Action
27 Secure the power cables as required to the mounting points on the shelf and
the cooling fan module mounting brackets or the rack.
If Then go to
you have installed a 1U BIP/FIP “Installing power cables and
testing input power to the 1U
BIP/FIP” on page 1-75
otherwise “Testing power to the 6500
shelf” on page 1-89
—end—

Procedure 1-4
Installing power cables and testing input power to the
1U BIP/FIP
Use this procedure to install power cables and test input power to the 1U BIP
(NTK599DA) or 1U FIP (NTK599EA) (see Figure 1-31), that is, to:
• connect output power cables to the BIP/FIP (to power the 6500 shelves or
DSM shelves)
• connect input power cables to the panel (input wiring)
• test input power
If the 6500 is co-located with other Ciena products that will be powered by the
1U BIP or the 1U FIP, see the respective documentation for cabling
instructions specific to the respective Ciena products.
Figure 1-31
Front views of 1U BIP and 1U FIP


Installing power cables and testing input power to the 1U BIP/FIP
Prerequisites
Make sure that
• The equipment rack and the 1U BIP/FIP are installed, secured, and
grounded according to manufacturer instructions.
• You have
— installed the 6500 shelf
— installed the power input cards and the maintenance card
— connected the power cables to the 6500 shelf
• There is appropriate battery power.
• All required interface, power, and communications cables are available.
The BIP/FIP is not supplied with power cables. You must purchase or
assemble power cables according to specifications.
• You have the following tools and materials:
— 40-A breaker kit (NTK599ZS)
— 8 mm socket (to install input lugs and output feeds)
— hardware
— non-oxidizing compound (part of installation kits)
— crimping tool
— clear heat-shrink tubing, UL VW-1 rated
— non-abrasive non-metallic pad (to clean input terminals)
— wire stripper
— digital multimeter
— cable ties
— small flat screwdriver
— power cables
— electrical tape (to temporarily wrap equipment feeds during
installation)
— engineering documentation package (EDP) or international
plans


• You are familiar with the operating company guidelines for input wiring and
that you have a copy of the supplier documentation (shipped with the BIP/
FIP).
• You observe all the safety requirements described in Installation - General
Information, 323-1851-201.0.
• You have the appropriate personal grounding device to dissipate
electrostatic charges.
Precautions
DANGER

working with power.

CAUTION
circuit packs.


Step Action
cord to the ESD jack on a shelf installed and grounded in a grounded rack/
Preparing to install power cables
3 Make sure that you have:
• installed the 6500 shelf (“Installing a 6500 14-slot shelf (all variants),
access panel, cooling fan modules, and air plenum” on page 1-13)
• installed the maintenance interface card (“Installing the maintenance
interface card in the 14-slot shelf” on page 1-58)
• installed the power input cards and connected the power cables to the
6500 shelf (“Installing power input cards and connecting power cables in
a 6500 14-slot shelf (all variants)” on page 1-61)
4
DANGER
Risk of electrical shock or burns
A battery power distribution system constitutes a
significant energy hazard that can result in serious
burns if you do not follow the appropriate procedures
for working with power. Make sure that the circuit
breakers (A and B feeds) in the power distribution path
are switched off.
Make sure that the circuit breakers (A and B feeds) in the distribution panel
are switched off.
5 Make sure that
• no voltage is on the power cables
• for the BIP all circuit breakers are in the OFF position on both the A and
B sides
• for the FIP, if you will be connecting output power cables for a 6500
shelf, the 40-A breakers are not inserted


Step Action
6 See the EDP, IDP, or the equivalent site/network engineering plans for details
regarding the number of power feeds and return cables and the routing
scheme.
ATTENTION
If the 6500 product is co-located in the same bay with another product, you
must install 6500 power cables first.
7 Temporarily position the power cable assembly in the equipment rack upright
to prepare for installation in the BIP/FIP. Temporarily strain relief if necessary.
If you are routing output power cables using Then go to
front access (6500 output power cables only) step 9
rear access (6500 output power cables) step 16
Installing 6500 output power cables—front access

9 Unfasten the thumbscrews on the front of the BIP/FIP (see Figure 1-31 on
page 1-75) and open the drawer of the BIP/FIP.
10 Start on one side (A or B) by pushing the output power cables into the front
opening of the BIP/FIP (Figure 1-32 on page 1-79) with one hand and with
the other hand reach into the drawer and pull the output power cables toward
the high-current terminals. See Figure 1-33 on page 1-80 for the location of
the high-current terminals to which you will connect the cables.
Figure 1-32
Front access for output power cables and lances on BIP/FIP mounting bracket
(A side shown)

Figure 1-33
Front or rear access of output power cables for the 6500 shelf—measuring reference points for
strain relief and routing (top view)
Front access
A side B side
Route power cables

down and across
to the B side,
secured to
horizontal tie bar
under the panel,
then toward Route power cables
the power input cards toward the power
input cards
12.0 in L+
(304.8 mm)
L-
Tie cables to the lances at
the back (examples shown)
Rear access
12.0 in
(304.8 mm)
Route power cables

toward the power
input cards


Step Action
11 Measure 12 in. (304 mm) from the entry point just outside the front access
opening (Figure 1-33 on page 1-80) to the high-current terminals. Mark off the
measurement on the cables.
You perform this step to allow sufficient slack in the drawer.
12 If necessary use a cable tie to temporarily hold the power cable assembly
before making terminal connections.
13 Use a cable tie on the front opening to apply strain relief to the power cable
assembly at the insertion point marked in step 11 (Figure 1-32 on page 1-79).
14 Repeat step 10 to step 13 for the output power cables on the remaining side.
15 Route the A side output power cables coming out of the front opening (see
Figure 1-32 on page 1-79) over and toward the B side. Secure the cables to
the horizontal tie bar. Then go to step 25.
Installing 6500 output power cables—rear access
16 Unfasten the thumbscrews on the front of the BIP/FIP and open the drawer of
the BIP/FIP (see Figure 1-31 on page 1-75).
17 Route the output power cables to the rear of the BIP/FIP.
18 Start on one side (A or B) by inserting the output power cable assembly
through the opening at the rear of the BIP/FIP.
19 Guide the output power cable assembly to the terminals at the front of the
drawer. See Figure 1-33 on page 1-80 for the high-current terminals to which
you will connect the 6500 cables. See Figure 1-34 on page 1-82 for the
low-current terminals to which you will connect the DSM cables.
The 6500 output power cables connect to the high-current terminals. The
DSM output power cables connect to the low-current terminals. Make sure
that you route the cables toward the correct terminals.


Step Action
Figure 1-34
Rear access of output power cables for the DSM shelf—measuring reference points for strain
relief and routing (top view)
Route DSM
Secure cables to the lances at output power
the back (example shown) cables toward
A side
12.0 in
(304.8 mm)
L-

6500 output power cables step 21
DSM output power cables step 22
21 Measure 12 in. (304 mm) from the entry point just outside the rear access
opening (see Figure 1-33 on page 1-80) to the terminals. Mark off the
measurement on the cables.
You perform this step to allow sufficient slack in the drawer.
22 Repeat step 18 to step 21 for the output power cables on the remaining side
(A or B).
23 Insert a cable tie through the lance just outside each of the rear access
openings for the A side and B side.


Step Action
24 See Figure 1-33 on page 1-80 to determine to which side of the rack you must
route the power cables and how to route and secure the cables after they
leave the BIP/FIP. In both cases, use the lances along the rear of the BIP/FIP
to apply strain relief.
Connecting output power cables to terminals A and B
25
CAUTION
Risk of incorrect connecting
The 6500 output power cables connect to the high-
current terminal lugs. Make sure that you connect to the
correct terminal lug or block, see Figure 1-33 on page
1-80. Otherwise, you can cause equipment damage
when you power up.
Select your next step.

If you are routing output power cables for Then go to
a 6500 shelf step 26
a DSM shelf step 31
Connecting output cables for the 6500 shelf

26 Start on one side (A or B) by removing the protective caps from the BIP/FIP
high-current terminals and place them in a secure place. (You will re-install
them in step 29.)
27 Match the individual output power cables to their respective terminal
connectors. See Figure 1-33 on page 1-80.
28 Connect the output power cables to their respective terminals. Torque to the
manufacturer’s specifications.
29 Re-install the protective caps on the BIP/FIP high-current terminals.
30 Repeat step 26 to step 29 for the remaining side (A or B).
Connecting output cables for the DSM shelf
31 Start on one side (A or B) by identifying the L+ and L- cables. Match the
individual output power cables to their respective terminal connectors. See
Figure 1-34 on page 1-82.
32 Connect the output power cables to their respective terminals.


Step Action
33 Insert a small screwdriver into the appropriate output connector of the

screw-down terminal block. Open the connector by turning the screwdriver
counterclockwise (see Figure 1-35 on page 1-84).
Figure 1-35
Installing DSM power output cables into terminal blocks
34 Insert one wire into the wire entry side of the appropriate output connector in
the terminal block.
35 Secure the wire end into place by turning the screwdriver in the output
connector clockwise. Refer to the manufacturer’s specifications for torque
requirements.
36 Make sure that the wire is securely in place and that no copper is exposed.
37 Repeat step 33 to step 36 for each of the remaining output power cables.
38 Apply strain relief in two places on the power cable assembly, in the strain
relief points located inside the BIP/FIP closest to the terminal blocks.
39 Repeat step 31 to step 38 to connect the output power cables for the
remaining side (A or B).
You will connect the output power cables to the DSM shelf and test the power
to the DSM shelf separately in the procedures to connect power to the DSM
shelf, see Chapter 2, “Installing OMX, fiber manager, DSM, passive
equipment, and routing/connecting related cables”.


Step Action

If you are using Then go to
rear access for the output cables step 41
front access for the output cables step 44
Installing the power cable guides (for rear access)

41 Start on one side (A or B) by installing an internal power cable guide (which
serves as a bend limiter) through the rear opening of the BIP/FIP (see the
following illustration). There is a left and a right power cable guide. Select the
power guide for the side you are installing according to the direction of the
cable inside the BIP/FIP.
Figure 1-36
Installing the power cable guide for rear access—rear view of B side of the BIP/
FIP (example shows output power cables of equipment collocated with the 6500
shelf and fed by the 1U BIP/FIP)
42 Apply moderate force to mate the holes of the internal power cable guide to
the holes at the rear of the BIP/FIP. Secure the guide into place using the
screws provided.
43 Repeat step 41 and step 42 for the remaining side (A or B).
44 Close the BIP/FIP drawer and secure it into place with the thumbscrews.


Step Action
Connecting input power cables (input wiring)

Note: Make sure that you follow the operating company guidelines when you
attach the input wiring.
45 Remove the power landing cover from both sides (A and B). Remove the
KEPS nuts from the input terminals (–48V/–60V and the return) on both sides
(A and B).
46 Route the input power cables to the input terminals (–48V/–60V and return)
on both sides (A and B).
47 Trim the input power cables to length.
48 Crimp the straight two-hole compression lugs onto the input power cables.
For details, see the EDP, IDP, or the equivalent site/network engineering
plans.
The hole spacing is 5/8 in. and the hole size is No.10.
49 Insulate the lug barrels and the end of the input feeds with clear heat-shrink
tubing (UL VW-1 rated).
50 Clean the input terminals (–48V/–60V and return) on both sides (A and B)
with a non-abrasive, non-metallic pad.
51 If required, lightly coat non-oxidizing compound on the two-hole lugs, and the
input terminals (–48V/–60V and return) on both sides (A and B). For details,
see the grounding guidelines in Installation - General Information,
323-1851-201.0, the section on preparing for installation.
52
CAUTION
Use a torque wrench to attach the KEPS nuts.
Otherwise, you risk damaging the equipment.
Connect the two-hole lugs to the input terminals (–48V/–60V and return) on
both sides (A and B), and re-install the KEPS nuts. Torque to manufacturer’s
specifications.
53 Secure the input feeds to provide strain relief as required. Use the lances on
the mounting brackets on the BIP/FIP (see Figure 1-32 on page 1-79).


Step Action
Testing input power

Installing the 40-A breakers
If the BIP/FIP will power Then go to
a 6500 shelf step 55
otherwise step 61
55 Remove the label panel (see Figure 1-37).

Figure 1-37
Removing label panel from BIP (NTK599DA)
56 Remove the plastic cover from one side of the label panel.
57 From the back of the label panel, squeeze the tabs of the plastic cover and
push through the hole.
58 Push the breaker into place.
59 Perform step 56 to step 58 for the other side.
60 Re-install the label panel.
Testing input power
61 Use a digital multimeter set to ohms and make sure that none of the –48V or
–60V feeds are short-circuited to the return feeds.
62 Start on either side A or B by supplying input power to the respective side.


Step Action
63 Verify that you have the correct polarity. Use a digital multimeter set to volts
to test voltage and polarity at the input terminals of the BIP/FIP.
• The typical float voltage for a nominal –48V system must be from –52V
to –55V.
• The typical float voltage for a nominal –60V system must be
approximately –60V.
If the voltage and polarity are within range but the LEDs do not turn on,
contact your next level of support.
64 Record the voltage and the polarity.
65 Reattach the power landing cover over the input terminals.
66 Turn off the power to either side A or B.
67 Verify that the corresponding PWR (power) LED extinguishes.
68 Repeat step 62 to step 67 for the side that you did not test.
69 Turn off all power to the BIP/FIP.
If you have routed the output power cables for a 6500 shelf, go to “Testing
power to the 6500 shelf” on page 1-89.
—end—

Procedure 1-5
Testing power to the 6500 shelf
Use this procedure to test power to the 6500 shelf. For illustrations of the
various variants of breakered, breakerless, or fused power input cards,
including the location of the test points on the cards, if applicable, refer to the
Prerequisites
• Make sure that you have a digital voltmeter (DVM).
DANGER
• Make sure that you observe all the safety requirements described in
Installation - General Information, 323-1851-201.0.
• Make sure that you have the appropriate personal grounding device to
dissipate electrostatic charges.


Precautions
DANGER


working with power.

CAUTION
circuit packs.
Step Action
Follow the instructions in the precautionary message “Risk of electrocution”
on page 1-89.


Step Action

If the shelf is equipped with Then go to
breakerless or fused power input cards step 4
breakered power input cards step 18
Testing power to the shelf equipped with breakerless or fused power input cards
4 Follow the instructions in the precautionary message.
CAUTION

If the power to the power input card is coming from Then go to
a BIP/FIP step 6
a power distribution panel step 9
6 Turn on the circuit breakers at the secondary power distribution panel to the
BIP/FIP.
7 Identify on the BIP/FIP the circuit breakers that connect the power cables to
the A and B feeds on the 6500 shelf you are installing.
See the following illustrations for the location of the circuit breakers or fuses:
• “Front view of the 2U BIP (example shows 19-in. mounting brackets)” on
page 1-92
• “Front views of 1U BIP and 1U FIP” on page 1-93


Step Action
Figure 1-38
Front view of the 2U BIP (example shows 19-in. mounting brackets)
Alarm cutoff
With front cover on Lamp test
Status A feed status
Breakers
B feed status
With front cover open (wire-wrap variant shown

for the Alarm out connector) Power landing
area
Alarm in
Output power
Front cover cable area
Diagram
(inside the cover)
Alarm out
Detail for D-sub

adaptor variant


Step Action
Figure 1-39
Front views of 1U BIP and 1U FIP
8 Turn on the BIP/FIP circuit breakers you identified for the A feed.
Go to step 10.
9 Turn on the power at the power distribution site for the A feed.
ATTENTION
Test points for power feed voltage measurements are not supported on fused
power input cards. For the 60A fused power input cards, carefully measure
the voltage at the power terminals.


Step Action
10 Using a DVM, measure the voltage at the test points on the power input
card A in reference to ground. DVM readings must be as indicated in the
following table.
Power cable Nominal system value DVM reading (V dc)
(V dc) (Note)
Feed (A or B) (L-) -48 -52 to -54.6
Battery return (L+) 0 approximately 0
Note: The values measured by the DVM must correspond to the float
voltage of the connected power plant. The values in this column are typical.
If the values indicated by the DVM are not correct, the cables are incorrectly
wired. Verify that the power cables are terminated correctly at the BIP/FIP. If
the power cables are correctly terminated, you must replace the power cable
assembly.
11 Check that the LEDs on the fan units turn green and that the units are
functioning.
If the power to the power input card is coming from Then go to
a BIP/FIP step 13
a power distribution panel step 16
13 Turn off the BIP/FIP circuit breakers you identified for the A feed.
14 Repeat step 8 to step 13 for the B feed and the B power input card.
15 Turn off the circuit breakers at the secondary power distribution panel to the
BIP/FIP.
Go to step 18.
16 Turn off the power at the power distribution site for the A feed.
17 Repeat step 8 to step 16 for the B feed and the B power input card.
You have completed this procedure.
Testing power to the shelf equipped with breakered power input cards
18 Turn on the power source for power input card A.
19 Turn on the breaker on power input card A.
20 Check that the green POWER OK LED on the power input card is solid green.
If the green LED does not turn on, possible causes are ground short-circuit
or reverse polarity. You must power down the system, then remove the power
cable before you troubleshoot further.


Step Action
21 Check that the LEDs on the fan units turn green and that the units are
functioning.
22 Turn off the breaker on the power input card.
23 Turn off the power source for the power input card A.
24 Repeat step 18 to step 23 for power input card B.
Next install the shelf processor. Perform “Installing the shelf processor” on
page 1-96.
—end—

Procedure 1-6
Installing the shelf processor
Use this procedure to install the shelf processor into the 6500 14-slot shelf.
CAUTION
Before installing the shelf processor(s) into a 6500 shelf, make
sure that you have installed and tested the cooling fan module
and applicable power input cards.
Then—before installing any other circuit packs into the 6500

shelf—install the shelf processor (this procedure).
ATTENTION
When using the zero touch provisioning (ZTP) commissioning mode, the
RJ45 Ethernet loopback plug (ELP) (NTT09FA) must be installed in the Craft
port of the SP before the SP is powered up. If two SPs are installed, the RJ45
ELP must be installed in both SPs.
The ZTP commissioning mode is only supported on SP-2/SPAP-2 shelf

processor variants.
Variants
The shelf processor is available in the following variants:
• NTK555CAE5/NTK555EAE5—shelf processor 2 (SP-2)
• NTK555FAE5—shelf processor 2 with dual central processor (SP-2 Dual
CPU)
Hardware product engineering codes (PEC) are used in this procedure for
general identification only. Each shelf processor is ordered/shipped with pre-
loaded software as a shelf processor kit (combined hardware and software),
by the related kit PEC. For details on the applicable shelf processor based on
the shelf and software load, see Planning - Ordering Information,
323-1851-151.
The following illustration shows an example of shelf processor 2 (SP-2)

NTK555CAE5/NTK555EAE5. This shelf processor
• does not include optical ports
• includes a latch on the left and right
• is field replaceable
• is used vertically in 6500 14-slot shelves


Figure 1-40
SP-2 NTK555CAE5/NTK555EAE5
The following illustration shows an example of shelf processor 2 (SP-2) with a

dual central processor. This shelf processor
• does not include optical ports
• includes a latch on the left and right
• is field replaceable
• is used vertically in 6500 14-slot shelves
Figure 1-41
SP-2 Dual CPU NTK555FAE5
Shipping options
Depending on your requirements, the shelf processor is shipped in different
packaging options.
If the 6500 shelf is shipped in a packs-in-place kit

Components—including the shelf processor—are pre-installed but not seated
into the backplane. Use this procedure to seat the shelf processor into the
backplane.
If the 6500 shelf is not shipped in a packs-in-place kit

Components—including the shelf processor—are not pre-installed in the
shelf. Use this procedure to install and seat the shelf processor into the
backplane.


Prerequisites
Make sure that you
• have the following tools and materials:
— 5/16 in. hex torque wrench

charges
• refer to Planning - Ordering Information, 323-1851-151, for valid slot
assignments
• have fully seated the power input cards (Procedure 1-3, “Installing power
input cards and connecting power cables in a 6500 14-slot shelf (all
variants)”), have tested the voltage to the shelf, and have confirmed that
the voltage is above the start-up threshold (Procedure 1-5, “Testing power
to the 6500 shelf”)

ATTENTION
The release number printed on the latch label and on the shipping box of
some circuit packs appears as a three-digit number, with a leading zero (for
example, 002). Be aware that the Shelf Inventory application may report the
release number as a two-digit number, without the leading zero (for example,
02).
CAUTION
circuit packs.
CAUTION
Before you insert any shelf processor, make sure that you
power up the 6500 shelf and test the power input cards and
cooling fan module.


CAUTION
Risk of autoprovisioning failure
Before you install any circuit packs, you must install the shelf
processor (this procedure). To prevent damage to equipment
and to ensure autoprovisioning of circuit packs, insert circuit
packs in the correct order, as instructed.
CAUTION
Risk of circuit pack damage
Handle circuit packs with care at all times. Make sure that you
do not drop any circuit pack. Otherwise, you will damage it.
Also, do not remove the connector protectors until you are
ready to install the circuit pack.
CAUTION
Do not force a circuit pack all the way to the back of its slot if it
resists insertion. Before installing a circuit pack, make sure
that you understand the detailed procedure for inserting circuit
packs (see “Inserting or removing circuit packs in the 6500
shelf” on page 1-138).
CAUTION
Step Action



Step Action

If the power input cards are Then go to
breakerless or fused step 3
breakered step 4
3 Make sure the power distribution system on the corresponding power input
cards A and B is turned on. Go to step 5.
4 Turn on breakered power input card A and power input card B.
If the 6500 shelf Then go to
was shipped in a packs-in-place kit step 6
was not shipped in a packs-in-place kit step 9
6 Unfasten and remove the standoffs (if they are still present behind the
faceplate thumbscrews). Standoffs are used for shipping purposes only and
must be removed.
7 Open the latches by sliding the latch catches towards the middle of the shelf
processor.
8 Slide the shelf processor into the 6500 shelf until the backplane alignments
pins are engaged and then push on the faceplate to partially seat the shelf
processor.
Then go to step 14.
9 Remove the protective cover/covers from the shelf backplane.
10 If applicable, remove the shelf processor from its packaging.
11 Make sure to un-clip and remove the connector protector from the rear of the
circuit pack (“Examples of circuit pack connector protectors” on page 1-132).
12 Open the latches by sliding the latch catches towards the middle of the shelf
processor.
13 Position the shelf processor into the tracks of the required slot, slide in until
the backplane alignments pins are engaged, and then push on the faceplate
to partially seat the shelf processor in slot 15.
The 14-slot shelves support SP redundancy, which require two shelf
processors (a working SP and a protection SP). You will install the second
shelf processor into slot 16 later in this procedure.
One shelf processor is always active and controls the 6500 shelf, while the
other shelf processor is the standby SP. By default, the working shelf
processor in slot 15 (for the 14-slot shelves) is always the active SP.


Step Action
14 Use the latches (see Figure 1-42) to fully seat the shelf processor.
This action requires some force to fully engage the connector field.
Figure 1-42
SP-2 view with latches shown open
15
CAUTION
Make sure that the shelf processor lock latches are
locked into position. If the lock covers are not locked,
the latch sensors on the shelf processor do not allow
the 6500 shelf to identify the shelf processor and do not
allow the shelf processor to autoprovision.
Slide each latch catch out to the side until the latch catch snaps closed.
The shelf processor must be fully seated, and both latches must be locked to
the faceplate.


Step Action
Waiting for the software to initialize

16 The red Fail, the green Ready and the blue In Use status LEDs on the front
of the shelf processor (circuit pack) go through the following sequence:
• The red LED turns on when the circuit pack is first inserted.
• After a few seconds, the red, green and blue LEDs turn on.
• After a few seconds, the red and blue LEDs turn off and the green LED
flashes to indicate the software is initializing.
• When software initialization is complete, the green status LED turns on
(does not flash).
• The circuit pack is in service and the blue LED turns on after all software
and firmware upgrades are completed.
Wait until this sequence is complete before proceeding to the next step.
Software initialization can take up to five minutes and is complete when the
green status LED stops flashing and the green Ready LED turns on. If the red
Fail LED turns on, the circuit pack has faults and must be returned to Ciena.
Note: The red LED may turn on if the incorrect shelf processor is inserted.
Make sure that the shelf processor has the correct product engineering code
(PEC) for the given shelf type. For the 6500 shelf processor types, see Part 1
of Planning, NTRN10ER.
Do not remove the shelf processor if the green LED is flashing or the blue
LED is on.
Next perform “Connecting control and communication cables” on page 1-103.
—end—

Procedure 1-7
Connecting control and communication cables
• Use this procedure to connect cables to the following ports of the access
panel of the 6500 shelf, as applicable:
— external synchronization input (ESI) and external synchronization
output (ESO)
— telemetry input/output (I/O)
— shelf alarms
— DTE
— ILAN and COLAN
Note: For ESI and ESO, the 120-ohm twisted pair used on the 14-slot
SONET access panels (NTK505MA and NTK505MBE5) must be
shielded.
• Also use this procedure to connect to the following external equipment

through the external slots on the access panel:
— photonic layer passive modules (for example, BMD2, CMD44, CMD64,
CMD96, DSCM, MBMD2, OMD4, UBMD2, GMD10, FIM),
Transponder Protection Tray (TPT), or OMX
— PPC6 (174-0040-900)
The following access panels can be used:
— access panel with connections for eight external slots (SONET)
(NTK505MBE5) in a 14-slot shelf
• Also use this procedure to connect alarm cables to the 2U BIP
(NTK599BA, NTK599BGE5, NTK599BH, NTK599BK).
The 1U BIP (NTK599DA) and the 1U FIP (NTK599EA) do not include the
alarm function.
Note: Alarm cable (NTTC08ATE6) can be used to plug into the BIP
(NTK599BA or NTK599BGE5) and cable out to the alarm output wire wrap
pins on the SONET Access Panels (NTK505MAE5). Multiple 6500
shelves in a rack must have their access panel alarm outputs wired in
series from shelf-to-shelf to form a closed circuit (a broken wire, pulled
cable, or alarm condition opens the circuit to raise an alarm).


See “Front views of access panels” and “Reference list of access panel
illustrations”.
Figure 1-43
Front views of access panels
Table 1-7
Reference list of access panel illustrations
Description See ...
SONET/SDH-J access panel (NTK505MA) Figure 1-44 on page 1-105 and

Figure 1-52 on page 1-119
SDH access panel (NTK505LA) Figure 1-53 on page 1-120
SDH-J access panel (NTK505KA) Figure 1-54 on page 1-121 and

Figure 1-55 on page 1-122
SONET access panel with connections for eight external slots Figure 1-56 on page 1-123
(NTK505MBE5) in a 6500 14-slot shelf


Figure 1-44
SONET/SDH-J Access Panel
For the external slots on the SONET Access Panel, a straight thru Ethernet
cable is used.
For cable and connector specifications, see the section on cable and
connector details in Installation - General Information, 323-1851-201.0.
The interfaces described in this procedure are intended for intra-building use
only. The Ethernet intra-building port(s) described in this procedure must use
a shielded intra-building cable/wire that is (are) grounded at both ends to meet
the metallic lightning criteria of Telcordia GR-1089-CORE.
Prerequisites
Make sure that you
— the appropriate control and communication cables. For details, see
Planning - Ordering Information, 323-1851-151.
— a torque driver
charges


Precautions
CAUTION
circuit packs.
Step Action

2 Verify the compatibility of your shelf alarm and telemetry I/O interfaces. See
the related illustrations.
• “Telemetry input connections on the SDH Access Panel, SDH-J Access
Panel, and SONET Access Panel with connections for eight external
slots” on page 1-107
• “Telemetry output connections on the SDH Access Panel, SDH-J Access
Panel, and SONET Access Panel with connections for eight external
slots” on page 1-108
• “Shelf alarm relays on the SDH Access Panel” on page 1-109
• “Shelf alarm relays on the SONET/SDH-J Access Panel” on page 1-110
• “Shelf alarm relays on the SONET/SDH-J Access Panel” on page 1-110
• “Telemetry output connections on the SONET/SDH-J Access Panel” on
page 1-112
• “SDH-J Access Panel interface pinouts - telemetry” on page 1-122


Step Action
Figure 1-45
Telemetry input connections on the SDH Access Panel, SDH-J Access Panel, and SONET Access
Panel with connections for eight external slots
Telemetry input pins

5 - 8, 10 - 13, 18 - 25
Telemetry
input
NO NC
Common
Telemetry Relay
ground
(logic ground)
pin 9 Rectifier with
Twisted wire pair failure alarm/Environmental
connects the sensing and relay control
telemetry I/O pins circuits
to the relay
Access panel
Note 1: The telemetry input ground must not have a direct connection to any other
office ground.
Note 2: Telemetry inputs are active low. To drive one of the inputs low, the control circuit must
short it to the ground pin.


Step Action
Figure 1-46
Telemetry output connections on the SDH Access Panel, SDH-J Access Panel, and SONET
Access Panel with connections for eight external slots
Pin 2
Common NO Out 1
Pin 4
Common NO Out 2
Pin 1
Common NO Out 3
Pin 3
Common NO Out 4
Pin16
Pin14
Pin17
Pin15
Access panel
Note: Each telemetry output pin connects to a normally open (NO) relay
contact on the access panel. Connect the common contacts on the output
relays to the common return (RET) pins.


Step Action
Figure 1-47
Shelf alarm relays on the SDH Access Panel


Step Action
Figure 1-48
Shelf alarm relays on the SONET/SDH-J Access Panel


Step Action
Figure 1-49
Telemetry input connections on the SONET/SDH-J Access Panel


Step Action
Figure 1-50
Telemetry output connections on the SONET/SDH-J Access Panel


Step Action

If you are using Then
the 2U BIP (NTK599BA, go to step 4
NTK599BGE5, NTK599BH,
NTK599BK)
the 1U BIP (NTK599DA) or you do not have any cables to connect to
1U FIP (NTK599EA) the BIP/FIP. Go to step 10.
no BIP or FIP go to step 10
4 Make sure that all circuit breakers located on the BIP are in the OFF
(0 position) on both the A and B feeds.
5 Unfasten the two thumbscrews that secure the BIP cover and open the cover.
6 Connect the alarm out connector to the BIP.
Torque to 5 lb-in. (maximum). If the alarm outputs require a wire wrap
connection, insert the D-sub-to-wire wrap add-on adapter (“Front view of the
2U BIP (example shows 19-in. mounting brackets)” on page 1-114).
7 If you do not plan to use the BIP alarm functionality, plug the BIP alarm
terminator into the BIP alarm input connector (“Front view of the 2U BIP
(example shows 19-in. mounting brackets)” on page 1-114) to eliminate the
BIP visual alarms. Fasten the two screws on the terminator shell.
8 Connect the alarm cable to the BIP. If you are planning to eventually install
multiple 6500 shelves and are pre-dressing the rack with multiple-shelf alarm
cables, but are initially installing only one shelf, plug the BIP alarm
terminator(s) into the unused ports on the alarm cable to eliminate the BIP
visual alarms. Fasten the two screws on the terminator shell.
9 Close the BIP cover and fasten the thumbscrews to secure the cover in place.


Step Action
Figure 1-51
Front view of the 2U BIP (example shows 19-in. mounting brackets)
Alarm cutoff
With front cover on Lamp test
Status A feed status
Breakers
B feed status
With front cover open (wire-wrap variant shown

for the Alarm out connector) Power landing
area
Alarm in
Output power
Front cover cable area
Diagram
(inside the cover)
Alarm out
Detail for D-sub

adaptor variant


Step Action
10 On the access panel, connect cables and torque the fixing pins to 5 lb-in., or
wire wrap, as applicable, and route the cables to the left as follows:
• ESI/ESO (75 ohms unbalanced and 120 ohms balanced)
• DTE
• alarms - If you are connecting the alarm cable from the 2U BIP (you have
connected the other end of the cable to the BIP in step 8) to the SONET/
SDH-J Access Panel, cut off the connector at the Access Panel end and
wire wrap the individual cables. See Table 1-8.
• telemetry
For locations of the ports on the access panel, see the related illustration.
• “SDH Access Panel interface pinouts” on page 1-120
• “SONET Access Panel with connections for eight external slots interface
pinouts” on page 1-123
• “SONET/SDH-J Access Panel interface pinouts” on page 1-119
• “SDH-J Access Panel interface pinouts - synchronization, DTE, alarms
out (visual)” on page 1-121 and “SDH-J Access Panel interface pinouts -
telemetry” on page 1-122
Table 1-8
BIP-to-SONET/SDH-J Access Panel with DB-9 connector cut off
DB-9 connected to BIP Color Wire wrap pins on SONET/

SDH-J Access Panel
Visual, Critical, N/O - Pin #1 Orange Pin #24A- Visual, Critical, COM
No connection - Pin #2 - -
Battery return - Pin #3 Orange Pin #22C - Visual, Critical, N/C
Battery return - Pin #4 Blue Pin #20C - Visual, Major, N/C
Battery return - Pin #5 White/Blue Pin #16C - Visual, Minor, N/C
Visual, Major, N/O - Pin #6 Blue Pin #18C - Visual, Major, COM
Visual, Minor, N/O - Pin #8 White/Blue Pin #18A - Visual, Minor, COM


Step Action
Table 1-9
Telemetry interface pinout
Telemetry Wire wrap pins on DB25 Pin on SDH DB25 cable color
signal SONET/SDH-J and SONET Access
Access Panel Panel with
connection for eight
external slots
GND Pin # 10C, 12A, 16A, Pin # 9 Silver

20A, 24A, 28A
IN1 Pin # 30A Pin # 12 White/Brown
IN2 Pin # 30C Pin # 13 White/Red
IN3 Pin # 28C Pin # 10 White
IN4 Pin # 26A Pin # 11 White/Black
IN5 Pin # 26C Pin #7 Blue
IN6 Pin # 24C Pin #8 Violet
IN7 Pin # 22A Pin #5 Yellow
IN8 Pin # 22C Pin #6 Green
IN9 Pin # 20C Pin # 24 White/Black/Green
IN10 Pin # 18A Pin # 25 White/Black/Blue
IN11 Pin # 18C Pin # 22 White/Black/Orange
IN12 Pin # 16C Pin # 23 White/Black/Yellow
IN13 Pin # 14A Pin # 20 White/Black/Brown
IN14 Pin # 14C Pin # 21 White/Black/Red
IN15 Pin # 12C Pin # 18 White/Violet
IN16 Pin # 10A Pin # 19 White/Silver
OUT1_NO Pin # 8A Pin #2 Brown
OUT2_NO Pin # 6A Pin #4 Orange
OUT3_NO Pin # 4A Pin #1 Black
OUT4_NO Pin # 2A Pin #3 Red

Table 1-9
Telemetry interface pinout (continued)
Telemetry Wire wrap pins on DB25 Pin on SDH DB25 cable color
signal SONET/SDH-J and SONET Access
Access Panel Panel with
connection for eight
external slots
OUT1_COM Pin # 8C Pin # 15 White/Yellow
OUT2_COM Pin # 6C Pin # 17 White/Blue
OUT3_COM Pin # 4C Pin # 14 White/Orange
OUT4_COM Pin # 2C Pin # 16 White/Green
11 If you are using the SONET/SDH-J Access Panel, you can terminate the drain
wire of the ESI/ESO (120 ohms balanced) wire-wrap cable(s) to the GND pin
in the ACO pin pair. See “SONET/SDH-J Access Panel interface pinouts” on
page 1-119.
You can use cables with right-angled connectors for DB25 (female) based
telemetry connectors used on the SDH and SONET Access Panel with 8
external slots.
For the SONET Access Panel, any of the GND leads in the Telemetry can be
used to terminate the Common of the C & N/O alarm pair. Note that no more
than 3 wire-wrap wires must share a GND post.


Step Action
12 On the access panel, connect the following cables as applicable to your

application. See the related illustration:
• “SDH Access Panel interface pinouts” on page 1-120
• “SONET Access Panel with connections for eight external slots interface
pinouts” on page 1-123
• “SONET/SDH-J Access Panel interface pinouts” on page 1-119
• “SONET/SDH-J Access Panel interface pinouts” on page 1-119 and
“SDH-J Access Panel interface pinouts - synchronization, DTE, alarms
out (visual)” on page 1-121
• Route these cables as appropriate:
— the intershelf cables to connectors ILAN IN and ILAN OUT
— the COLAN cable to the COLAN-A or the COLAN-X connectors, as
applicable
— the cables connecting to photonic layer trays
Note: If you disconnect a cable from an external slot and want to insert the
same cable or another cable in the same external port, wait a few seconds
before reconnecting (wait for the green LED to turn off) to allow the shelf
inventory to update.
If you set the 6500 LAN port configuration to Automatic, auto-negotiation is

enabled. Auto-negotiation automatically senses the speed/mode settings of
the link.
The COLAN and ILAN ports on the access panel are medium-dependent
interfaces (MDI). The LAN-15 port on the shelf processor is
medium-dependent interface crossover (MDI-X) and requires an Ethernet
crossover cable. Use a straight Ethernet cable to connect opposite interface
types (MDI to MDI-X) and a crossover Ethernet cable to connect like interface
types (MDI to MDI or MDI-X to MDI-X).
COLAN-B on SONET Access Panel with connections for eight external slots,
provides 10/100BT connectivity to the carrier DCN to the specific SP.
13 Contain the cables with cable ties to the appropriate tie points on the shelf.
Next perform “Installing circuit packs in the 6500 14-slot shelf” on page 1-124
in conjunction with “Inserting or removing circuit packs in the 6500 shelf” on
page 1-138.
—end—

Figure 1-52
SONET/SDH-J Access Panel interface pinouts

Figure 1-53
SDH Access Panel interface pinouts
ESI/ESO UNBAL ESI/ESO BAL DTE VISUAL TELEMETRY SP-A SP-B ILAN ILAN COLAN-X
ALARMS DB25 COLAN COLAN IN OUT
ESI1 ESI2 ESO1ESO2
Pin Signal Direction Description

DTE interface pinout 1 CD DCE-to-DTE Carrier Detect
(male end)
2 RX DCE-to-DTE Receive Data
3 TX DTE-to-DCE Transmit Data
1 2 3 4 5
4 DTR DTE-to-DCE Data Terminal Ready
6 7 8 9
5 GND Ground
6 DSR DCE-to-DTE Data Set Ready
7 RTS DTE-to-DCE Request To Send
8 CTS DCE-to-DTE Clear To Send
9 RI DCE-to-DTE Ring Indicator
Synchronization interface pinout Pin Signal Pin Signal

(female end) 1 ESI1_N 6 ESI1_P
2 ESO1_N 7 ESO1_P
5 4 3 2 1 3 ESI2_N 8 ESI2_P
9 8 7 6 4 ESO2_N 9 ESO2_P
5 GND
Visual alarms interface pinout Pin Signal Pin Signal

(female end) 1 V_CRIT_NC 6 V_CRIT_COM
2 V_CRIT_NO 7 V_MAJOR_NC
5 4 3 2 1 3 V_MAJOR_NO 8 V_MAJOR_COM
9 8 7 6 4 V_MIN_NO 9 V_MIN_NC
5 V_MIN_COM
Telemetry DB25 interface pinout

(female end)
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 OUT3_NO 6 IN8 11 IN4 16 OUT4_COM 21 IN14
3 OUT4_NO 8 IN6 13 IN2 18 IN15 23 IN12
4 OUT2_NO 9 GND 14 OUT3_COM 19 IN16 24 IN9
5 IN7 10 IN3 15 OUT1_COM 20 IN13 25 IN10

Figure 1-54
SDH-J Access Panel interface pinouts - synchronization, DTE, alarms out (visual)
Japan A and B clocks ESI/ESO B Alarms COLAN-B

ILAN-OUT
ESI/ESO A DTE Telemetry ILAN-IN

COLAN-A COLAN-X
ESI/ESO A ESI/ESO B
Synchronization (ESI/ESO)
Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 ESIA_N 1 ESIB_N
5 4 3 2 1
2 ESOA_N 2 ESOB_N
9 8 7 6
3 GND 3 GND
4 GND 4 GND
5 GND 5 GND
6 ESIA_P 6 ESIB_P
7 ESOA_P 7 ESOB_P
8 GND 8 GND
9 GND 9 GND
DTE (male end) Pin Signal Direction Description

1 CD DCE-to-DTE Carrier Detect
2 RX DCE-to-DTE Receive Data
1 2 3 4 5
3 TX DTE-to-DCE Transmit Data
6 7 8 9 4 DTR DTE-to-DCE Data Terminal Ready
5 GND Ground
6 DSR DCE-to-DTE Data Set Ready
7 RTS DTE-to-DCE Request To Send
8 CTS DCE-to-DTE Clear To Send
9 RI DCE-to-DTE Ring Indicator
Pin Signal
External Alarms Out (Visual) 1 V_CRIT_NC
2 V_CRIT_NO
3 V_MAJOR_NO
5 4 3 2 1 4 V_MIN_NO
9 8 7 6 5 V_MIN_COM
6 V_CRIT_COM
7 V_MAJOR_NC
8 V_MAJOR_COM
9 V_MIN_NC

Figure 1-55
SDH-J Access Panel interface pinouts - telemetry

Figure 1-56
SONET Access Panel with connections for eight external slots interface pinouts
External 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 DTE ESI/ESO/ 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 Telemetry COLAN-A COLAN-B ILAN In ILAN Out COLAN-X
Slots Alarms A
1 8
Pin EIA/TIA 568B Function
Color Code
RJ-45
1 White/Orange GND: Ground
Female 2
Socket Orange/White CP: Card Present
3 White/Green SCL: Serial Clock
4 Blue/White SDA: Serial Data
5 White/Blue 5VDC: Power
6 Green/White GND: Ground
7 White/Brown GND: Ground
8 Brown/White GND: Ground
Telemetry DB25 interface pinout

(female end)
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
3 OUT4_NO 8 IN6 13 IN2 18 IN15 23 IN12
4 OUT2_NO 9 GND 14 OUT3_COM 19 IN16 24 IN9
5 IN7 10 IN3 15 OUT1_COM 20 IN13 25 IN10
DTE ESI/ESO/ 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 Tel

Alarms A
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
A ESI1_P N/C ESO1_P N/C ESI2_P N/C ESO2_P N/C GND N/C VIS_MN_ VIS_MJ_ VIS_CR_ AUD_MN_ AUD_MJ_ AUD_CR_
(TIP) (TIP) (TIP) (TIP) NO NO NO NO NO NO
C ESI1_N N/C ESO1_N N/C ESI2_P N/C ESO2_P N/C ACO N/C VIS_MN_ VIS_MJ_ VIS_CR_ AUD_MN_ AUD_MJ_ AUD_CR_
(RING) (RING) (RING) (RING) COM COM COM COM COM COM
E GND N/C GND N/C GND N/C GND N/C GND N/C VIS_MN_ VIS_MJ_ VIS_CR_ AUD_MN_ AUD_MJ_ AUD_CR_
(SHIELD) (SHIELD) (SHIELD) (SHIELD) NC NC NC NC NC NC

Procedure 1-8
Installing circuit packs in the 6500 14-slot shelf
Use this procedure to install circuit packs and filler cards into a 6500 14-slot
shelf.
For details on inserting or removing circuit packs, see “Inserting or removing

circuit packs in the 6500 shelf” on page 1-138.
This procedure includes instructions on the following:

• installing cross-connect circuit packs
• installing optical, electrical, or data services circuit packs
• installing filler cards
• installing WT or optical transponder circuit packs
• testing power feed A and power feed B
CAUTION
You must install the shelf processor(s) before performing this
procedure. To install the shelf processor, see “Installing the
shelf processor” on page 1-96.
Do not insert any circuit packs—except the access panel and
maintenance interface card—into an unpowered 6500 shelf.
Otherwise, you risk damaging equipment.
You must power up a 6500 shelf, test the power input cards and
cooling fan module, and install the shelf processor before
seating any circuit packs into the backplane.
Depending on your requirements, circuit packs are shipped in separate

packaging that contains eight circuit packs.
Depending on your requirements, the shelf is shipped as follows:

• without circuit packs pre-installed
• with circuit packs pre-installed (in a packs-in-place kit)
• with the slots of the following shelves equipped in slot 17 of the 14-slot
packet-optical or 14-slot optical shelf equipped with two power input cards
and one maintenance interface card (MIC).
For the procedures on installing the MIC and the power input cards, see
Table 1-2 on page 1-10.


Prerequisites
Make sure that you
Information, 323-1851-201.0.
ATTENTION
As of Release 10.2, a MuxAmp configuration is supported using the following
amplifiers. The MuxAmp is used in some networks where lower power
interfaces (like the WL3n source) are used. This configuration requires that
Automatic Power Reduction (APR) be disabled, otherwise it may be triggered
during normal operation and hence the amplifiers had to be reclassified as
Class 1M from IEC 60825-1.
- NTK552AAE5, Single Line Amplifier (SLA C-Band), Release 19 and lower
- NTK552BAE5, Midstage Line Amplifier (MLA C-Band), Release 19 and

lower
- NTK552FAE5, Midstage Line Amplifier 2 (MLA2 C-Band), Release 17 and

lower
- NTK552FB, Midstage Line Amplifier 2 (MLA2 C-Band) with variable optical

attenuator (VOA), Release 05 and lower
- NTK552GAE5, Midstage Line Amplifier 3 (MLA3 C-Band), Release 06 and

lower
The amplifiers used in this application are required to have a Hazard Level
1M warning label. Consequently, the latest circuit pack release will be
labeled for use in Class 1M applications.
These circuit packs and hardware releases were originally manufactured

with a Hazard Level 1 warning label and can be re-labeled with the Level 1M
label kit.
For more information and the procedure to apply the Level 1M label on these
circuit packs, see the section on observing product and personnel safety
guidelines in Installation - General Information, 323-1851-201.0.

charges
• refer to Planning - Ordering Information, 323-1851-151, for valid slot
assignments



ATTENTION
The release number printed on the latch label and on the shipping box of
some circuit packs appears as a three-digit number, with a leading zero (for
example, 002). Be aware that the Shelf Inventory application may report the
release number as a two-digit number, without the leading zero (for example,
02).
CAUTION
circuit packs.
CAUTION
Risk of circuit pack damage—High
do not drop any circuit pack. Otherwise, you will damage it.
Also, do not remove the connector protectors until you are
ready to install the circuit pack.
CAUTION
Risk of autoprovisioning failure
Make sure that you install the shelf processor (see “Installing
the shelf processor” on page 1-96) before you install the
cross-connect circuit packs. Insert circuit packs in the correct
order to ensure that circuit packs autoprovision.
CAUTION
resists insertion. Before installing a circuit pack, make sure
you understand the detailed procedure for inserting the circuit
packs (see “Inserting or removing circuit packs in the 6500
CAUTION
Make sure that the circuit pack lock/eject latches are locked in
position. If the lock covers are not locked, the latch sensors on
the circuit pack do not allow the shelf to identify the circuit
pack, and do not allow the circuit pack to autoprovision.


CAUTION
DANGER
When inserted in a shelf slot, optical interface circuit packs
emit laser light that can blind. Keep all optical connectors on
the optical interface circuit packs capped when they are not
connected to optical fiber cables. Never look directly into the
end of an optical fiber or components.
CAUTION
Risk of equipment damage—14-slot shelves (front exhaust fans)
When a 6500 14-slot shelf with front exhaust fans is equipped
with any circuit pack that has a power budget of over 150W per
slot (or equivalently 300W for a double-slot wide pack), the
shelf cannot be equipped with an exhaust air deflector grill.
Step Action

2 Make sure that the shelf processor is already installed in the shelf.
If not, then perform “Installing the shelf processor” on page 1-96.
3 Remove the protective cover/covers on the shelf backplane.
If your power input cards are Then go to
breakerless or fused step 5
breakered step 6


Step Action
5 Make sure the power distribution system on the corresponding power input
cards A and B is turned on.
6 Turn on breakered power input card A and power input card B.
If Then
you are installing a circuit pack before you install the circuit pack,
with a power budget over 150W remove the exhaust air deflector grill (if
per slot (or equivalently, over it is currently equipped).
300W for a double-slot wide (For example, if you are installing a
circuit pack) into a 14-slot shelf 100G [eDC100G, WL3, Flex2 WL3]
with front exhaust OCLD into a 6500 14-slot converged
shelf [NTK503ADE5/NTK503BDE5/
NTK503CDE5] equipped with front
exhaust fans, you must remove the air
deflector grill if it is currently equipped.)
Go to step 8.

If the circuit packs are Then go to
shipped pre-installed (packs-in-place) step 9
not shipped packs-in-place step 10
9 Follow these instructions for each circuit pack as you perform this procedure.
a. Slide the circuit pack out 2 inches and undo the latches until they are
perpendicular to the faceplate.
b. Insert the circuit pack with the latches open until the connectors start to
engage and the latch pawls reach into the latching troughs.
c. Close the circuit pack latches at the same time with equal force.
CAUTION
Do not close one latch at a time. Otherwise you risk
damaging the connectors. Close the latches with equal
force on both sides.


Step Action

circuit packs that do not require cross-connects step 21
otherwise step 11
Installing cross-connect circuit packs

11
CAUTION
Make sure that the shelf processor is installed and
functioning and that no power or fan-related alarms
exist before you install cross-connect circuit packs. If
the shelf processor is not installed, then perform
“Installing the shelf processor” on page 1-96.
12 Ensure that you are properly grounded. The shelf has various ESD jack
locations. (For examples, see Installation - General Information,
323-1851-201.0, the section on observing product and personnel safety
guidelines, the section on dissipating static electricity.)
13 Remove the cross-connect circuit packs from their packaging.
circuit pack (“Examples of circuit pack connector protectors” on page 1-132).


Step Action

If Then
you are installing NTK615AA Make sure you are following the
PKT/OTN cross-connect (XC) procedure on checking the current
circuit packs as part of a system software release in Commissioning and
lineup and testing (SLAT) Testing, 323-1851-221. The procedure
procedure includes the sequence of tasks required
to install correctly these cross-connect
circuit packs during SLAT.
After you complete the installing of the
cross-connect circuit packs, go to step
20 (to install optical or electrical interface
circuit packs, or filler cards, as
applicable).
you are installing NTK615AA go to step 16
PKT/OTN cross-connect (XC)
circuit packs and the installing is
not related to SLAT
you are not installing NTK615AA go to step 18
PKT/OTN cross-connect (XC)
circuit packs
16 Seat one PKT/OTN XC circuit pack (NTK615AA) in slot 7 of the 14-slot shelf
and wait until the green and the blue LEDs on the XC turn steadily on
(approximately 25 minutes).
Alarms may be raised during the interval, which should clear automatically.
17 Seat the second cross-connect circuit pack in slot 8 of the 14-slot shelf. Wait
until the software download and initialization sequence is complete before
proceeding to the next step—see step 19 for the detailed instructions.
Then go to step 20 (to install optical or electrical interface circuit packs, or
filler cards, as applicable).
18 Install a cross-connect circuit pack in slot 7 of the 14-slot shelf.


Step Action
19 Wait 15 seconds, then insert the second cross-connect circuit pack in slot 8
of the 14-slot shelf. Make sure that you install the cross-connect circuit packs
one at a time. Refer to “Inserting or removing circuit packs in the 6500 shelf”
on page 1-138.
The red Fail, the green Ready and the blue In Use status LEDs on the front
of the circuit pack go through the following sequence:
(does not flash).
• If the auto-equipping feature is turned on or if the equipment is already
provisioned for the respective slot, the circuit pack is in-service and the
blue LED turns on after the green LED.
Wait until this sequence is complete before proceeding to the next step.
Software download and initialization can take up to five minutes and is
complete when the green status LED stops flashing and the green Ready
LED turns on. If the red Fail LED turns on, the circuit pack has faults and must
be returned to Ciena.
When the green LED is steadily lit (after the software initialization), an auto-
upgrade of the circuit pack may occur. During an auto-upgrade, the green
LED remains steadily lit and the blue LED remains off (a Software
Auto-Upgrade in progress alarm is raised and clears after the auto-upgrade
is complete).
Do not remove the circuit pack if the green LED is flashing, if the blue LED is
on, or if the circuit pack is auto-upgrading (check for the Software
Auto-Upgrade in progress alarm).
optical or electrical interface circuit packs step 21
filler cards step 27


Step Action
Installing optical, electrical, or data services circuit packs (WT circuit packs are installed later in
this procedure)
DANGER
When inserted in a shelf slot, optical interface circuit
packs emit laser light that can blind. Keep all optical
connectors on the optical interface circuit packs
capped when they are not connected to optical fiber
cables. Never look directly into the end of an optical
fiber or components.
21 Remove the circuit pack from its packaging.

circuit pack.
Figure 1-57
Examples of circuit pack connector protectors


Step Action
23 After you have removed the connector protector from the rear of the circuit
pack, install the circuit pack in its assigned slot.
Refer to Planning - Ordering Information, 323-1851-151, for valid slot
assignments. For more information on circuit pack support (for example,
circuit pack variants supported with various cross-connect variants), refer to
the “Shelf and equipment descriptions” description in Part 1 of Planning,
NTRN10ER.
Refer to “Inserting or removing circuit packs in the 6500 shelf” on page 1-138
for circuit pack insertion.
(does not flash).
• If the auto-equipping feature is turned on or if the equipment is already
provisioned for the respective slot, the circuit pack is in-service and the
blue LED turns on after the green LED.


Step Action
upgrade of the circuit pack may occur. During an auto-upgrade, the green
LED remains steadily lit and the blue LED remains off (a Software
Auto-Upgrade in progress alarm is raised and clears after the auto-upgrade
is complete).
on, or if the circuit pack is auto-upgrading (check for the Software
Auto-Upgrade in progress alarm).
If Then go to
you are installing a circuit pack that requires pluggable step 25 (to install
modules and the modules are not installed the modules)
you are installing a circuit pack that does not require step 26 (to install
pluggable modules or the modules are installed, and the remaining
there are more circuit packs to install circuit packs)
you have finished installing all the required circuit step 27 (to install
packs filler cards)
25 If you are installing a circuit pack that requires pluggable modules, and the
modules are not installed, install the modules on the circuit pack. Refer to
“Installing and removing pluggable modules” on page 1-141.
“Installing and removing pluggable modules” also instructs you to
• install dust covers for any empty pluggable cages to prevent damage to
the cages
• use optical terminators on unused input faceplate connectors of installed
WSS circuit packs. If dust caps are used instead of optical terminators,
PMs can be reported against the port and the port may appear in-service.
After you install the pluggable modules, go to step 26.

26 Repeat step 21 to step 25, as applicable for the remaining circuit packs.


Step Action
Installing filler cards
ATTENTION
You must use filler cards in slots that do not have active circuit packs. Filler
cards protect the connectors on the backplane from dust and debris, and
improve the efficiency of shelf cooling.
27 Remove the filler card from its packaging.

card (“Examples of circuit pack connector protectors” on page 1-132).
29 Install the filler card in an empty slot. Refer to “Inserting or removing circuit
packs in the 6500 shelf”. Repeat this step until all empty slots are filled.
WT or optical transponder circuit packs step 31
otherwise step 35
Installing WT or optical transponder circuit packs
CAUTION
Make sure that you installed all the fillers cards required by
your configuration before you install the optical transponder
circuit packs. Failure to comply will result in damage to the
circuit packs due to overheating.
31 Remove the WT or optical transponder circuit pack from its packaging.

circuit pack (“Examples of circuit pack connector protectors” on page 1-132),
if applicable to your shipping option, and check for obvious physical damage
(for example, bent pins, damaged shrouds or housings). Then install the
optical transponder circuit pack in its assigned slot. Refer to Planning -
Ordering Information, 323-1851-151, for valid slot assignments. Refer to
“Inserting or removing circuit packs in the 6500 shelf” on page 1-138 for
circuit pack insertion.


Step Action
(does not flash).
• If the auto-equipping feature is turned on and the network element mode
is provisioned, or if the equipment is already provisioned for the
respective slot, the circuit pack is in-service and the blue LED turns on
shortly after the green LED. If the network element is not commissioned
(network element mode not provisioned), the blue LED will not illuminate.

upgrade of the circuit pack may occur (only if the NE mode is provisioned).
During an auto-upgrade, the green LED remains steadily lit and the blue LED
remains off (a Software Auto-Upgrade in progress alarm is raised and clears
after the auto-upgrade is complete).
on, or if the circuit pack is auto-upgrading (check for the Software Auto-
Upgrade in progress alarm).
33 Install the required XFP modules on the circuit pack. Refer to “Installing and
removing pluggable modules” on page 1-141.
34 Repeat step 31 and step 33 as applicable for the remaining circuit packs.
Then go to step 35.


Step Action
Testing power feed A and the power feed B

35 After the circuit pack installation is complete, verify power feed A and power
feed B as follows:
• Remove power from power feed A (flip breaker or remove fuse depending
on power input card) and check that all circuit packs are functional (no
intercard suspected alarms or card failures) and that the proper power
feed failure alarm is raised.
• Restore power feed A and ensure that both power feed A and B failure
alarms are clear.
• Remove power from power feed B (flip breaker or remove fuse depending
on power input card) and check that all circuit packs are functional (no
intercard suspected alarms or card failures) and that the proper power
feed failure alarm is raised.
• Restore B feed and ensure that both power feed A and B failure alarms
are clear.
36 You have completed this procedure. Make sure to power down the network
element when you have completed the installation procedures that require
power.
Depending on the equipment applicable to your configuration, determine the
next procedure to perform in Table 1-2 on page 1-10.
—end—

Procedure 1-9
Inserting or removing circuit packs in the 6500 shelf
Use this procedure to insert circuit packs in their slot or to remove circuit packs
from their slot.
For details on shelf processors, see Procedure 1-6, “Installing the shelf
processor”.
Prerequisites
Make sure that you
charges
Precautions
WARNING
Risk of burn
The circuit pack may be hot—do not touch hot surfaces when
reseating or removing a circuit pack.
CAUTION
circuit packs.
CAUTION
Risk of circuit pack damage—High
do not drop any circuit pack. Otherwise you will damage it.
Also, do not remove connector protectors until you are ready
to install the circuit pack.
CAUTION
resists insertion.


CAUTION
Step Action

Inserting a circuit pack in a slot
2 Refer to Planning - Ordering Information, 323-1851-151, to make sure that
you can install the circuit pack in the selected slot.
3 Lift the circuit pack by the edges of the faceplate.
4 Carefully guide the back end of the circuit pack into the required slot, while
making sure that the edges of the circuit pack enter the slot guide rails.
For the 14-slot shelves, the circuit pack is oriented vertically when the printed
labels on the front faceplate are right side up and the LEDs are at the top of
the front faceplate.
5 Push the circuit pack into the shelf until 75% of the length of the circuit pack
is in the shelf.
6 Pull the lock/eject latches of the circuit pack faceplate to their completely
extended positions.
7
CAUTION
Make sure that the circuit pack lock/eject latches are
locked into position. The circuit pack cannot
autoprovision if the lock/eject latches are not locked.
Push the circuit pack towards the back of the shelf until it engages with the
backplane and then push on the faceplate to partially seat it. At this time, the
lock/eject latches will slip into the grooves at the top and bottom edges of the
slot rack.
Push the lock/eject latches towards the circuit pack faceplate. The latch
snaps into the locked position as the circuit pack mates with the shelf
backplane.


Step Action
The latches are now locked in position against the circuit pack faceplate and
hold the circuit pack securely in the shelf.
Do not use excessive force when pushing the lock/eject latches towards the
faceplates. If the latches do not lock into place, remove the circuit pack and
examine the connector at the back of the circuit pack. Look for bent pins or
damage.
8 You have completed inserting the circuit pack. If you were referred to this
procedure from another procedure, return to the referring procedure.
Removing a circuit pack from a slot
9 Make sure that the blue LED on the circuit pack faceplate is off.
If the blue LED is on, do not pull out the circuit pack.
10 Disconnect any cables or fibers from the circuit pack faceplate as applicable.
See “Connecting or disconnecting fiber-optic cables” on page 1-245.
11 Pull the lock/eject latches of the circuit pack faceplate to their completely
extended positions.
The circuit pack connector disengages from the backplane.
12 Pull the circuit pack out of the slot.
You have completed removing the circuit pack. If you were referred to this
procedure from another procedure, return to the referring procedure.
—end—

Procedure 1-10
Installing and removing pluggable modules
Use this procedure to install or remove XFP, SFP, SFP+, SFP28, QSFP+,
QSFP28, CFP, CFP2 pluggable modules, SFP STM-1e modules, or DWDM
pluggable optical (DPO) modules to or from a circuit pack.
Also use this procedure to install or remove CXM C-Band Type 1 modules.
See the following illustrations:

• “Example of an optical SFP/SFP+/SFP28 module” on page 1-141
Note: SFP, SFP+ and SFP28 modules have a similar form factor.
• “Installing an SFP/SFP+/SFP28 module” on page 1-142

• “Example of an XFP module” on page 1-142
• “Example of an STM-1e SFP module” on page 1-143
• “Example of an optical CFP module and CFP module mated in host
system” on page 1-143
• “Installing a DPO module” on page 1-144
• “Example of a CXM C-Band Type 1 module” on page 1-145
• “Example of a CFP2 module” on page 1-145
• “Examples of optical QSFP+ modules” on page 1-146
• “Example of an optical QSFP28 module” on page 1-146
Figure 1-58
Example of an optical SFP/SFP+/SFP28 module
Latch


Figure 1-59
Installing an SFP/SFP+/SFP28 module
Figure 1-60
Example of an XFP module


Figure 1-61
Example of an STM-1e SFP module
Figure 1-62
Example of an optical CFP module and CFP module mated in host system


Figure 1-63
Installing a DPO module


Figure 1-64
Example of a CXM C-Band Type 1 module
Module location
in the host system
Fixing pins
Figure 1-65
Example of a CFP2 module


Figure 1-66
Examples of optical QSFP+ modules
QSFP+ example (MPO connector) QSFP+ example (LC connector)
Figure 1-67
Example of an optical QSFP28 module
Prerequisites
Make sure that
• You obtain dust covers for any empty pluggable cages. Dust covers are
required to prevent damage to empty pluggable cages. For empty CXM
module slots on the host systems, CXM sub-slot filler panels/covers (410-
5819-001) are required.
• You obtain optical terminators for WSS circuit packs.
Use optical terminators on unused input faceplate connectors of installed
WSS circuit packs. If dust caps are used instead of optical terminators,
PMs can be reported against the port and the port may appear in-service.
• You have the correct type of pluggable module and the required number
of modules. You require one module for each port.


• For the pluggable modules supported by each optical interface circuit

pack, refer to the section “Supported pluggable modules in each circuit
pack” in Part 3 of Planning, NTRN10ER.
• If you are using fixed attenuators for the optical interfaces and the shelf is
equipped with a front cover, do not add the attenuators on the optical
interface. Instead, add the required attenuators to the patch panel or
inside a fiber storage tray.
• If you are installing the following SFPs (NTTP12ACE6, NTTP12BCE6, or
NTTP61BAE6) on circuit packs with horizontal SFP cages (like the
SuperMux) as opposed to angled SFP cages, then the shelf front cover
(NTK509CBE6, NTK509CCE6, NTK509DCE6) cannot be installed on the
6500 shelf. Doing so can damage the patchcords that connect to the SFP.
• For 6500 circuit packs such as SuperMux in which the fiber connection is
coming out from the faceplate at 90 degrees, use fibers with standard
short 42.5 mm flexible boots, NTTC50++V6 Ciena supplied patchcords or
the equivalent Telcordia GR-326 compliant, short flexible LC boot.
Do not install in-line plug attenuators at the 6500 circuit pack faceplate on
ports that are perpendicular to the faceplate (also not recommended on
angled ports).
• For the following circuit packs:
— NTK553HA: The faceplate LC connectors on the NTK553HA circuit
pack protrude by an extra 10 mm compared to faceplate LC
connectors on the NTK553EAE5 circuit pack. As a result, in order to
avoid unacceptable interference with the standard depth shelf front
cover/door if equipped, NTTC50xx patchcords (with standard LC
boots) or approved equivalent must be used. Also, attenuator pads
cannot be mounted on the faceplate of the NTK553HA circuit pack
when the shelf front cover is installed.
— NTK553JB: the faceplate LC connectors on the NTK553JB circuit
pack protrude by an extra 10 mm compared to faceplate LC
connectors on the NTK553JAE5 circuit pack. As a result, in order to
avoid unacceptable interference with the standard depth shelf front
cover/door if equipped, NTTC50xx patchcords (with standard LC
boots) or approved equivalent must be used. Also, attenuator pads
cannot be mounted on the faceplate of the NTK553JB circuit pack
when the shelf front cover is installed.


— NTK553FC/NTK553LA/NTK553LB: The faceplate LC connectors on

the NTK553FC, NTK553LA, and NTK553LB circuit packs protrude by
an extra 10 mm compared to faceplate LC connectors on the
NTK553FAE5 circuit pack. As a result, in order to avoid unacceptable
interference with the shelf front cover, NTTC50++ patchcords (which
employ short boot LC with a maximum boot length of 42.5mm from
ferrule tip to back of the boot) or approved equivalent must be used.
Also, attenuator pads cannot be mounted on the faceplate of the
NTK553FC, NTK553LA, and NTK553LB circuit pack when the shelf
front cover is installed.
• Make sure that you observe all the safety requirements described in
• Make sure that you have the LC fiber tool (174-0099-900).
Although optional, this tool assists in installing and removing LC fibers or
removing pluggables (SFP/SFP+/SFP28/QSFP+/QSFP28/XFP) when
space is restricted. When not in use, this tool can be stored in its container
or inside into the shelf front cover (applies to shelf front covers
NTK509CCE6, NTK509DCE6, and NTK509CD for the 14-slot shelf
types).
Precautions
CAUTION
circuit packs and pluggable modules.
Step Action

If you are Then go to
installing a pluggable module step 3
removing pluggable module step 11


Step Action
Installing a pluggable module

3 Remove as applicable to your pluggable:
• the sub-slot filler panel/cover (410-5819-001) from the CXM module
C-Band Type 1 location on the host circuit pack
• the dust cover from the XFP, SFP, SFP+, SFP28, QSFP+, QSFP28, CFP,
CFP2 cage on the host circuit pack
• the DPO cage on the host circuit pack
4 Remove the pluggable module from its packaging.
an XFP, QSFP+/QSFP28, or SFP/SFP+/SFP28 step 6
module
a CFP/CFP2 module or CXM C-Band Type 1 step 8
module
a DPO module step 9
6 Make sure that the latch on the XFP, QSFP+/QSFP28, or SFP/SFP+/SFP28

module is closed (folded back in the pluggable module). See Figure 1-58 on
page 1-141.
CAUTION
If the latch is not closed when you insert the pluggable
module, the module can jam inside the receptacle in
the circuit pack faceplate.
7 While holding the pluggable module with the side where the electrical
connections are exposed to your left, slide the pluggable module into one of
the receptacles in the circuit pack faceplate. See Figure 1-59 on page 1-142.
ATTENTION
Mounting rails inside the host circuit pack guide and support the module. The
module must slide easily into its receptacle until it locks into place. If it does
not slide easily, verify the orientation of the module.
You have completed installing the XFP, QSFP+/QSFP28, or SFP/SFP+/

SFP28 module.


Step Action
8 Slide the CFP/CFP2 module or the CXM C-Band Type 1 module into the
receptacles in the circuit pack faceplate.
ATTENTION
CFP/CFP2 module or the CXM C-Band Type 1 module must slide easily into
its receptacle until it locks into place. If it does not slide easily, verify the
orientation of the module.
Ensure that the module is fully inserted, then fasten the fixing pins on the
module. See “Example of an optical CFP module and CFP module mated in
host system” on page 1-143, “Example of a CFP2 module” on page 1-145, or
“Example of a CXM C-Band Type 1 module” on page 1-145.
Note: An MPO patchcord is shipped with the CXM C-Band Type 1 module.
You will connect the patchcord in Procedure 1-19, “Connecting or
disconnecting fiber-optic cables”.
You have completed installing the module. If you were referred to this
procedure from another procedure, return to the referring procedure or go to
step 25.
9 Slide the DPO module into one of the receptacles in the circuit pack faceplate.
See Figure 1-63 on page 1-144. An audible click indicates that the module is
fully inserted.
ATTENTION
DPO module must slide easily into its receptacle until it locks into place. If it
does not slide easily, verify the orientation of the module.
10 Tighten the fixing pins to secure the module into place.

You have completed installing the DPO module. If you were referred to this
procedure from another procedure, return to the referring procedure or go to
step 25.
Removing a pluggable module


Step Action

If Then
you are using the LC fiber tool go to step 13
(174-0099-900) (see Figure 1-68 on
page 1-151)
otherwise disconnect the fiber-optic cables
from the pluggable module. Then go
to step 15.
Figure 1-68
LC fiber tool (174-0099-900)—two views
13 Disconnect the fiber-optic cables from the SFP/SFP+/SFP28/QSFP+/

QSFP28/XFP pluggable module using the LC fiber tool as follows.
(Figure 1-69 on page 1-152 provides an illustration of the following steps.)
• Hold the LC fiber tool with the hook end pointing up and press down on
the LC connector trigger.
An audible click indicates that the LC connector is ready to be
disengaged.
• With the hook end of the LC fiber tool pointing down, carefully disengage
the LC connector from the latch of the pluggable module.
• Grip the boot (of the LC fiber) between your thumb and index finger or use
the cradle end of the LC fiber tool to grip the boot.
Then remove the LC fiber from the pluggable module.


Step Action
Figure 1-69
Disconnecting fiber-optic cables using the LC fiber tool (174-009-900)


Step Action
14 Remove an SFP/SFP+/SFP28/QSFP+/QSFP28/XFP pluggable module

using the LC fiber tool as follows.
(Figure 1-70 provides an illustration of the following steps.)
• Open the latch of the pluggable module using the hook end of the LC fiber
tool pointing down.
• Use the cradle end (pointing down) and carefully pull the latch to remove
the pluggable module from the circuit pack.
Then go to step 23.
Figure 1-70
Removing a pluggable module using the LC fiber tool (174-0099-900)

If you are removing Then go to
an XFP, QSFP+/QSFP28, or SFP/SFP+/SFP28 step 16
module
a CXM C-Band Type 1 module step 18
a CFP/CFP2 module step 19
a DPO module step 21


Step Action
16 Swing open the latch on the XFP, QSFP+/QSFP28, or SFP/SFP+/SFP28

module to disengage the module from the optical interface circuit pack. Open
the bail latch until it is perpendicular to the face of the module.
17 Use the bail latch to carefully pull the XFP, QSFP+/QSFP28, or SFP/SFP+/
SFP28 module out of its cage on the circuit pack. Make sure that you apply
the extraction force in a direction parallel to the long dimension of the module.
Then go to step 23.
18 Disconnect the MPO patchcord from the CXM C-Band Type 1 module as
follows: slide back the colored sleeve on the MPO connector and pull out the
patchcord.
19 Unfasten the fixing pins that secure the CFP module or CXM C-Band Type 1
module in place.
20 Carefully pull the CFP module or CXM C-Band Type 1 module out of its cage
on the circuit pack. Make sure that you apply the extraction force in a direction
parallel to the long dimension of the module. Then go to step 23.
21 Unfasten the fixing pins that secure the DPO module in place.
22 Carefully pull the DPO module out of its cage on the circuit pack. Make sure
that you apply the extraction force in a direction parallel to the long dimension
of the DPO module.
23 If this XFP, SFP, SFP+, SFP28, QSFP+, QSFP28, CFP, CFP2, or DPO cage
will remain empty, then insert a dust cover into the cage. The dust cover
prevents contamination of the electrical connector.
For empty CXM module slots on the host systems, CXM sub-slot filler panels/
covers (410-5819-001) are required.
Use optical terminators on unused input faceplate connectors of installed
WSS circuit packs. If dust caps are used instead of optical terminators, PMs
can be reported against the port and the port may appear in-service.
24 Place the pluggable module back into its ESD-protective packaging.
You have completed removing the pluggable module. If you were referred to
this procedure from another procedure, return to the referring procedure or
go to step 25.
25 Next perform as applicable:
• “Installing a CMD16, CMD24, CMD64, CMD96, CMD44, eCMD44,
OMD4, BMD2, GMD10, UBMD2, or MBMD2 module” on page 1-155 and/
or
• “Installing a DSCM tray in a DSCM drawer (NT0H57LA)” on page 2-32
and/or
• “Installing a Fiber Interconnect Module (FIM)” on page 1-183
—end—

Procedure 1-11
Installing a CMD16, CMD24, CMD64, CMD96, CMD44,
eCMD44, OMD4, BMD2, GMD10, UBMD2, or MBMD2
module
Use this procedure to install the following modules into a frame:
• 96 Channel Mux/Demux (CMD96) 50 GHz C-Band—supported only on
NTK503ADE5, NTK503BDE5, andNTK503CDE5 shelf variants
• 100GHz 44 Channel Mux/Demux (100 GHz CMD44)
• Enhanced 100GHz CMD44 (100GHz eCMD44)
• 50GHz CMD44 Blue
• 50GHz CMD44 Red
• Enhanced 50GHz CMD44 Blue (50 GHz eCMD44)
• Enhanced 50GHz CMD44 Red (50 GHz eCMD44)
• 4 Channel Optical Mux/Demux (OMD4) 100 GHz C-Band Group 1-9
• Broadband Mux/Demux 1x2 (BMD2)
• Upgrade Broadband Mux/Demux 1x2 (UBMD2)
• Monitor Broadband Mux/Demux 1x2 (MBMD2)
• 10 Group Mux/Demux (GMD10) C-Band
Prerequisites
• Make sure that you
— are familiar with the manufacturer’s torque specifications for the rack,
as required
— have a 3/8-in. wrench
— have the engineering documentation package (EDP) or installation
plans
— have the required mounting brackets if you are not using the brackets
pre-installed on the module
— have a ground cable and a ground lug appropriate to the frame. Have
screws appropriate to the frame to attach the frame ground.
— have a crimp tool for 6 AWG (16-mm2) ground cable


Installing a CMD16, CMD24, CMD64, CMD96, CMD44, eCMD44, OMD4, BMD2, GMD10, UBMD2, or
MBMD2 module
— have a flathead screwdriver

— observe all the safety requirements described in Installation - General
— have the appropriate personal grounding device to dissipate
electrostatic charges
• For UBMD2 and MBMD2 modules, use Ciena-supplied (or equivalent
Telcordia GR-326 compliant) SC optical fiber patchcords specified to have
the Telcordia GR-326 standard boot that measures 58 mm (maximum)
from ferrule tip to the back of the boot. Any other fiber boot length that
exceeds 58 mm is not recommended and has not been qualified to use
with these modules.
To achieve the correct fiber bend radius with the 58 mm fiber boot, the
UBMD2 and MBMD2 ship with metallic 90-degree fiber boot clips. The
boot clips are packaged in a small ESD bag (open the module door to find
the ESD bag attached to the module).
• For CMD44 modules, use Ciena-supplied (or equivalent Telcordia GR-326
compliant) LC optical fiber patchcords specified to have the Telcordia
GR-326 standard boot that measures 42.5 mm (maximum) from ferrule tip
to the back of the boot. Any other fiber boot length that exceeds 42.5 mm
is not recommended and has not been qualified to use with these
modules.
Note: The CMD44 modules are shipped with 20 plastic bend radius clips.
These clips are optional and are included in case attenuators or incorrect
LC fiber boot length were installed. They are not required if the correct
42.5 mm fibers are installed and dressed correctly.


MBMD2 module
Precautions
DANGER


personnel safety guidelines, the topic on consequences of
working with power.

CAUTION
equipment.


MBMD2 module
Step Action
and equipment damage”.
3 Unpack and inspect the module. See the following illustrations for the different
modules:
• “16 Channel Mux/Demux (CMD16) 100 GHz C-Band module (door
open)”
• “24 Channel Mux/Demux (CMD24) 100 GHz C-Band module (door
open)” on page 1-159
• “64 Channel Mux/Demux (CMD64) 75 GHz C-Band module (door open)”
• “96 Channel Mux/Demux (CMD96) 50 GHz C-Band module (door open)”
on page 1-159
• “44 Channel Mux/Demux (CMD44) module (door open)” on page 1-160
• “10 Group Mux/Demux (GMD10) C-Band module” on page 1-160
• “Broadband Mux/Demux 1x2 (BMD2) module” on page 1-161
• “OMD4 C-Band Group 1-9 Mux/Demux module” on page 1-161
• “Upgrade Broadband Mux/Demux 1x2 (UBMD2)” on page 1-161
• “Monitor Broadband Mux/Demux 1x2 (MBMD2)” on page 1-161
Figure 1-71
16 Channel Mux/Demux (CMD16) 100 GHz C-Band module (door open)


MBMD2 module
Step Action
Figure 1-72
Figure 1-73
Figure 1-74


MBMD2 module
Step Action
Figure 1-75
44 Channel Mux/Demux (CMD44) module (door open)
Figure 1-76
10 Group Mux/Demux (GMD10) C-Band module


MBMD2 module
Step Action
Figure 1-77
Broadband Mux/Demux 1x2 (BMD2) module
Figure 1-78
OMD4 C-Band Group 1-9 Mux/Demux module
Figure 1-79
Upgrade Broadband Mux/Demux 1x2 (UBMD2)
Figure 1-80
Monitor Broadband Mux/Demux 1x2 (MBMD2)


MBMD2 module
Step Action

the pre-installed mounting use the information in step 5 to
brackets determine the appropriate mounting
position on the frame
other mounting brackets unfasten the pre-installed brackets.
Then install the required brackets using
the information in step 5 to determine
the appropriate mounting positions on
the module.
Also, use the information in step 5 to
determine the appropriate mounting
position on the frame.
5 Determine the appropriate mounting hole position on the frame and mounting
bracket setback position.
For details, see the EDP, IDP, or equivalent site/network engineering plans.
Also see the following illustrations for examples.
• “Mounting brackets for the CMD16 module” on page 1-163
• “Mounting bracket positions (bracket/setback positions apply to all CMD
modules; example shows the CMD44 module)” on page 1-167
• “Mounting brackets for BMD2 modules” on page 1-168
• “Mounting bracket for ETSI frame” on page 1-169
• “Mounting bracket for 19-inch frame in 5-inch setback position (default)”
on page 1-168
• The position of the mounting brackets for the 23-inch frame with 5-inch
setback is the same as shown for the 19-inch frame.
Note: The setback positions for the mounting brackets accommodate for
0.394 in. (10 mm) for the module door.


MBMD2 module
Step Action
Figure 1-81
Mounting brackets for the CMD16 module
23-in. bracket
(one on each side)
ETSI bracket
(one on each side)
The module is shipped

with 19-in. brackets installed
(one bracket on each side).


MBMD2 module
Step Action
Figure 1-82
23-in. bracket
(one on each side)
ETSI bracket
(one on each side)
The module is shipped

with 19-in. brackets installed
(one bracket on each side).


MBMD2 module
Step Action
Figure 1-83


MBMD2 module
Step Action
Figure 1-84


MBMD2 module
Step Action
Figure 1-85
Mounting bracket positions (bracket/setback positions apply to all CMD modules; example shows
the CMD44 module)
17.50 in (445 mm) minimum frame aperture width

Rear of frame
footprint
17.30 in (440 mm)
CMD44 maximum outside dimension
17.25 in
(438 mm)
11.81 in
11.02 in (300 mm)
(280 mm) Max depth
EIA alternate mounting
(6-inch setback)
EIA standard mounting
(5-inch setback) 6.0 in
(152 mm)
5.0 in
(127 mm)
ETSI mounting
50 mm
(50 mm)
(1.969 in)
Front of frame
footprint
0.394 in
(10 mm)
door


MBMD2 module
Step Action
Figure 1-86
Mounting brackets for BMD2 modules
Mounting brackets for 19 in. frame installation

∅ .280 x .125" ∅ .280
(2 Places) (2 Places)
1.710 1.250 1.000
18.31
18.96
Mounting brackets for 23 in. frame installation

∅ .280 x .125" ∅ .280
(2 Places) (2 Places)
1.710 1.250 1.000
22.31
22.96
Mounting brackets for ETSI frame installation .65

∅ .280 x .125" Cutout
(2 Places) .40
.59
1.710 .984
18.65
20.28
20.97
Figure 1-87
Mounting bracket for 19-inch frame in 5-inch setback position (default)


MBMD2 module
Step Action
Figure 1-88
Mounting bracket for ETSI frame
6 Secure the module to the frame using the appropriate mounting screws (two
on each side for 1U modules, four on each side for 2U modules.
CAUTION
Use a torque wrench to attach the module to the frame
with the appropriate mounting screws. Otherwise, you
risk damaging the equipment.
Installing a ground bracket or a two-hole lug with a ground cable on the module
8 If the module you are installing has two grounding locations (on the side of
the module and at the rear), select the grounding location you will be using.
9 Attach the two-hole lug with a ground cable to the module.
10 Fasten the other end of the ground cable to an appropriate location on the
rack.
CAUTION
Use a torque wrench to attach the ground bracket with
mounting screws onto the frame. Otherwise, you risk
damaging the equipment.


MBMD2 module
Step Action
Routing fiber-optic cables to the module

11 Route the fiber-optic cables to the applicable module.
• Route GMD10 fiber-optic cables out the left side only.
• You can route fiber-optic cables for all other modules covered in this
procedure out the left side or the right side.
• For CMD44, see a fibering example (qualified 42.5 mm flexible boot fiber)
in the following illustration. The example shows the left side of the CMD44
faceplate.
Figure 1-89
Example of CMD44 fibering (shows left side)


MBMD2 module
Step Action
• To install the 90-degree boot clips provided with the UBMD2 and the
MBMD2, insert (wiggle) the end of the clip carefully into the end of the
fiber boot, while making sure that the clip does not work through one of
the slots in the boot. If this occurs, remove the clip and start over.
Figure 1-90
90-degree boot clip (shipped with the UBMD2 and the MBMD2)
Boot clip
End of the boot clip

inside the fiber boot


MBMD2 module
Step Action
For UBMD2, see a fibering example (qualified 42.5 mm flexible boot fiber) in
the following illustration.
Fasteners (such as VELCRO) must be used to dress fiber in three different
areas. It is important that the fastener be used at the exit point of the module,
see the instructions included in the illustration.
The same guidance applies to MBMD2.
Figure 1-91
Example of routing fiber out the left side of the UBMD2
The UBMD2 requires a fiber be run between two UBMD2 ports. The UBMD2
does not provide within the module the capability of port-to-port fiber
connecting. Consequently, this fiber:
a. must exit the UBMD2 and must be secured as shown in the previous
illustration
b. then must be routed to an external fiber manager to store fiber slack (The
UBMD2 does not provide fiber slack storage)
c. then must re-enter the UBMD2 and must be secured as shown in the
previous illustration


MBMD2 module
Step Action
• For BMD2, see a fibering example (qualified 42.5 mm flexible boot fiber)
in the following illustration.
Figure 1-92
Example of BMD2 fibering
• For CMD96, see a fibering example (qualified 42.5 mm flexible boot fiber)
in the following illustration.
Figure 1-93
Example of CMD96 fibering


MBMD2 module
Step Action
12 Next, perform as applicable:

• Procedure 1-12, “Installing an OMC2 chassis and associated modules”
• Procedure 1-13, “Installing a Fiber Interconnect Module (FIM)”
• Procedure 2-1, “Installing and grounding equipment drawers” to install
the DSCM drawer (NT0H57LA), then Procedure 2-3, “Installing a DSCM
tray in a DSCM drawer (NT0H57LA)”
—end—

Procedure 1-12
Installing an OMC2 chassis and associated modules
Use this procedure:
• to install a 2-slot optical module chassis (OMC2) in the equipment rack
• to install the following equipment in the OMC2 chassis:
— CLMD module
— UCS module
— OMC2 filler panel
Prerequisites
• If you are using the upgrade coupler/splitter module (UCS) and/or the C/
L-band mux/demux module (CLMD) in applications that require using the
isolator port of the respective module for wet plant deployments of
Submarine Line Terminal Equipment (SLTE), Hazard Level 3B laser safety
labels (supplied as a kit with each UCS and CLMD) must be applied on
the front and back of the OMC2 door. Ensure that you have completed the
procedure on applying Hazard Level 3B laser safety labels on OMC2 in
• Make sure that you:
— observe all the safety requirements described in Installation - General
Information, 323-1851-201.0. Have the appropriate personal
grounding device to dissipate electrostatic charges.
— are familiar with the manufacturer's torque specifications for the rack,
as required
— have the engineering documentation package (EDP) or installation
plans
— have the appropriate personal grounding device to dissipate
electrostatic charges
— have the following tools and materials:
– a ground cable and a ground lug appropriate to the frame. Have
– crimp tool for 6 AWG (16-mm2) ground cable
– 3/8-in. wrench
– flathead screwdriver
– Phillips screwdriver


Precautions
DANGER


personnel safety guidelines, the subsection on consequences
of incorrect grounding. For additional details, see the section
on working with power.

CAUTION
Risk of laser radiation exposure
If you are using the upgrade coupler/splitter module (UCS) and
or the C/L-band mux/demux module (CLMD) in applications
that require using the isolator port of the respective module for
wet plant deployments of Submarine Line Terminal Equipment
(SLTE), Hazard Level 3B laser safety labels (supplied as a kit
with each UCS and CLMD) must be applied on the front and
back of the OMC2 door. Users and service personnel must
have appropriate laser safety training.
For more information and the procedure to apply the Hazard

Level 3B labels, see the section on observing product and
personnel safety guidelines in Installation - General
Information, 323-1851-201.0.


CAUTION
equipment.
Step Action
3 Unpack and inspect the equipment.
4 If you are using the upgrade coupler/splitter module (UCS) and/or the
C/L-band mux/demux module (CLMD) in applications that require using the
isolator port of the respective module for wet plant deployments of Submarine
Line Terminal Equipment (SLTE), ensure that the Hazard Level 3B laser
safety labels (supplied as a kit with each UCS and CLMD) are applied on the
OMC2, see the procedure in Installation - General Information,
323-1851-201.0.
Otherwise, go to step 5.


Step Action
5 The OMC2 is shipped with 19-in. mounting brackets pre-installed. Select your
next step.
the pre-installed mounting go to step 6
brackets
other mounting brackets unfasten the pre-installed brackets. Then
attach the required brackets to the OMC2
using the applicable mounting hardware
(shipped with the OMC2). See “Mounting
brackets for the OMC2”.
Figure 1-94
Mounting brackets for the OMC2
6 Determine the appropriate mounting hole position on the rack and mounting
bracket setback position.
For details, see the EDP, IDP, or equivalent site/network engineering plans.


Step Action
7 Insert and tighten the appropriate mounting hardware to secure the OMC2 to
the rack. Use a torque wrench to verify that torque was applied correctly
according to rack manufacturer specifications. In the case of the PTE2000
rack, for the M6 and 12-24 mounting options that specification is 5.64 N-m
(50 lb-in.) for installation and 4.52 N-m (40 lb-in.) for inspection.
CAUTION
Use a torque wrench to attach the OMC2 to the rack
Grounding the OMC2

8 Select the grounding location you will be using. Fasten one end of the ground
cable to the selected grounding location on the OMC2.
• The location at the rear of the OMC2 is shown in the following illustration.
• The grounding location on the left-hand side is illustrated in “Installing an
OMC2 filler panel” on page 1-181.
Figure 1-95
OMC2 grounding location on the rear of the chassis
9 Fasten the other end of the ground cable to an appropriate grounding location
on the rack.
CAUTION
Use a torque wrench to attach the ground cable with
mounting screws onto the rack. Otherwise, you risk
10 Slide the OMC2 toward the front of the rack and secure it in a position that
provides easier access for installing modules or a filler panel. To achieve this,
pull out the plunger on the right-hand side of the OMC2 chassis (“Installing a
module into the OMC2 chassis” on page 1-180), pull the chassis toward the
front of the rack, and release the plunger to secure the chassis in the
front-most position.


Step Action

If you want to install Then go to
a UCS module or a CLMD module step 12
an OMC2 filler panel step 16
Installing a UCS module or a CLMD module (see the following illustration)

12 If a filler panel is installed in the OMC2 slot where you must install the module,
unfasten the captive screws on the filler panel, remove the panel and store it
in a safe place.
13 Remove the module faceplate:
a. The module faceplate is secured with two captive screws (front of the
module faceplate) and two thumb nuts (back of the module faceplate).
Unfasten the captive screws and remove the thumb nuts.
Note: The thumb nuts can be discarded if the module installation is
permanent.
b. Detach the faceplate and store it within reach. You will install back the
module faceplate after you install the module in the chassis.
14 Align and insert the module into the OMC2 slot.
Figure 1-96
Installing a module into the OMC2 chassis
Chassis slot
Thumb nut
(2 places)
Captive screw
(2 places)
1) Unfasten the captive screws. Plunger

Module faceplate 2) Detach the module faceplate.
3) Remove the thumb nuts.
4) Align and insert the module into the chassis slot.
5) Align the module faceplate.
6) Fasten the faceplate and the module with the captive screws.


Step Action
15 Place and align the module faceplate against the module and secure the
module to the chassis with the captive screws.
Figure 1-97
OMC2 configurations—2-module and 1-module
Installing an OMC2 filler panel

16 Align and install the filler panel (see an example in “Installing an OMC2 filler
panel”).
17 Secure the panel to the chassis with the captive screws on the panel.
Figure 1-98
Installing an OMC2 filler panel


Step Action
Routing the fiber-optic cables and the communication cable(s) to the module(s) equipped in the
OMC2
18 Make sure that the OMC2 is in the most forward position—see step 10.
19 Route the fiber-optic cables to the applicable module.
20 Route the communication cable to the Equipment Inventory port on the
module faceplate.
Note: The OMC2 is equipped with features that allow you to secure the cable
ties used to bundle the cables.
21 Close the OMC2 door. Make sure to avoid pinching the cable bundle routed
through the OMC2 side opening.
22 Pull out the plunger on the right-hand side of the OMC2 chassis (“Installing a
module into the OMC2 chassis” on page 1-180), push the chassis inside the
rack, and use the plunger to secure the chassis in position.
—end—

Procedure 1-13
Installing a Fiber Interconnect Module (FIM)
Use this procedure to install the following modules:
• FIM Type 1 (NTK504CA)
• FIM Type 2 (NTK504CB)
• FIM Type 4 (NTK504CD)
• FIM Type 5 (NTK504CE)
• FIM Type 6 (NTK504CF)
FIMs are shipped with the following equipment pre-installed. FIM ports are
pre-equipped with dust caps or loopback modules as listed below. In addition
to providing the optical loopback operation required by applications that use
the FIM, the loopback modules act as dust caps for the optical ports. Do not
remove the dust caps or loopback modules except as part of a fiber
connecting procedure. FIM assemblies that include pre-installed loopback
modules also include a bag of dust caps that must be put on any loopback
module that is being removed and saved for future use. For more information,
see the Photonic passive modules table in Planning - Ordering Information,
323-1851-151.
• FIM Type 1:
— dust caps on MPO ports 1 to 4 (WSS1)
— MPO Loopback (APC, SM, 12 Fiber) modules in all the other MPO
ports
— Duplex LC Loopback (SM) modules in each of the duplex LC ports
• FIM Type 2:
— dust caps on MPO ports 1 to 4 (WSS1)
— MPO Loopback (APC, SM, 12 Fiber) modules in all the other MPO
ports


• FIM Type 4:
• FIM Type 5:
— four MPO Loopback (APC, SM, 12 Fiber) modules pre-installed in four
of the FIM’s five MPO ports
— dust caps on the rest of the FIM optical ports
• FIM Type 6:
— MPO Loopback (APC, SM, 12 Fiber) modules in each of the MPO
ports
— dust caps on the rest of the FIM optical ports
Prerequisites
Make sure that you
• are familiar with the manufacturer’s torque specifications for the rack, as
required
• have a 3/8-in. wrench
• have the engineering documentation package (EDP), installation
documentation package (IDP), or equivalent site/network engineering
plans
• have a ground cable and a ground lug appropriate to the frame. Have
• have a crimp tool for 6 AWG (16-mm2) ground cable
• have a flathead screwdriver
charges


Precautions
DANGER


personnel safety guidelines, the topic on consequences of
working with power.

CAUTION
equipment.
Step Action


Step Action
3 Unpack and inspect the module. See the following illustrations:

• “FIM Type 1”
• “FIM Type 2”
• “FIM Type 4, FIM Type 5, and FIM Type 6 - front view” on page 1-187
Figure 1-99
FIM Type 1
Front view - door open Front view - door closed
Figure 1-100
FIM Type 2
Front view - door open Front view - door closed


Step Action
Figure 1-101
FIM Type 4, FIM Type 5, and FIM Type 6 - front view
Note the orientation

of the MPO adaptors Note the orientation
of the LC adaptors
LC loopback FIM Type 4

20 places
LC loopback FIM Type 5

5 places MPO loopback
4 places
MPO loopback FIM Type 6

8 places


Step Action
4 Select the applicable mounting brackets. For details, see the EDP, IDP, or
equivalent site/network engineering plans.
5 Attach the applicable mounting brackets to the module (see the following
illustrations). The 19-inch brackets are shipped installed.
Figure 1-102
Mounting brackets for FIM Type 1 and FIM Type 2 (example shows the right side of FIM Type 1)
Right side of FIM Type 1
19-inch bracket (shipped installed)
23-inch bracket
ETSI bracket


Step Action
Figure 1-103
Mounting brackets for FIM Type 4, FIM Type 5, and FIM Type 6
23-inch EIA bracket

2 places
ETSI bracket
2 places
19-inch EIA bracket

2 places
(shipped installed)
6 Determine the appropriate mounting hole positions and setback positions on

the frame. For details, see the EDP, IDP, or equivalent site/network
engineering plans.
7 Secure the module to the rack using the appropriate mounting screws.
Tighten the mounting hardware to the rack manufacturer’s torque
specifications. Use a torque wrench to verify that torque has been applied
correctly. In the case of the PTE2000 rack, for the M6 and 12-24 mounting
options, that specification is 5.65 N-m (50 lb-in.) for installation and 4.52 N-m
(40 lb-in.) for inspection.
CAUTION
Use a torque wrench to attach the module to the rack


Step Action
Grounding the module

8 Locate the main protective ground terminal points. Two options are provided:
on the left-hand side of the module and at the rear.
9 Attach the two-hole lug with a ground cable to the module.
10 Fasten the other end of the ground cable to an appropriate location on the
rack.
CAUTION
mounting screws onto the frame. Otherwise, you risk
CAUTION
Risk of damage to MPO cables
Before you close the FIM door, make sure you bend the
flexible boots of the MPO cables to allow the cables to
route to the side of the FIM. Otherwise, you can pinch
the optical fiber. (See “Bending the flexible boot of the
MPO cable before closing the FIM door” on page
1-257.)

To install the DSCM drawer (NT0H57LA), see Procedure 2-1, “Installing and
grounding equipment drawers”, then Procedure 2-3, “Installing a DSCM tray
in a DSCM drawer (NT0H57LA)”.
To install electrical I/O hardware, see Procedure 1-14, “Installing electrical I/
O hardware and I/O panels in the 6500 14-slot shelf”.
To install cables, see as applicable to your equipment:
• Procedure 1-16, “Routing fiber-optic cables and electrical cables to
circuit packs in the 6500 shelf”
• Procedure 2-9, “Guidelines for routing fiber-optic cables in the 1U Bulk
Fiber Management Tray 174-0094-900”.
• Procedure 1-17, “Guidelines for cable routing to electrical SFP and
optical ports on the same shelf”
• Procedure 1-18, “Installation guidelines for QSFP28-QSFP28 DAC
cable”
To connect MPO cables, see “Connecting or disconnecting fiber-optic cables”
on page 1-245.
—end—

Procedure 1-14
Installing electrical I/O hardware and I/O panels in the
6500 14-slot shelf
Use this procedure to install electrical I/O hardware and 10/100Base-T panels
in a 6500 14-slot shelf, as follows:
• E1 I/O panels (optical/front electrical and converged optical/front electrical
shelves)
• E1 I/O protection modules (on front E1 I/O panels)
• 120-ohm converters (on front E1 I/O panels)
• 32xSTM-1e I/O panels (optical/front electrical and converged optical/front
electrical shelves)
• 48xDS3/E3/EC-1 I/O panels (optical/front electrical shelf, converged
optical/front electrical shelf, optical/rear electrical shelf, converged optical/
rear electrical shelf, or Metro front electrical shelf)
• 48x10/100BT I/O panels (optical/front electrical shelf, converged optical/
front electrical shelf, optical/rear electrical shelf, converged optical/rear
electrical shelf, or Metro front electrical shelf)
• E1 I/O modules (Metro front electrical shelf)
• Front I/O panel (Multi-Service) in optical/front electrical shelf assembly (for
20G L2SS circuit packs).
12xSFP I/O carriers are placed in Front I/O panel (Multi-Service) to
provide extra GE SFPs for the 20G L2SS circuit packs.
For 20G L2SS circuit packs, Front I/O panel (Multi-Service) is not
supported in Metro front electrical, optical/rear electrical, or converged
optical shelf assembly.
The interfaces described in this procedure are intended for intrabuilding use
Prerequisites
Make sure that you have the following:
• a slotted screwdriver (to unfasten protective covers and expose shelf
backplane connectors)
• a short Phillips torque driver (to fasten electrical hardware in place)


Installing electrical I/O hardware and I/O panels in the 6500 14-slot shelf
• the engineering documentation package (EDP), installation

plans
• the appropriate personal grounding device to dissipate electrostatic
charges
Precautions
CAUTION
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage electrostatic-
equipment.
DANGER
Risk of eye injury
Wear eye protection such as safety goggles or safety glasses
with side guards when you work with air filters or in proximity to
the shelf air exhaust.
Step Action
1 Locate the required 14-slot shelf.

For details, see the engineering documentation package (EDP), installation
documentation package (IDP), or equivalent site/network engineering plans.
cord to the ESD jack on a shelf installed in a grounded rack/cabinet or clip to
a suitable ground point.


Step Action
3 Select the equipment you are installing.

If you Then
are installing E1 I/O hardware in the 14-slot optical/front go to step 4
electrical or 14-slot converged optical/front electrical shelf
are installing 48xDS3/E3/EC-1 I/O panels, 48x10/100BT I/O go to step 39
panels, 32xSTM-1e I/O panels, or Front I/O panel
(Multi-Service) in the 14-slot optical/front electrical or 14-slot
converged optical/front electrical shelf
are installing 48xDS3/E3/EC-1 I/O panels or 48x10/100BT go to step 59
I/O panels in the 14-slot optical/rear electrical or 14-slot
converged optical/rear electrical shelf
are installing E1 I/O modules, a 48xDS3/E3/EC-1 I/O panel, go to step 71
or a 48x10/100BT I/O panel in the 14-slot Metro front
electrical shelf
have installed all the electrical I/O hardware and I/O panels you have
as applicable to your configuration completed the
procedure
Installing E1 I/O hardware in the 14-slot optical/front or 14-slot converged optical/front electrical
shelf
4 In the electrical interface area, metal covers protect the electrical I/O section
of the backplane. Use the slotted screwdriver to unfasten the thumbscrews
that secure the covers.
5 Remove the covers for I/O slots 1, 2, 3, or 4, as required, and store them for
future use.
Preparing to install the E1 I/O panel (removing the drip tray, the air filter and filter tray)
6 Unfasten the thumbscrew on the top left hand side of the drip tray (see Figure
1-104 on page 1-194).
7 While gripping the thumbscrew, pull the retractable pin on the right hand side,
pull the drip tray forward, down and out. Store the tray in a safe place.
You will re-install the drip tray in step 28.


Step Action
Figure 1-104
Removing and installing the drip tray and the filter tray (example shows an optical/front electrical
shelf)
8 Check the shelf product engineering code (PEC).

If Then go to
the PEC includes the suffix E5 step 9
otherwise step 10
9 Press the clips on both sides of the filter and slide the filter out. Store the filter
in a safe place (you will re-install it in step 25 and step 26). Go to step 15.
10 Open the fiber channel door by pulling the tabs on both sides.
11 Press the black button in the middle of the fiber channel to unlock the filter
tray. The front side of the filter tray unlocks and exposes the filter.


Step Action
12 Lift and remove the filter and store it in a safe place. You will re-install the filter
in step 27.
13 Look into the electrical interface cage area under the filter tray and locate the
left and right retractable pins at the bottom rear of the filter tray.
14 While pulling the retractable pins on each side, pull the filter tray forward,
down and out. Store the tray in a safe place. You will re-install the filter tray in
step 27.
15 Remove the E1 I/O panel from its packaging.
16 Remove the protective covers from the E1 I/O connectors (at the back of the
E1 I/O panel) you will use.
17 Hold the two E1 I/O panel handles (golden) with two hands.
18
CAUTION
Risk of connector damage
Exercise caution when you insert the panel into the
opening of the electrical interface area to avoid
damaging the backplane connector pins.
Insert the panel at an angle (see Figure 1-105 on page 1-196) into the
opening of the electrical interface cage area at the bottom of the 14-slot
optical/front electrical or 14-slot converged optical/front electrical shelf until
the panel passes the tabs on the inside walls of the shelf (on which the air
intake baffle sits). Position the panel vertically. Push the panel toward the
backplane until it engages the coarse guide pins, then the fine guide pins.


Step Action
Figure 1-105
Installing the E1 I/O panel in the 14-slot optical/front electrical shelf (side panels and elements at
the top not shown for visibility)


Step Action
19
CAUTION
Exercise caution when you engage the panel into the
backplane connector to avoid bending connector pins.
Lift the insertion/ejection bar and while keeping the bar lifted continue to
carefully slide the E1 I/O panel horizontally into the shelf until you engage the
panel into the backplane connector.
20 Press the insertion/ejection bar down to completely engage the panel into the
backplane.
21 Tighten the five fixing thumbscrews to secure the panel in place. Torque to
1 Nm (9 lb-in.).
22 Remove the golden handles on the E1 I/O panel and store them for future
use.
23 Repeat step 15 to step 22 for the remaining E1 I/O panel, if required. Then go
to step 24.
24 Check the shelf product engineering code (PEC).
If Then go to
the PEC includes the suffix E5 step 25
otherwise step 27
25 Hold the filter such that the arrows on the outside edges of the filter that
indicate the direction of the air flow are pointing upwards.
26 Slide the filter back into the shelf. Press the filter all the way in. Then go to
step 28.
27 Re-install the filter tray and the filter by performing step 10 to step 14 in the
reverse order. Make sure that the arrows on the outside edges of the filter that
28 Re-install the drip tray by performing step 6 to step 7 in the reverse order.
Installing E1 I/O protection modules
29 Remove the E1 I/O protection module from its packaging.
30 On the protection module, remove the protective cover to expose the side that
you will insert into the corresponding connector on the E1 I/O panel.


Step Action
31 Hold the module by the handle, align the module on the screws, and carefully
insert the module into the applicable connector on the E1 I/O panel (see
Figure 1-106).
Figure 1-106
Example of E1 hardware installed in the electrical interface area of the 14-slot optical/front
electrical shelf


Step Action
32 Tighten the two fixing pins to secure the module in place. Torque to 5 lb-in.
After a few seconds, the blue LED turns on, then turns off.
When you provision 1:N protection against the associated protection circuit
pack, the protection module is put in-service and the blue LED turns on.
Do not remove the protection module if the blue LED is on.
33 Repeat step 29 to step 32 for the remaining E1 I/O protection modules, if
required (up to four for each E1 I/O panel).
If your application Then go to
requires 120-ohm converter modules step 35
does not require 120-ohm converter modules step 3
Installing 120-ohm converter modules

35 Remove the 120-ohm converter module from its packaging.
36 Align the module against the pins on the applicable connector on the E1 I/O
panel and carefully insert the converter module into the connector (see
Figure 1-106 on page 1-198).
37 Torque the two fixing pins to 5 lb-in. to secure the module in place.
38 Repeat step 35 to step 37 for the remaining 120-ohm converter modules, if
required (up to eight for each E1 I/O panel). Then go to step 3.


Step Action
Installing DS3/E3/EC-1 I/O panels, 48x10/100BT I/O panels (see Figure 1-107), 32x STM-1e I/O
panels, or Front I/O panel (Multi-Service) in the 14-slot optical/front electrical or 14-slot converged
optical/front electrical shelf
Figure 1-107
Example of 48x10/100BT I/O panels installed in the electrical interface area of the 14-slot optical/
front electrical shelf


Step Action
39 In the electrical interface area, metal covers protect the electrical I/O section
of the backplane. Unfasten the thumbscrews that secure the covers.
40 Remove the covers for I/O slots 1-2, 3-4, 9-10, and 11-12 as required.
41 Unfasten the thumbscrew on the top left hand side of the drip tray.
42 While gripping the thumbscrew, pull the retractable pin on the right hand side,
pull the drip tray forward, down and out. Store the tray in a safe place.
You will re-install the drip tray in step 58.
43 Open the fiber channel door by pulling the tabs on both sides.
44 Press the black button in the middle of the fiber channel to unlock the filter
tray. The front side of the filter tray unlocks and exposes the filter.
45 Lift and remove the filter and store it in a safe place.
You will re-install the filter in step 57.
46 Look into the electrical interface area under the filter tray and locate the left
and right retractable pins at the bottom rear of the filter tray.
47 While pulling the retractable pins on each side, pull the filter tray forward,
down and out. Store the tray in a safe place.
You will re-install the filter tray in step 57.
48 Remove the panel from its packaging.
49 Remove the cover on the connectors at the back of the panel.
50
CAUTION
Hold the panel with two hands and insert it into the opening of the electrical
interface area at the bottom of the 14-slot converged optical/front electrical or
14-slot converged optical/front electrical shelf until the panel passes the tabs
on the inside walls of the shelf (on which the air intake baffle sits).
51 Position the panel vertically so that the coarse guide pin bushing in the middle
of the panel engages the coarse middle guide pin.
52 Push the panel toward the backplane to engage the fine guide pins.


Step Action
53
CAUTION
carefully slide the panel horizontally into the shelf until you engage the panel
into the backplane connector.
backplane. Do not push the bottom of the panel when you press the bar down.
55 Tighten the three fixing thumbscrews to secure the panel in place. Torque to
1 N-m (9 lb-in.).
56 Repeat step 48 to step 55 for the remaining panels, if required. Then go to
step 57.
57 Re-install the filter tray and the filter by performing step 43 to step 47 in the
reverse order. Make sure that the arrows on the outside edges of the filter that
58 Re-install the drip tray by performing step 41 to step 42 in the reverse order.
Then go to step 3.
Installing DS3/E3/EC-1 I/O panels or 48x10/100BT I/O panels in the 14-slot optical/rear or 14-slot
converged optical/front electrical shelf
59 To install I/O hardware in the 14-slot optical/rear or 14-slot converged optical/
front electrical shelf, you are working on the rear of the shelf. At the rear of the
shelf, metal covers protect the electrical I/O section of the backplane.
Unfasten the thumbscrews that secure the covers.
60 Remove the covers for I/O slots 1-2, 3-4, 9-10, 11-12, as required, and store
them for future use.
61 Remove the I/O panel from its packaging.
63 Carefully align the slot at the top of the panel in front of the tab at the back of
the shelf, then slide the slot over the tab.
64 Make sure that the panel vertically aligned against the guide pins.
65 Push the panel towards the shelf until it engages the fine guide pins.


Step Action
66
CAUTION
Pull the insertion/ejection bar towards you and while keeping the bar pulled
carefully push the I/O panel horizontally along the guide pins until you engage
the module into the backplane connector.
67 Press the insertion/ejection bar to completely engage the panel into the
backplane.
1 Nm (9 lb-in.).
69 Repeat step 59 to step 68 for the remaining I/O panels, if required. Then go
to step 3.
Installing E1 I/O modules (see Figure 1-108), a DS3/E3/EC-1 I/O panel, or a 48x10/100BT I/O panel
in the 14-slot Metro front electrical shelf
Figure 1-108
E1 I/O modules installed in the electrical interface area of the 14-slot Metro front electrical shelf
(example also shows E1 cables connected)


Step Action
Note: Figure 1-108 on page 1-203 also shows E1 cables installed. You will
install E1 cables in Procedure 1-15, “Routing electrical I/O and Category 5e
cables into the electrical interface area of the 6500 14-slot shelf”.
Removing the filter
70
CAUTION
Remove the filter before removing and inserting E1 I/O
modules to avoid damaging the filter.
Press the clips on both sides of the filter and slide the filter out. Store the filter
in a safe place, you will re-install it in step 85.
If Then go to
you want to install the E1 I/O modules step 72
you want to install a DS3/E3/EC-1 I/O panel or a 48x10/ step 75
100BT I/O panel
you have installed all the required equipment step 85 to re-install
the filter
Installing the E1 I/O modules in the 14-slot Metro front electrical shelf
72 Hold the E1 I/O module by the handle and insert it at an angle inside the
electrical interface area to clear the bottom of the fiber channel.
73 Slide the module in along the guide rails, and carefully engage it into the
connector. Press the handle until the module engages into the backplane.
74 Tighten the two Phillips screws that secure the module. Torque to 0.7 Nm
(6 lb-in.).


Step Action
Installing a DS3/E3/EC-1 I/O panel or a 48x10/100BT I/O panel in the 14-slot Metro front electrical shelf
75 In the electrical interface area, a metal cover protects the middle section of
the backplane, where you will install the panel. Unfasten the thumbscrews
that secure the cover.
76 Remove the cover.
77 Remove the panel from its packaging.
79
CAUTION
Hold the panel with two hands and insert it into the opening of the electrical
interface area at the bottom of the 14-slot Metro front electrical shelf.
80 Position the panel vertically so that the coarse guide pin bushing in the middle
of the panel engages the coarse middle guide pin.
81 Push the panel toward the backplane to engage the fine guide pins.
82
CAUTION
carefully slide the panel horizontally into the shelf until you engage the panel
into the backplane connector.
backplane. Do not push the bottom of the panel when you press the bar down.
1 N-m (9 lb-in.). For an example of a Front I/O panel, see Figure 1-109 on
page 1-206.
Re-installing the filter
85 Hold the filter such that the arrows on the outside edges of the filter that
86 Slide the filter back into the shelf. Press the filter all the way in. Then go to
step 3.
—end—

Figure 1-109
Example of Front I/O panel (Multi-Service) and 12xSFP I/O carriers installed in the electrical
interface area of the 14-slot optical/front electrical shelf

Procedure 1-15
Routing electrical I/O and Category 5e cables into the
electrical interface area of the 6500 14-slot shelf
Use this procedure to route electrical I/O and Category 5e (Cat 5e) cables into
the electrical interface area (area where installation of electrical hardware is
supported). For details, see the section on the electrical interface area in the
This procedure does not apply to the 14-slot optical, converged optical or
For cable routing to circuit pack faceplates, see Procedure 1-16, “Routing
fiber-optic cables and electrical cables to circuit packs in the 6500 shelf”.


Routing electrical I/O and Category 5e cables into the electrical interface area of the 6500 14-slot
shelf
See the following illustrations for examples of the respective cable routing in
this procedure.
6500 shelf type
Shelf Optical/front Optical/rear 14-slot 14-slot 14-slot 14-slot

electrical electrical converged converged optical Metro
Optical/front Optical/rear front
electrical electrical electrical
Cable E1 Applicable Not Applicable Not applicable Not Applicable

type (Figure 1-110 applicable applicable
on page
1-209)
DS-3 Applicable Applicable Applicable Applicable Not Applicable

(Figure 1-111 (Figure applicable
on page 1-112 on
1-210) page 1-211)
Cat 5e Applicable Applicable Applicable Applicable Not Applicable

(Figure 1-113 applicable
on page
1-212 and
Figure 1-114
on page
1-213)
STM-1e Applicable Not Applicable Not applicable Not Not

applicable applicable applicable


shelf
Figure 1-110
Installing E1 I/O cables (front E1 I/O panel)


shelf
Figure 1-111
Installing DS3 I/O cables (front DS3/E3/EC-1 I/O panels)


shelf
Figure 1-112
Installing DS-3 I/O cables (rear DS3/E3/EC-1 I/O module)


shelf
Figure 1-113
Installing Cat 5e cables in the 14-slot optical/front electrical shelf


shelf
Figure 1-114
Cat 5e cables routed from two optical/front electrical shelves (example shows side view of an ETSI
rack)


shelf
Prerequisites
Make sure you have the following:
• a torque flathead screwdriver (to secure cable headshells in place)
• a mini-BNC insertion/removal tool (A00554187) to connect DS-3 cables
• STM-1e cables are single-ended. If required, you must cut the cables at
the required length and connectorize them with the connectors ordered
plans, which include the cable routing information for your configuration
charges

If you are installing multiple shelves and you are routing cables overhead, start
routing the cables from the bottom shelf up. If you are routing cables through
the floor, start from the top shelf down.
If you are routing cables for multiple I/O modules or panels, start with the
innermost module or panel and continue towards the side of the rack. For
each vertical pair of I/O modules, start by routing the cables from the bottom
module.
Make sure that at the front of the shelf the cables allow the shelf front cover to
close.
CAUTION
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage electrostatic-
equipment.


shelf
Step Action
1 Locate the required shelf.

cord to the ESD jack on another shelf installed in a grounded rack/cabinet or
clip to a suitable ground point.
If the shelf front cover is Then
installed on the area of the remove the shelf front cover
shelf you must access
not installed go to step 4


shelf
Step Action

If you Then
are routing E1 I/O cables to the 14-slot optical/front electrical go to step 5
or 14-slot converged optical/front electrical shelf
are routing DS-3 I/O cables to the 14-slot optical/front go to step 12
are routing Cat 5e cables to the 14-slot optical/front go to step 17
are routing STM-1e cables to the 14-slot optical/front go to step 19
are routing DS-3 I/O cables to the 14-slot optical/rear go to step 21
electrical or 14-slot converged optical/rear electrical shelf
are routing Cat 5e cables to the 14-slot optical/rear electrical go to step 26
or 14-slot converged optical/rear electrical shelf
are routing E1 I/O cables to the 14-slot Metro front electrical go to step 29
shelf
are routing DS-3 I/O cables or Cat 5e cables to the 14-slot go to step 32
Metro front electrical shelf
have routed all the electrical I/O cables and Cat 5e cables you have
as applicable to your application completed the
procedure
Routing E1 I/O cables to the 14-slot optical/front electrical or 14-slot converged optical/front
electrical shelf
5 Route the cable along the side of the rack and through the side cutout into the
electrical interface area of the shelf (see Figure 1-110 on page 1-209). If the
E1 I/O panel to which you are connecting is on the right hand side, route the
cable on the right hand side. If on the left, route on the left.
6 Check the type of cable you are installing.
If you are using Then go to
120-ohm cables step 7
75-ohm cables step 9
7 Make sure that you have installed the required 120-ohm converter module
(see “Installing electrical I/O hardware and I/O panels in the 6500 14-slot
8 Unfasten and remove the protective cover to expose the connectors on the
converter module.


shelf
Step Action
9 Align the cable headshell on the pins and push firmly into the required
connector on the I/O panel or the 120-ohm converter module, as required.
10 Tighten the two fixing pins to secure the headshell in place. Torque to 5 lb-in.
11 Repeat step 5 to step 10 for all remaining E1 I/O cables that you must route
to the 14-slot optical/front electrical shelf. Then go to step 4.
Routing DS-3 I/O cables to the 14-slot optical/front electrical or 14-slot converged optical/front
electrical shelf
12 Route the DS-3 cables along the side of the rack and through the side cutout
into the electrical interface area of the shelf (see Figure 1-111 on page
1-210).
If you are connecting the cables to panel Then route and connect the
slots cables to the
1-2 and 3-4 left of the shelf
9-10 and 11-12 right of the shelf
14 Group and tie Rx cables together. Route the cables along the equipment rack
uprights and secure them to the rack.
15 Group and tie Tx cables together. Route the cables along the equipment rack
16 Repeat step 12 to step 15 for all remaining DS-3 I/O cables you must route
to the 14-slot optical/front electrical shelf. Then go to step 4.
Routing Cat 5e cables to the 14-slot optical/front electrical shelf
electrical interface area of the shelf (see Figure 1-113 on page 1-212). If the
48x10/100BT I/O panel to which you are connecting is on the right hand side,
route the cable on the right hand side. If on the left, route on the left.
18 Repeat step 17 for all remaining Cat 5e cables you must route to the 14-slot
optical/front electrical or 14-slot converged optical/front electrical shelf. Then
go to step 4.
Routing STM-1e cables to the 14-slot optical/front electrical or 14-slot converged optical/front
electrical shelf
electrical interface area of the shelf. If the 32xSTM-1e I/O panel to which you
are connecting is on the right hand side, route the cable on the right hand
side. If on the left, route on the left.


shelf
Step Action
20 Repeat step 19 for all remaining STM-1e cables you must route to the 14-slot
optical/front electrical or 14-slot converged optical/front electrical shelf. Then
go to step 4.
Routing DS-3 I/O cables to the 14-slot optical/rear electrical or 14-slot converged optical/rear
electrical shelf
21 Route the DS-3 cables along the side of the rack, inside the rack (see Figure
1-112 on page 1-211).
If you are connecting the cables Then as you are facing the rear of the
to panel slots shelf, route and connect the cable to the
1-2 and 3-4 right-hand side
9-10 and 11-12 left-hand side
23 Group and tie Rx cables together. Route the cables along the equipment rack
24 Group and tie Tx cables together. Route the cables along the equipment rack
25 Repeat step 21 to step 24 for all remaining DS-3 I/O cables you must route
to the 14-slot optical/rear electrical shelf. Then go to step 4.
Routing Cat 5e cables to the 14-slot optical/rear electrical or 14-slot converged optical/rear
electrical shelf
26 Route the Cat 5e cables along the side of the rack, inside the rack.
If you are connecting the cables Then as you are facing the rear of the
to panel slots shelf, route and connect the cable to the
1-2 and 3-4 right-hand side
9-10 and 11-12 left-hand side
28 Repeat step 26 and step 27 for all remaining Cat 5e cables that you must
route to the 14-slot optical/rear electrical shelf. Then go to step 4.
Routing E1 I/O cables to the 14-slot Metro front electrical shelf
29 Start with the cable corresponding to the innermost module in the bottom row,
then the innermost module in the top row, and continue towards the side of
the equipment rack. For each vertical pair of I/O modules, start by routing the
cables from the bottom module.


shelf
Step Action
30 Route the cable through the cutout under the card cage area into the
electrical interface area of the shelf. If the E1 I/O module to which you are
connecting is on the right hand side, route the cable on the right hand side. If
on the left, route on the left.
31 Repeat step 29 and step 30 for all remaining E1 cables you must route to the
6500 shelf. Then go to step 4.
Routing DS-3 I/O cables and Cat 5e cables to the 14-slot Metro front electrical shelf
32 Route the cables through the cutout under the card cage area into the
electrical interface area of the shelf. Then go to step 4.
—end—

Procedure 1-16
Routing fiber-optic cables and electrical cables to
circuit packs in the 6500 shelf
For DAC cables, see “Installation guidelines for QSFP28-QSFP28 DAC cable”
on page 1-238.
Use this procedure to route

• MPO cables for colorless-directionless-contentionless (CDC) applications
• Active Optical Cables (AOC) between circuit packs on the shelf
ATTENTION
Each Active Optical Cable (AOC) has a QSFP28 plug at each end and is
used to interconnect two QSFP28 ports. AOCs are an alternative to using
two optical QSFP28 transceivers and an optical patch cord. Use AOCs as
indicated in the engineering documentation package (EDP) or international
documentation package (IDP) or equivalent site/network engineering plan.
• fiber-optic cables onto the 14-slot optical, 14-slot packet-optical shelf and
between paired NGM WT circuit packs on the shelf
In order to prevent congestion in the shelf fiber manager and minimize
interference between fiber patchcords and a shelf front cover, you must
consider the recommendations detailed in the operational considerations
section in 323-1851-151, Planning - Ordering Information, if any of the
following apply:
— using fiber patchcords with a boot length greater than 42.5 mm (not
recommended, but using an extended depth cover solution will provide
additional space in front of the circuit packs)
— using in-line optical attenuators (fixed pads) (not recommended, but
using an extended depth cover solution will provide additional space in
front of the circuit packs)
— using a circuit pack (such as eMOTR 4xXFP/8xSFP+/32xSFP or PKT
I/F GE 48xSFP) that has more than 32 optical connections/slot (16
duplex ports/slot) (using bend insensitive optical patchcords with
1.6 mm diameter is recommended)
— using fiber patchcords with a 2.0 mm diameter when more than 192
fibers are required per side in a 14-slot shelf (using bend insensitive
optical patchcords with 1.6 mm diameter is recommended when fiber
manager congestion is a concern)


Routing fiber-optic cables and electrical cables to circuit packs in the 6500 shelf
Note that the Optical Time Domain Reflectometer requires at least 20 km

of optical fiber to verify the fiber for reflection or loss. An OTDR trace run
on short fiber may fail due to loss or reflection. The Optical Time Domain
Reflectometer applies to the following circuit packs:
— Single line Raman Amplifier (SRA C-Band) w/Optical Service Channel
(OSC) 1xSFP 10/100 BT WSC circuit pack (NTK552JA)
— Enhanced Service Access Module (ESAM C-Band) w/Optical Service
Channel (OSC) 1xSFP 10/100 BT WSC circuit pack (NTK552JT)
CAUTION
Connect only a fiber spool (with at least 20 km of fiber) to Port 8
of the SRA circuit pack. Never directly connect any other
equipment to Port 8, for example, any type of eVOA or fixed
attenuation pads.
• STM-1e coaxial and RJ-45 cables onto the 14-slot optical, 14-slot optical/
front electrical, 14-slot converged optical/front electrical, and 14-slot Metro
front electrical shelves
For valid slot assignments, see Planning - Ordering Information,
323-1851-151.
• RJ-45 cables to the following circuit packs if there is an intention to use
Wayside traffic on the circuit pack now or in the future:
— 2xOSC circuit pack (NTK554BAE5)
— Single line Raman Amplifier (SRA C-Band) w/Optical Service Channel
(OSC) 1xSFP 10/100 BT WSC circuit pack (NTK552JA)
— Service Access module (SAM C-Band) w/Optical Service Channel
(OSC) 1xSFP 10/100 BT WSC circuit pack (NTK552JN)
— Enhanced Service Access Module (ESAM C-Band) w/Optical Service
Channel (OSC) 1xSFP 10/100 BT WSC circuit pack (NTK552JT)
that are equipped in the following shelves:
— 14-slot converged optical shelf (NTK503ADE5)
— 14-slot converged optical/front electrical shelf (NTK503BDE5)
— 14-slot converged optical/rear electrical shelf (NTK503CDE5)
— 14-slot packet-optical shelf (NTK503SA)


Although 2xOSC, SRA, SAM, or ESAM circuit packs can be equipped in

slots 1 to 14 of a 14-slot shelf, it is recommended to use slots 1 and/or 14
of the 14-slot shelf if there is an intention to use Wayside traffic on the
circuit pack now or in the future.
Channels for electrical cable management within the fiber manager
associated with slots 1 and 14 of the following shelves:
— 14-slot packet-optical shelf (NTK503SA)
— 14-slot converged optical shelf (NTK503ADE5)
— converged optical/front electrical shelf (NTK503BDE5)
— converged optical/rear electrical shelf (NTK503CDE5)
allow for routing of two RJ-45 Category 5 Ethernet cables to each of those
slots. These channels are separated from the fiber routing area and can
be used to connect to the two Wayside Ethernet ports found on the 2xOSC
circuit pack or one Wayside Ethernet port found on the SRA, SAM, or
ESAM circuit pack. The Wayside Ethernet ports are intended for
intrabuilding use only.

• “Example of fiber routing for a 14-slot shelf” on page 1-223
• “Example of fiber routing for stand-alone NGM WT circuit packs and 10G
OTR circuit packs in a 14-slot shelf” on page 1-224
• “Example of fiber and RJ-45 cable routing for 2xOSC circuit pack in a 14-
slot shelf” on page 1-225
Some figures show power cables and communication cables as well as fiber-
optic cables. Before routing fiber-optic cables, connect power cables to the
power input cards and communication cables to the access panel. For certain
shelves, the fiber-optic cables overlap with power cables and/or
communication cables. For such shelves, a right side view of the shelf is also
provided to show the placement of each type of cable.


Figure 1-115
Example of fiber routing for a 14-slot shelf


Figure 1-116
Example of fiber routing for stand-alone NGM WT circuit packs and 10G OTR circuit packs in a
14-slot shelf


For an example of fiber routing and RJ-45 cable routing for a 2xOSC circuit
pack on the 14-slot shelf, see the following illustration.
Figure 1-117
Example of fiber and RJ-45 cable routing for 2xOSC circuit pack in a 14-slot shelf
If applicable to your configuration, see “Guidelines for cable routing to

electrical SFP and optical ports on the same shelf” on page 1-233. For more
information, see the respective sections on special considerations when
using:
• 10/100/1000-BaseT RJ45 SFP (NTTP61CA), in Data and Layer 2 Circuit
Packs, 323-1851-102.7
• GE electrical 1000-BaseT SFP (NTTP61AAE6), in OTN I/F, PKT I/F and
PKT/OTN I/F Circuit Packs, 323-1851-102.8


Prerequisites
• STM-1e cables are single-ended. If required, you must cut the cables at
the required length and connectorize them with the connectors ordered.
• Make sure that you have
— curly locks or hook and loop cable ties (such as VELCRO) to bundle
the fibers
— the engineering documentation package (EDP), installation
plans
charges
Precautions
CAUTION
Risk of fiber-optic cable damage
The minimum bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 1.5 in.
(3.8 cm). Observe this limit at all times to avoid low fiber-optic
cable performance or damage.
CAUTION
packs.
Step Action



Step Action

If the shelf front cover is Then
installed on the card cage remove the shelf front cover from the card
cage
not installed on the card cage go to step 4
4 Flip down the fiber manager door (if applicable).

If you are Then
routing fibers at a regenerator go to step 6
site
routing fibers for a FOTR/ go to step 7
MOTR application
routing fibers at a terminal go to step 8
site
routing RJ-45 cable to a prepare to route the RJ-45 cable by first
2xOSC, SRA, SAM, or ESAM reading the general instructions in step 8.
circuit pack Then continue to step 9 and step 10 and
follow the routing instructions based on the
recommended slot and shelf.
Note: For an overview of the recommended
slots for these specific circuit packs, see the
introductory section of this procedure.
routing MPO cables for CDC go to step 12
applications
6 For regenerator applications, deploy back-to-back connections on paired

NGM WT and 10G OTR circuit packs as follows:
• Route the fiber-optic cables as described in step 8.
• Route and store the excess fiber cable between the paired NGM WT and
10G OTR circuit packs in an external fiber manager (or other fiber slack
management system).
For details related to routing in a fiber manager, see the following
procedures:
— “Installing a fiber manager equipment drawer” on page 2-27
— “Guidelines for routing fiber-optic cables in the NT0H57BB fiber
manager” on page 2-56
— “Guidelines for routing fiber-optic cables in the 1U Bulk Fiber
Management Tray 174-0094-900” on page 2-61


Step Action
7 For multiplexing optical transponder (MOTR) applications, connect the pair of

circuit packs in the application as follows:
• Route the fiber-optic cables as described in step 8.
• Route and store the excess fiber cable between the pair of circuit packs
in an external fiber manager (or other fiber slack management system).
For details related to routing in a fiber manager, see the following
procedures:
— “Installing a fiber manager equipment drawer” on page 2-27
— “Guidelines for routing fiber-optic cables in the NT0H57BB fiber
manager” on page 2-56
— “Guidelines for routing fiber-optic cables in the 1U Bulk Fiber
Management Tray 174-0094-900” on page 2-61
8 Route the optical fibers or cables through the fiber channel.

• For the 2xOSC circuit pack in slot 1 or 14, route the cables from the first
routing channel and the fibers from the second routing channel.
See “Example of fiber and RJ-45 cable routing for 2xOSC circuit pack in
a 14-slot shelf” on page 1-225.
• Route optical fibers or cables that terminate on slots 1 to 7 of the 14-slot
shelf to the left side of the rack through the appropriate channel of the
fiber routing guide.
Route optical fibers or cables that terminate on slots 8 to 14 of the 14-slot
shelf to the right side of the rack through the appropriate channel of the
fiber routing guide.
— “Example of fiber routing for a 14-slot shelf” on page 1-223
— “Example of fiber routing for stand-alone NGM WT circuit packs and
10G OTR circuit packs in a 14-slot shelf” on page 1-224
— “Example of fiber and RJ-45 cable routing for 2xOSC circuit pack in
a 14-slot shelf” on page 1-225
Use external fiber management drawers to store excess fiber cable. Fiber
slack storage is not provided for fibers leaving the 6500 shelf.
If Then go to
you are routing an RJ-45 cable to a 2xOSC, SRA, SAM, or step 10
ESAM circuit pack
otherwise step 16


Step Action
10 If you are routing an RJ-45 cable to a 2xOSC, SRA, SAM, or ESAM circuit
pack and the RJ-45 cable cannot be routed towards the bottom of the circuit
pack and through the fiber channel, then routing the RJ-45 cable towards the
top of the circuit pack is possible with the following considerations: obstruction
of circuit-pack level faceplate LEDs, interference with other access panel
cables, and due to the required cable bend radius, interference with a
standard depth cover. (Using an extended depth cover provides additional
space in front of the circuit packs. For details on extended depth covers, see
Planning - Ordering Information, 323-1851-151.)
Route the RJ-45 cable to a 14-slot shelf equipped with a 2xOSC, SRA, SAM,
or ESAM circuit pack in slot 1 or slot 14 as shown in “Recommended cable
routing—2xOSC, SRA, SAM, or ESAM circuit packs in a 14-slot shelf—
example (slot 1 or 14)” on page 1-230.
It is not recommended to route the RJ-45 cable vertically up. The circuit pack
status LEDs can be obstructed. The RJ-45 cable cannot fit through the
horizontal egress apertures with a fully connected Access Panel. Also, the
RJ-45 cable would require a relatively tight bend, which is not recommended.
11 Use curly locks or hook and loop fasteners (such as VELCRO) to manage the
RJ-45 cable exiting the shelf. Then go to step 16.


Step Action
Figure 1-118
Recommended cable routing—2xOSC, SRA, SAM, or ESAM circuit packs in a 14-slot shelf—
example (slot 1 or 14)


Step Action
Routing MPO cables for CDC applications

12 When routing MPO cables, note the following:
• Fiber manager 174-0094-900 (1U Bulk Fiber Management Tray) is
required to store slack fiber between the FIM and the CCMD8x16 or the
WSS circuit packs. See “Guidelines for routing fiber-optic cables in the 1U
Bulk Fiber Management Tray 174-0094-900” on page 2-61.
• The following connector types are used on the equipment:
— Connectors on the WSS/CCMD8x16/FIM faceplate are male.
— Connectors on the crossover cables used to interconnect the WSS/
CCMD8x16 circuit packs to the FIM are female.
• Use Female – Female crossover cable + Male – Female straight cable
(see “MPO cables and connector types” on page 1-232).
13 Route four MPO cables for each WSS:
• one cable from WSS circuit pack Switch A to FIM WSS port A
• one cable from WSS circuit pack Switch B to FIM WSS port B
• one cable from WSS circuit pack Switch C to FIM WSS port C
• one cable from WSS circuit pack Switch D to FIM WSS port D
14 If the number of degrees at the node is 4 or less, route one MPO cable for
each CCMD8x16:
• from CCMD8x16 port 33 to FIM Type 1 CMD port 1A-11A or FIM Type 2
CMD port 1A-20A
15 If the number of degrees at the node is greater than 4 or if the number of
degrees is 4 or less with plans to grow in the future, route three MPO cables
for each CCMD8x16:
• one cable from CCMD8x16 port 33 to FIM Type 1 CMD port 1A-11A or
FIM Type 2 CMD port 1A-20A
• one cable from CCMD8x16 port 34 to CMD port 35
• one cable from CCMD8x16 port 36 to FIM Type 1 CMD port 1B-11B or
FIM Type 2 CMD port 1B-20B


Step Action
Figure 1-119
MPO cables and connector types
WSS/CMD faceplate adaptor

Crossover cable
(male MPO connectors)
(female MPO connectors)
x x
12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112
x x
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112
Input Output
FIM faceplate adaptor

12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
(male MPO connectors) 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Input Output Input Output

Crossover cable
(female MPO connectors) WSS/CMD faceplate adapter
(male MPO connectors)
x x
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112
x x
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Input Output
16 Close the fiber manager door (if applicable).

17 If you have removed the shelf front cover to route optical fibers and cables,
re-install the shelf front cover.
—end—

Procedure 1-17
Guidelines for cable routing to electrical SFP and
optical ports on the same shelf
Use the examples in the following illustrations as a guide when routing cables
to electrical SFP (eSFP) and optical ports on the same shelf:
• “Port locations on circuit packs” on page 1-234
• “Cable routing example for eMOTR Edge 4xXFP/2xSFP+/8xSFP
(NTK536BE)” on page 1-235
• “Cable routing example for PKT I/F GE 48xSFP circuit pack (NTK642AA)”
on page 1-236
• “Cable routing example for eMOTR 4xXFP/8xSFP+/32xSFP (NTK536FA)”
on page 1-237
For more information, refer to the following sections in the respective technical
publication:
• “Special considerations when using 10/100/1000-BaseT RJ45 SFP
(NTTP61CA)”, in Data and Layer 2 Circuit Packs, 323-1851-102.7
• “Special considerations when using GE electrical 1000-BaseT SFP
(NTTP61AAE6)”, in OTN I/F, PKT I/F and PKT/OTN I/F Circuit Packs,
323-1851-102.8


Guidelines for cable routing to electrical SFP and optical ports on the same shelf
Figure 1-120
Port locations on circuit packs


Figure 1-121
Cable routing example for eMOTR Edge 4xXFP/2xSFP+/8xSFP (NTK536BE)
Route
4 CAT5 cables
at the back of the
fiber manager
for slot 2.
Route This reduces
4 CAT5 cables capacity for the
through top fiber trough
this location from 102 1.6-mm
of the fibers to 54.
fiber manager


Figure 1-122
Cable routing example for PKT I/F GE 48xSFP circuit pack (NTK642AA)
Route all
4 CAT5 cables
through this location
on the fiber manager.
This does not impact
the fiber manager
capacity.


Figure 1-123
Cable routing example for eMOTR 4xXFP/8xSFP+/32xSFP (NTK536FA)
Route all 4 CAT5 cables Route line fiber in front

through this location of the CAT5 cable.
on the fiber manager.
This does not impact
the fiber manager
capacity.
—end—

Procedure 1-18
Installation guidelines for QSFP28-QSFP28 DAC cable
For Active Optical Cable (AOC) routing, see the “Routing fiber-optic
cables and electrical cables to circuit packs in the 6500 shelf” on page 1-220
procedure.
The 6500 only supports DAC cables (160-9450-900, 160-9451-900,

160-9452-900) described in this document. Third-party DAC cables and other
Ciena branded DAC cables are not supported.
For technical specifications, see the section on QSFP+ and QSFP28

specifications in Pluggables Datasheets and Reference, 323-1851-180. For
additional planning considerations, see the Enhanced quad (4-channel) small
form-factor pluggable 28 modules (QSFP28) section in Planning - Ordering
Information, 323-1851-151.
For for more information on WLAi MOTR two-circuit pack Regen, three-circuit
pack Regen, or four-circuit pack Regen configurations, see the section on
100G WL3 (MOTR, OTR) and WLAi (MOTR, FOTR) circuit packs in
WaveLogic Ai, Flex, 100G+, 40G, OSIC ISS, and SLIC10 Circuit Packs,
323-1851-102.4.
Figure 1-124
QSFP28-QSFP28 1.5m Passive Direct Attach Copper (DAC) cable
Applications
QSFP28-QSFP28 1.5m Passive Direct Attach Copper (DAC) cable is
supported for the following applications:
• “Application 1—WLAi MOTR Client Regen (OTUCn client FEC ON,
100GE FEC ON)” on page 1-239


Note: Active Optical Cables (AOC) can be used instead of DAC cables for
the Regen applications described in this procedure (but are not limited to
these applications).
• “Application 2—200G (2x100G/5x40G) MUX OTU4 (FEC ON) to WLAi

MOTR OTU4 (FEC ON)” on page 1-240
Figure 1-125
Application 1—WLAi MOTR Client Regen (OTUCn client FEC ON, 100GE FEC
ON)


Figure 1-126
Application 2—200G (2x100G/5x40G) MUX OTU4 (FEC ON) to WLAi MOTR OTU4
(FEC ON)


Figure 1-127
Cable routing example using 1.5 m DAC cables


Figure 1-128
Cable routing example using 0.35 m DAC cables


Engineering rules
The following engineering rules apply:
• FEC must be ON on the ports interconnected with DAC cables in these
applications, For more information, see the section on QSFP+ and
QSFP28 specifications in Pluggables Datasheets and Reference,
323-1851-180.
• The circuit packs interconnected with this cable must be located in the
same half of the shelf.
Note: For a 14-slot shelf, a “shelf half” is slots 1 to 6, or slots 9 to 14.
• When using the 1.2 m or 1.5 m DAC cable, the circuit packs
interconnected with this cable can be, but do not have to be, located in
consecutive slots.
• When using a 0.35 m DAC cable, the circuit packs interconnected with this
cable must be in adjacent slots.
• Refer to equipping rules in WaveLogic Ai, Flex, 100G+, 40G, OSIC ISS,
and SLIC10 Circuit Packs, 323-1851-102.4 for rules relating to mating
WLAi MOTRs.
• For MOTR card regen three card groups, the 0.35 m cable can only be
used for the adjacent card interconnect.
• For MOTR card regen four card groups, the 0.35 m cable cannot be used.
The 1.2 m or 1.5 m cable must be used, as all connections are across
cards.
• When both fiber patchcords and DAC cables are installed in the same
section of the shelf fiber manager, ensure that the DAC cables are
installed prior to the fibers.
• Ensure that the DAC cable is aligned correctly prior to inserting the
QSFP28 plug end into the circuit pack.
• When inserting a circuit pack adjacent to a circuit pack with DAC cables,
ensure the DAC cable tabs do not get caught.
• For “Application 1—WLAi MOTR Client Regen (OTUCn client FEC ON,
100GE FEC ON)” on page 1-239, a maximum of eight cables can be used
in each half of a 14-slot shelf (Note).
• For “Application 2—200G (2x100G/5x40G) MUX OTU4 (FEC ON) to WLAi
MOTR OTU4 (FEC ON)” on page 1-240, a maximum of two cables can be
used in each half of a 14-slot shelf (Note).


• The DAC cable minimum static bend radius is 16 mm (internal).

• When appropriately routed, DAC cables will not interfere with the use of a
standard depth shelf cover/door. However, use of an extended depth cover
provides additional space in front of the circuit packs. For details on
extended depth covers, see Planning - Ordering Information,
323-1851-151.
• Existing and future fiber trough space should be evaluated before filling
fiber managers with copper cables, with more than the maximum number
of cables specified for the respective application.
• Cable space in fiber troughs and available space on the side of the shelf
(to manage the copper cables) must be assessed, because this is
dependent on circuit pack configuration, rack choice, and shelf setback.
Note: Whenever rack space permits, a cable slack management
accessory such as crossover channel can be used to dress excess 1.2 m
and 1.5 m DAC cables.
—end—

Procedure 1-19
Connecting or disconnecting fiber-optic cables
Use this procedure to connect or disconnect fiber-optic cables to or from
circuit packs or FIMs (including MPO cables).
Prerequisites
• Review the operational considerations section in the section on circuit
packs, modules, pluggable modules, and interface hardware, in
Planning - Ordering information, 323-1851-151.
• Have the engineering documentation package (EDP), installation
plans.
• Make sure you have the appropriate patchcords before connecting
fiber-optic cables.
• For circuit packs that use optical XFP, SFP, SFP+, SFP28, QSFP+,
QSFP28, CFP, CFP2, or DWDM pluggable optical (DPO) modules, make
sure that the modules are installed before you connect the fiber-optic
cables.
For circuit packs that use STM-1e SFP modules, make sure that the
STM-1e SFP modules are installed before connecting the STM-1e coaxial
cables.
For circuit packs that use CXM C-Band Type 1 modules, make sure that
the modules are installed before you connect the MPO cables.
See Procedure 1-10, “Installing and removing pluggable modules”.
• If you are using DPO modules Release 02 (that is, with spacing between
the Tx and the Rx LC connectors on the module), you must remove the
duplex clip from the duplex optical fiber patchcords (see Figure 1-129 on
page 1-246).


Figure 1-129
Duplex clip on optical fiber patchcords
Duplex clip
• Make sure you have the correct tool to disconnect the connector.
— Universal fiber tool (NTN458TC)
— LC fiber tool kit (174-0099-900).
Although optional, this tool assists in installing and removing LC fibers
or removing pluggables (SFP/SFP+/SFP28/QSFP+/QSFP28/XFP)
when space is restricted. When not in use, this tool can be stored in its
container.
• Make sure that you have the appropriate dust covers to protect unused
pluggable modules.
• If you are using fixed attenuators for the optical interfaces and the shelf is
equipped with a shelf front cover, do not add the attenuators on the optical
interface. Instead, add the required attenuators to the patch panel or
inside a fiber storage tray.
• For 6500 circuit packs such as SuperMux that the fiber connection is
coming out from faceplate at 90 degrees, use fibers with standard short
42.5 mm flexible boots, NTTC50++V6 Ciena supplied patchcords or
equivalent with Telcordia GR-326 compliant, short flexible LC boot. See
Figure 1-130 on page 1-247.
Do not install in-line plug attenuators at the 6500 circuit pack faceplate on
ports that are perpendicular to the faceplate (also not recommended on
angled ports).


• For 10G OTSC, 2x10G OTR, 10G OC-192/STM-64 WT, 10GEL WT, 10G
OTU2 WT, 8xOTN Flex MOTR, (1+8)xOTN Flex MOTR, SuperMux, 40G
MUX OCI (NTK525CFE5 variant) when in MOTR configuration with 40G
OCLD, or 10G eDCO in 1+1 TPT protection, operate a forced switch on
the inactive TPT line or client to force traffic on the active TPT and prevent
any switches before you connect or disconnect the optical fiber to the
client SFP.
Figure 1-130
6500 optical fiber boot length
Example of
incorrect boot length


Precautions
CAUTION
When inserted in a shelf slot, the optical interface circuit pack
emits laser light that can blind. Keep all optical connectors on
end of an optical fiber.
CAUTION
Risk of laser radiation exposure
Using the upgrade coupler/splitter module (UCS) and/or the
C/L-band mux/demux module (CLMD) in applications that
require using the isolator port of the respective module for wet
plant deployments of Submarine Line Terminal Equipment
(SLTE) will necessarily defeat the laser safety features of the
line-facing amplifiers for operational reasons. Users of the
equipment and service personnel must have appropriate laser
safety training for Hazard Level 3B.
For more information, see the section on observing product

and personnel safety guidelines in Installation - General
Information, 323-1851-201.0.
CAUTION
packs.
ATTENTION
Make sure that you follow the recommendations described in “Circuit packs
with 90-degree SFPs” on page 1-3 if you use the shelf front cover circuit
packs that have 90-degree SFPs.
Step Action



Step Action
2 Determine the required task.

connecting fiber-optic cables (non-MPO) step 3
disconnecting fiber-optic cables (non-MPO) step 12
connecting/disconnecting MPO cables step 17
For illustrations of the fiber tools, see:

• “Universal fiber tool (NTN458TC)”
• “LC fiber tool ((174-009-900)—two views”
Figure 1-131
Universal fiber tool (NTN458TC)
Figure 1-132
LC fiber tool ((174-009-900)—two views


Step Action
Connecting fiber-optic cables (non-MPO)

3 Inspect and clean the circuit pack internal connectors and the fiber. See the
section on cleaning connectors in Installation - General Information,
323-1851-201.0.
4 Inspect and clean connectors and adaptors on patchcords. See the section
on cleaning connectors in Installation - General Information, 323-1851-201.0.
Make sure that the two connectors to be mated are clean.
If Then go to
connecting fiber-optic cables to a circuit pack using the step 6
Universal fiber tool (NTN458TC)
connecting fiber-optic cables from a circuit pack using step 9
the LC fiber tool (174-009-900)
6 Connect the fiber-optic patchcord to the equipment port according to the EDP,
IDP, or equivalent site/network engineering plans.
For FIMs, see as applicable to your equipment:
• “CDA—FIM Type 4 connectors” on page 1-266
• “CDA—FIM Type 5 connectors” on page 1-266
• “Recommended port usage for 1x20 Colorless Directionless (CD) with
FIM4 configurations” on page 1-259
7 Repeat step 3 through step 6 for all ports on the equipment.
8 Make sure not to violate the fiber-optic cable minimum bend radius. Place any
slack fiber-optic cable in external fiber management drawers.
If you are connecting/disconnecting more fiber-optic cables, go to step 2 to
select the required task.


Step Action
Using the LC fiber tool (174-0099-900)

9 If you are using the LC fiber tool (Figure 1-132 on page 1-249), connect the
LC fiber-optic patchcord to the SFP/SFP+/SFP28/QSFP+/QSFP28/XFP
pluggable module as follows.
• Attach the cradle of the LC fiber tool to the boot of the LC fiber.
• Holding the LC fiber tool, slide the LC connector into the pluggable
module.
An audible click indicates that the LC connector is fully inserted.
• Carefully remove the LC fiber tool from the boot of the LC fiber.
10 Repeat step 9 as required.
11 Make sure not to violate the fiber-optic cable minimum bend radius. Place any
slack fiber-optic cable in external fiber management drawers.
Figure 1-133
Connecting fiber-optic cables using the LC fiber tool (174-0099-900)


Step Action
Disconnecting fiber-optic cables (non-MPO)

If Then go to
disconnecting fiber-optic cables from a circuit pack step 13
using the Universal fiber tool (NTN458TC)
disconnecting fiber-optic cables from a circuit pack step 15
using the LC fiber tool (174-009-900)
Using the Universal fiber tool (NTN458TC)

13 Disconnect the patchcord from the circuit pack using the Universal fiber
(Figure 1-131 on page 1-249) as follows:
• Position the Universal fiber tool on the fiber-optic cable so that the
fiber-optic cable is inside and parallel to the tool.
CAUTION
Risk of breaking the connector sleeve
Do not try to rotate the removal tool.
• Slide the Universal fiber tool toward the connector until it holds the plug
retainer.
• Slowly pull out the connector with the Universal fiber tool.
• Hold the Universal fiber tool in a fixed position and slide the connector
away from the Universal fiber tool.
14 Protect unused pluggable modules with the appropriate dust cover.


Step Action
Using the LC fiber tool

15 Disconnect the patchcord from the SFP/SFP+/SFP28/QSFP+/QSFP28/XFP
pluggable module using the LC fiber tool as follows.
• Hold the LC fiber tool with the hook end pointing up and press down on
the LC connector trigger.
An audible click indicates that the LC connector is ready to be
disengaged.
• With the hook end of the LC fiber tool pointing down, carefully disengage
the LC connector from the latch of the pluggable module.
• Grip the boot (of the LC fiber) between your thumb and index finger or use
the cradle end of the LC fiber tool to grip the boot.
Then remove the LC fiber from the pluggable module.
16 Protect unused pluggable modules with the appropriate dust cover.
If you are connecting/disconnecting more fiber-optic cables, go to step 2.


Step Action
Figure 1-134
Disconnecting fiber-optic cables using the LC fiber tool (174-0099-900)


Step Action
Preparing to connect MPO cables

17 To prepare to connect the MPO cables, use:
• the information in the EDP, IDP, or equivalent site/network engineering
plans
• the information in “Recommended port usage for 1x20 Colorless
Directionless (CD) with FIM4 configurations” on page 1-259, if applicable
to your equipment
• the following illustrations, as applicable to your equipment:
— “MPO cables and connector types” on page 1-232
— “CDC—MPO fiber numbering on WSS and CCMD connectors” on
page 1-260
— “CDC—Logical port mappings for CCMD8x16 ports connected to
FIM Type 1 ports” on page 1-261
— “CDC—Logical port mappings for WSS MPO ports connected to FIM
Type 1 WSS1 ports” on page 1-262
— “CDA—FIM Type 4 connectors” on page 1-266
18 Remove the dust caps or the loopback modules, as applicable, from the
equipment ports you are connecting.
Note: On FIM Type 1, dust caps are equipped on WSS1 ports only.
19 Put dust caps on all the loopback modules that you are removing. (The FIM
tray assembly includes a bag of dust caps that you can use for this purpose.)
Store the modules for future use, as applicable.


Step Action
Connecting MPO cables
CAUTION
Risk of affecting performance
Before connecting an MPO cable, you must inspect and
clean the MPO cable connectors after removing the
MPO cable from its original packaging or if the MPO
cable was removed from the faceplate for any reason.
Before connecting any equipment that uses MPO
connectors, always inspect and clean all the MPO
connectors involved in the connection.
20 Before connecting, clean the MPO cable connector and the MPO faceplate
connector. See the procedure on inspecting and cleaning MPO connectors in
21 Connect the MPO cables to the ports as specified in the EDP/IDP.
• The connectors have a key that indicates the correct aligning and mating
position. Make sure you are placing the key in the correct position.
• When connecting an MPO cable to the FIM, bend the flexible boot of the
MPO cable to allow the cable to route to the side of the FIM.
Use hook and loop fasteners (such as VELCRO) to bundle the MPO
cable fibers.
See the following precautionary message and illustration.


Step Action
CAUTION
Risk of damage to MPO cables
Before you close the FIM door, make sure you have
bent the flexible boots of the MPO cables. Otherwise,
you can pinch the optical fiber.
Figure 1-135
Bending the flexible boot of the MPO cable before closing the FIM door


Step Action
• An MPO patchcord is shipped with each CXM C-Band Type 1 module.

Connect the patchcord between the UPG CCMD port on the module and
the UPG CXM port on the host circuit pack.
If applicable to your equipment, see “Recommended port usage for 1x20
Colorless Directionless (CD) with FIM4 configurations” on page 1-259, in
conjunction with “CDA—FIM Type 4 connectors” on page 1-266.
Note: A single connector (MPO) is used for both Tx and Rx QSFP+
pluggable modules: 160-9503-900, 160-9504-900, and 160-9506-900. When
connecting MPO breakout cables to the 10G sub-ports on these modules,
make sure the arrangements are followed as specified in the datasheets for
these modules in Pluggables Datasheets and Reference, 323-1851-180.
CAUTION


Table 1-10
Recommended port usage for 1x20 Colorless Directionless (CD) with FIM4 configurations
With add/drops Without add/drops
FIM Type 4 For FIM connected to 1x20 WSS: • FIM ports 48 and 49 (LC) are used for
LC ports — FIM ports 38/39 (LC) are used for future future channel expansion.
channel expansion. • All the other 19 pairs of FIM fibers
For FIM connected to SMD 14x8: (LC) are used for full 20 degree
interconnection with FIMs.
• The following FIM ports (LC) are not used
(they are not connected physically to any
SMD port):
— 18 and 19
— 28 and 29
— 38 and 39
— 44 to 49
• Each FIM can connect up to 14 degrees as
add/drops.
FIM Type 4 For FIM connected to 1x20 WSS: • FIM passthrough fibers (MPO) are
MPO ports — FIM ports (MPO) that connect to WSS populated starting from the ones that
ports 5, 6, and 7 are used for correspond to 1x20 WSS port 5, and
interconnections between degrees. then to higher numbered ports (6, 7,
8).
— FIM ports (MPO) that connect to WSS
port 8 are used for add/drops and can
connect to selective 5 add/drop banks (any
5 out of the 15 add/drop banks).
1x20 WSS • 1x20 WSS ports 5, 6, and 7 (MPO) are used No additional recommendations.
MPO ports for degree interconnections.
• Passthrough interconnections are populated
starting from 1x20 WSS port 5 (MPO), then to
1x20 WSS ports 6 and 7.
• 1x20 WSS port 8 (MPO) is used for add/
drops and can support up to 5 selective add/
drop banks (any 5 out of the 15 add/drop
banks).
Note: The port usage detailed is recommended, however, other port usages are allowed. The flexibility
of fiber connections is everywhere that includes the locations between WSS and FIM, and FIM and FIM,
under the condition that provisioning is correct.


Step Action
22 Make sure all the MPO faceplate ports that are not connected are equipped
with dust caps as follows:
• FIM Type 1 WSS1 ports (CDC applications)
• CCMD8x16 ports (CDC applications)
• CXM ports (CDC applications)
• WSSOPM MPO ports (CDC applications and CDA applications)
• FIM Type 4, FIM Type 5, and FIM Type 6 ports connecting to WSS (CDA
applications)
23
CAUTION
Make sure all the other FIM Type 1 MPO ports (WSS2 to WSS8 and CMD
ports) and all the FIM Type 2 ports are equipped with MPO loopback
modules. Inspect and clean the MPO loopback modules before connecting.
24 Make sure all the FIM Type 1 UPG ports are equipped with LC loopback
modules. Inspect and clean the LC loopback modules before connecting.
Figure 1-136
CDC—MPO fiber numbering on WSS and CCMD connectors
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Input Output Input Output
WSS fiber mapping CCMD fiber mapping


Step Action
Figure 1-137
CDC—Logical port mappings for CCMD8x16 ports connected to FIM Type 1 ports
CCMD8x16
CCMD8x16 Fiber Connected
MPO logical port # DirecƟon switch port
physical port # posiƟon to
connected
1 NC NC
2 NC NC
3 WSS 4 4
OUT
4 WSS 3 3
5 WSS 2 2
6 WSS 1 1
33 1
7 WSS 1 1
8 WSS 2 2
9 WSS 3 3
IN
10 WSS 4 4
11 NC NC
12 NC NC
1 NC NC
2 NC NC
3 WSS 8 8
OUT
4 WSS 7 7
5 WSS 6 6
6 WSS 5 5
36 2
7 WSS 5 5
8 WSS 6 6
9 WSS 7 7
IN
10 WSS 8 8
11 NC NC
12 NC NC


Step Action
Figure 1-138
CDC—Logical port mappings for WSS MPO ports connected to FIM Type 1 WSS1 ports
Fiber WSS switch port Fiber WSS switch port

WSS physical port # MPO logical port # DirecƟon Connected to WSS physical port # MPO logical port # DirecƟon Connected to
posiƟon connected posiƟon connected
1 NC NC 1 NC NC
2 8 CMD 1 2 15 CMD 8
3 4 WSS 5 3 14 CMD 7
OUT OUT
4 3 WSS 4 4 13 CMD 6
5 2 WSS 3 5 12 CMD 5
6 1 WSS 2 6 11 CMD 4
5 1 7 3
7 1 WSS 2 7 11 CMD 4
8 2 WSS 3 8 12 CMD 5
9 3 WSS 4 9 13 CMD 6
IN IN
10 4 WSS 5 10 14 CMD 7
11 8 CMD 1 11 15 CMD 8
12 NC NC 12 NC NC
1 NC NC 1 NC NC
2 10 CMD 3 2 20 UPG 2
3 9 CMD 2 3 19 UPG 1
OUT OUT
4 7 WSS 8 4 18 CMD 11
5 6 WSS 7 5 17 CMD 10
6 5 WSS 6 6 16 CMD 9
6 2 8 4
7 5 WSS 6 7 16 CMD 9
8 6 WSS 7 8 17 CMD 10
9 7 WSS 8 9 18 CMD 11
IN IN
10 9 CMD 2 10 19 UPG 1
11 10 CMD 3 11 20 UPG 2
12 NC NC 12 NC NC
Figure 1-139

1 NC NC 1 NC NC
2 8 CMD 1 2 15 CMD 8
3 4 WSS 5 3 14 CMD 7
OUT OUT
4 3 WSS 4 4 13 CMD 6
5 2 WSS 3 5 12 CMD 5
6 1 WSS 1 6 11 CMD 4
5 1 7 3
7 1 WSS 1 7 11 CMD 4
8 2 WSS 3 8 12 CMD 5
9 3 WSS 4 9 13 CMD 6
IN IN
10 4 WSS 5 10 14 CMD 7
11 8 CMD 1 11 15 CMD 8
12 NC NC 12 NC NC
1 NC NC 1 NC NC
2 10 CMD 3 2 20 UPG 2
3 9 CMD 2 3 19 UPG 1
OUT OUT
4 7 WSS 8 4 18 CMD 11
5 6 WSS 7 5 17 CMD 10
6 5 WSS 6 6 16 CMD 9
6 2 8 4
7 5 WSS 6 7 16 CMD 9
8 6 WSS 7 8 17 CMD 10
9 7 WSS 8 9 18 CMD 11
IN IN
10 9 CMD 2 10 19 UPG 1
11 10 CMD 3 11 20 UPG 2
12 NC NC 12 NC NC


Step Action
Figure 1-140

1 NC NC 1 NC NC
2 8 CMD 1 2 15 CMD 8
3 4 WSS 5 3 14 CMD 7
OUT OUT
4 3 WSS 4 4 13 CMD 6
5 2 WSS 2 5 12 CMD 5
6 1 WSS 1 6 11 CMD 4
5 1 7 3
7 1 WSS 1 7 11 CMD 4
8 2 WSS 2 8 12 CMD 5
9 3 WSS 4 9 13 CMD 6
IN IN
10 4 WSS 5 10 14 CMD 7
11 8 CMD 1 11 15 CMD 8
12 NC NC 12 NC NC
1 NC NC 1 NC NC
2 10 CMD 3 2 20 UPG 2
3 9 CMD 2 3 19 UPG 1
OUT OUT
4 7 WSS 8 4 18 CMD 11
5 6 WSS 7 5 17 CMD 10
6 5 WSS 6 6 16 CMD 9
6 2 8 4
7 5 WSS 6 7 16 CMD 9
8 6 WSS 7 8 17 CMD 10
9 7 WSS 8 9 18 CMD 11
IN IN
10 9 CMD 2 10 19 UPG 1
11 10 CMD 3 11 20 UPG 2
12 NC NC 12 NC NC
Figure 1-141

1 NC NC 1 NC NC
2 8 CMD 1 2 15 CMD 8
3 4 WSS 5 3 14 CMD 7
OUT OUT
4 3 WSS 3 4 13 CMD 6
5 2 WSS 2 5 12 CMD 5
6 1 WSS 1 6 11 CMD 4
5 1 7 3
7 1 WSS 1 7 11 CMD 4
8 2 WSS 2 8 12 CMD 5
9 3 WSS 3 9 13 CMD 6
IN IN
10 4 WSS 5 10 14 CMD 7
11 8 CMD 1 11 15 CMD 8
12 NC NC 12 NC NC
1 NC NC 1 NC NC
2 10 CMD 3 2 20 UPG 2
3 9 CMD 2 3 19 UPG 1
OUT OUT
4 7 WSS 8 4 18 CMD 11
5 6 WSS 7 5 17 CMD 10
6 5 WSS 6 6 16 CMD 9
6 2 8 4
7 5 WSS 6 7 16 CMD 9
8 6 WSS 7 8 17 CMD 10
9 7 WSS 8 9 18 CMD 11
IN IN
10 9 CMD 2 10 19 UPG 1
11 10 CMD 3 11 20 UPG 2
12 NC NC 12 NC NC


Step Action
Figure 1-142

1 NC NC 1 NC NC
2 8 CMD 1 2 15 CMD 8
3 4 WSS 4 3 14 CMD 7
OUT OUT
4 3 WSS 3 4 13 CMD 6
5 2 WSS 2 5 12 CMD 5
6 1 WSS 1 6 11 CMD 4
5 1 7 3
7 1 WSS 1 7 11 CMD 4
8 2 WSS 2 8 12 CMD 5
9 3 WSS 3 9 13 CMD 6
IN IN
10 4 WSS 4 10 14 CMD 7
11 8 CMD 1 11 15 CMD 8
12 NC NC 12 NC NC
1 NC NC 1 NC NC
2 10 CMD 3 2 20 UPG 2
3 9 CMD 2 3 19 UPG 1
OUT OUT
4 7 WSS 8 4 18 CMD 11
5 6 WSS 7 5 17 CMD 10
6 5 WSS 6 6 16 CMD 9
6 2 8 4
7 5 WSS 6 7 16 CMD 9
8 6 WSS 7 8 17 CMD 10
9 7 WSS 8 9 18 CMD 11
IN IN
10 9 CMD 2 10 19 UPG 1
11 10 CMD 3 11 20 UPG 2
12 NC NC 12 NC NC
Figure 1-143

1 NC NC 1 NC NC
2 8 CMD 1 2 15 CMD 8
3 4 WSS 4 3 14 CMD 7
OUT OUT
4 3 WSS 3 4 13 CMD 6
5 2 WSS 2 5 12 CMD 5
6 1 WSS 1 6 11 CMD 4
5 1 7 3
7 1 WSS 1 7 11 CMD 4
8 2 WSS 2 8 12 CMD 5
9 3 WSS 3 9 13 CMD 6
IN IN
10 4 WSS 4 10 14 CMD 7
11 8 CMD 1 11 15 CMD 8
12 NC NC 12 NC NC
1 NC NC 1 NC NC
2 10 CMD 3 2 20 UPG 2
3 9 CMD 2 3 19 UPG 1
OUT OUT
4 7 WSS 8 4 18 CMD 11
5 6 WSS 7 5 17 CMD 10
6 5 WSS 5 6 16 CMD 9
6 2 8 4
7 5 WSS 5 7 16 CMD 9
8 6 WSS 7 8 17 CMD 10
9 7 WSS 8 9 18 CMD 11
IN IN
10 9 CMD 2 10 19 UPG 1
11 10 CMD 3 11 20 UPG 2
12 NC NC 12 NC NC


Step Action
Figure 1-144

1 NC NC 1 NC NC
2 8 CMD 1 2 15 CMD 8
3 4 WSS 4 3 14 CMD 7
OUT OUT
4 3 WSS 3 4 13 CMD 6
5 2 WSS 2 5 12 CMD 5
6 1 WSS 1 6 11 CMD 4
5 1 7 3
7 1 WSS 1 7 11 CMD 4
8 2 WSS 2 8 12 CMD 5
9 3 WSS 3 9 13 CMD 6
IN IN
10 4 WSS 4 10 14 CMD 7
11 8 CMD 1 11 15 CMD 8
12 NC NC 12 NC NC
1 NC NC 1 NC NC
2 10 CMD 3 2 20 UPG 2
3 9 CMD 2 3 19 UPG 1
OUT OUT
4 7 WSS 8 4 18 CMD 11
5 6 WSS 6 5 17 CMD 10
6 5 WSS 5 6 16 CMD 9
6 2 8 4
7 5 WSS 5 7 16 CMD 9
8 6 WSS 6 8 17 CMD 10
9 7 WSS 8 9 18 CMD 11
IN IN
10 9 CMD 2 10 19 UPG 1
11 10 CMD 3 11 20 UPG 2
12 NC NC 12 NC NC
Figure 1-145

1 NC NC 1 NC NC
2 8 CMD 1 2 15 CMD 8
3 4 WSS 4 3 14 CMD 7
OUT OUT
4 3 WSS 3 4 13 CMD 6
5 2 WSS 2 5 12 CMD 5
6 1 WSS 1 6 11 CMD 4
5 1 7 3
7 1 WSS 1 7 11 CMD 4
8 2 WSS 2 8 12 CMD 5
9 3 WSS 3 9 13 CMD 6
IN IN
10 4 WSS 4 10 14 CMD 7
11 8 CMD 1 11 15 CMD 8
12 NC NC 12 NC NC
1 NC NC 1 NC NC
2 10 CMD 3 2 20 UPG 2
3 9 CMD 2 3 19 UPG 1
OUT OUT
4 7 WSS 7 4 18 CMD 11
5 6 WSS 6 5 17 CMD 10
6 5 WSS 5 6 16 CMD 9
6 2 8 4
7 5 WSS 5 7 16 CMD 9
8 6 WSS 6 8 17 CMD 10
9 7 WSS 7 9 18 CMD 11
IN IN
10 9 CMD 2 10 19 UPG 1
11 10 CMD 3 11 20 UPG 2
12 NC NC 12 NC NC


Step Action
Figure 1-146
CDA—FIM Type 4 connectors
Figure 1-147


Step Action
Figure 1-148
Disconnecting MPO cables

25 Slide back the colored sleeve on the MPO cable connector and pull out the
cable.
—end—

Procedure 1-20
Installing a 6500 14-slot Shelf Front Cover Extension
Kit NTK509CY for use with Shelf Front Cover
NTK509CBE6
Use this procedure to install a 6500 14-slot Shelf Front Cover Extension Kit
NTK509CY to use to increase the depth of the Shelf Front Cover
NTK509CBE6.
Two versions of the 6500 14-slot Shelf Front Cover Extension Kit NTK509CY
are available:
• Version 1, which includes two brackets:
— one left extended bracket, and
— one right extended bracket
• Version 2, which includes three brackets:
— one left extended bracket, and
— two right extended brackets (one for the top and one for the bottom)
Install one version of kit NTY509CY.
In this procedure you also replace the light pipe on the shelf front cover.
For an overview, see the following illustrations:

• “Close-up of extension kit brackets (NTY509CY)—Version 1” on page
1-269
• “Close-up of extension kit brackets (NTY509CY)—Version 2” on page
1-269
• “Top and front views (with extension kit NTY509CY installed)”


Installing a 6500 14-slot Shelf Front Cover Extension Kit NTK509CY for use with Shelf Front Cover
NTK509CBE6
Figure 1-149
Close-up of extension kit brackets (NTY509CY)—Version 1
Figure 1-150
Close-up of extension kit brackets (NTY509CY)—Version 2
Version 2 with 3 brackets.
1 left extended bracket

and
2 right extended brackets
(1 for the top and
1 for the bottom)
Install one version of

Extension Kit NTY509CY.
410-5358-001 410-5357-001


NTK509CBE6
Figure 1-151
Top and front views (with extension kit NTY509CY installed)
Top view
Front view


NTK509CBE6
Prerequisites
Make sure that you
• determine whether it is necessary to remove the power card (step 4 and
step 9) by discussing the issue with the required subject matter experts
• have the following:
— one of the 14-slot Shelf Front Cover Extension Kit (NTK509CY):
– the kit that includes two brackets: one left extended bracket and
one right extended bracket
or
– the kit that includes three brackets: one left extended bracket and
two right extended brackets (one for the top right and one for the
bottom right)
— M6 KEPS nuts and a 10 mm open-end wrench
— hook and loop fasteners (such as VELCRO)
plans
charges
Precaution
CAUTION
packs.
Step Action



NTK509CBE6
Step Action

If you are using the extension kit that includes Then go to
two brackets: one left bracket and one right bracket step 4
three brackets: one left bracket and two right brackets step 5
Taking shelf out of service—applicable only to shelves equipped with 60A power input cards
4 Place the 14-slot shelf out of service.
CAUTION
Make sure that you handle the cables and fibers
carefully during this procedure.
Make sure that you protect the cables and fibers on both sides of the 14-slot
shelf, as required, while you attach the extension kit brackets to the mounting
brackets.
Use hook and loop fasteners (such as VELCRO) to contain the cables and
fibers temporarily, as required.
Removing the shelf front cover
5
DANGER
Risk of personal injury or equipment damage
Do not let go of the 14-slot shelf front cover when you
open it. The shelf front cover is not permanently
attached to the shelf and you must remove the shelf
front cover completely. If you let go of the shelf front
cover when you open it, you can cause personal injury,
damage to the equipment, or both.
Retract the spring-loaded pins at the top of the shelf front cover (on both
sides) while at the same time pulling the left and right end of the shelf front
cover just enough to disengage the pins from the shelf holes.
6 Pull the shelf front cover outwards approximately 45 degrees. Holding the
shelf front cover from both sides, slide the shelf front cover to the right side
slightly to disengage the retention hook from the shelf.
7 Set the shelf front cover aside in a safe place. You will re-install it later in this
procedure (step 24).


NTK509CBE6
Step Action

Removing 60A power cards

9 If applicable, remove the 60A power input cards. Refer to the procedure on
replacing the power input card A or B in Fault Management - Module
Replacement, 323-1851-545.
Unpacking 14-slot shelf front cover extension kit
10 Unpack the 14-slot front shelf front cover extension kit (NTK509CY) and
inspect the condition of the parts.


NTK509CBE6
Step Action
Attaching left extended bracket to shelf

11 Remove the M6 KEPS nuts, from the mounting brackets (that are already
attached to the left side of the shelf). See Figure 1-152.
Figure 1-152
Left side—removing KEPS nuts
Remove KEPS nuts


NTK509CBE6
Step Action
12 Using the M6 KEPS that you removed in step 11, attach the left extended
bracket over the shelf studs of the shelf.
Spare mounting screws are included in the kit.
See Figure 1-153.
Figure 1-153
Attaching left extended bracket
Shelf studs
13 Tighten all nuts plus a 1/4 turn.

Preparing to install the right extended bracket(s) to shelf


NTK509CBE6
Step Action
Attaching right extended bracket to shelf—kit with one right extended bracket
15 Remove the two M6 KEPS nuts from the right side of the shelf. See the
following illustration.
Figure 1-154
Removing KEPS nuts—right side (to prepare to install right extended bracket)
KEPS nuts


NTK509CBE6
Step Action
16 Using the M6 KEPS nuts that you removed in step 15, attach the right
extended bracket to the shelf.
Spare mounting nuts are included in the kit.
Figure 1-155
Attaching right extended bracket
One right extended

bracket


NTK509CBE6
Step Action

You have installed the right extended bracket (see Figure 1-156).
Figure 1-156
Right extended bracket installed
One right extended

bracket
For a view of both the left extended bracket and right extended bracket
installed, see the following illustration.


NTK509CBE6
Step Action
Figure 1-157
Left extended bracket and right extended bracket installed—view from left and from right
One left One right

extended bracket extended bracket
Removing hook and loop fasteners (such as VELCRO)—temporary cable and fiber
management—applicable only to shelves equipped with 60A power input cards
18 Remove the hook and loop fasteners (such as VELCRO) used to contain the
cables and fibers temporarily (in step 4), if applicable.
Replacing the light pipe on shelf front cover
19 Place the shelf front cover on a flat surface.


NTK509CBE6
Step Action
20 Remove the two screws, the light pipe, and two nuts from the shelf front cover.
• “Replacing the light pipe with 420-1837-001—removing parts (for
NTK509CBE6 Shelf Front Cover)”
• “Replacing the light pipe with 420-1837-00—installing new parts (for
NTK509CBE6 Shelf Front Cover)” on page 1-281
Do not remove the two springs. You need them for the new light pipe.
Figure 1-158
Replacing the light pipe with 420-1837-001—removing parts (for NTK509CBE6 Shelf Front Cover)


NTK509CBE6
Step Action
Figure 1-159
Replacing the light pipe with 420-1837-00—installing new parts (for NTK509CBE6 Shelf Front
Cover)
21 Place the new light pipe (420-1837-001) over the springs.

22 Press down on the light pipe to compress the springs, and while holding
down, re-install the two screws.


NTK509CBE6
Step Action
Re-installing 60A power input cards

23 Re-install the 60A power input cards that you removed in step 9.
Re-installing shelf front cover onto left and right extended brackets (on shelf)
24 Re-install the shelf front cover onto the extension kit.
The following illustration shows the 14-slot Shelf Front Cover Extension Kit,
Version 1 (NTK509CY) and the shelf front cover installed.
Figure 1-160
14-slot Shelf Front Cover Extension Kit (NTY509CY) and shelf front cover installed—Version 1 kit
(view from right)
Placing shelf back in service

25 Place the 14-slot shelf back in service (IS).
Attaching two right extended brackets (top and bottom) to shelf—kit with two right extended
brackets
26 “Overview—extension kit with two right extended brackets (top and bottom)”
on page 1-283 shows an unequipped shelf, for information only. Make sure
that you follow the instructions on installing the two right extended brackets,
starting with step 27.
Note: You must place the bottom 60A power input card out of service before
you install the right extended bottom bracket.


NTK509CBE6
Step Action
Figure 1-161
Overview—extension kit with two right extended brackets (top and bottom)


NTK509CBE6
Step Action
Right extended top bracket (top 60A power input card—in service)
27 Remove the KEPS nut (see “Removing KEPS nut from right bracket”).
Figure 1-162
Removing KEPS nut from right bracket
28 Install the right extended top bracket over the shelf stud (see “Installing and
attaching right extended top bracket”).
29 Using the KEPS nut, attach the right extended top bracket to the shelf.
Figure 1-163
Installing and attaching right extended top bracket


NTK509CBE6
Step Action
30 Install the flat washer and SEMS screw from the inside of the shelf into the
PEM nut on the right extended top bracket (see “Installing flat washer and
SEMS screw—view from inside right of the shelf”).
Figure 1-164
Installing flat washer and SEMS screw—view from inside right of the shelf


NTK509CBE6
Step Action
Right extended bottom bracket (60A power input card—out of service)

31 Place the 60A power input card out of service and partially disengage it from
the backplane until you can access the bottom KEPS nuts (see “Partially
disengaging bottom 60A power input card”).
Figure 1-165
Partially disengaging bottom 60A power input card
32 Remove the KEPS nuts (see “Removing KEPS nuts”).

Figure 1-166
Removing KEPS nuts


NTK509CBE6
Step Action
33 Install the right extended bottom bracket over the shelf stud (see “Right
extended bottom bracket installed”).
Figure 1-167
Right extended bottom bracket installed
34 Re-install and fasten the KEPS nuts (see “Right extended bottom bracket
secured into place”).
Figure 1-168
Right extended bottom bracket secured into place


NTK509CBE6
Step Action
35 Engage the 60A power input card into the backplane and place it back into
service (see “60A power input card engaged and in service”).
Figure 1-169
60A power input card engaged and in service
The following illustration shows the right extended top and bottom brackets
installed.
Figure 1-170
Right extended top and bottom brackets installed


NTK509CBE6
Step Action

37 Remove the two screws, the light pipe, and two nuts from the shelf front cover.


NTK509CBE6
Step Action
Figure 1-171
Replacing the light pipe with 420-1837-001—removing parts (for NTK509CBE6 Shelf Front Cover)


NTK509CBE6
Step Action
Figure 1-172
Replacing the light pipe with 420-1837-00—installing new parts (for NTK509CBE6 Shelf Front
Cover)


NTK509CBE6
Step Action
Re-installing shelf front cover onto left extended bracket and right extended top and bottom
brackets (on shelf)
40 Install the shelf front cover by hooking to the bottom bracket hinge pins, pivot
the shelf front cover closed and engage the plungers into the side holes on
the right and left extended shelf brackets (see “Shelf front cover installed—
view from left and right”).
Figure 1-173
Shelf front cover installed—view from left and right


NTK509CBE6
Step Action
The following illustration shows the 14-slot Shelf Front Cover Extension Kit,
Version 2 (NTK509CY) and the shelf front cover installed.
Figure 1-174
14-slot Shelf Front Cover Extension Kit (NTY509CY) and shelf front cover
installed—Version 2 kit (view from right)
—end—

Procedure 1-21
Installing or removing Shelf Front Cover NTK509CCE6
for 6500 14-slot converged optical shelf NTK503ADE5
Use this procedure to install or remove Shelf Front Cover NTK509CCE6 for
the 6500 14-slot converged optical shelf NTK503ADE5 (see “Shelf Front
Cover NTK509CCE6 for 6500 14-slot converged optical shelf NTK503ADE5”).
“Shelf Front Cover NTK509CCE6 on NTK503ADE5 shelf—various views” on
page 1-295 provides views of Shelf Front Cover NTK509CCE6 installed.
The shelf front cover can be locked with an external padlock for physical
security. Instructions are included in this procedure. Locking the shelf front
cover is optional.
For convenience, you can store

• the fuseholder pull tool (N0207221) inside the shelf front cover
• the LC fiber tool kit (174-009-900) inside the shelf front cover
The related instructions are included in this procedure.
Figure 1-175
Shelf Front Cover NTK509CCE6 for 6500 14-slot converged optical shelf NTK503ADE5


Installing or removing Shelf Front Cover NTK509CCE6 for 6500 14-slot converged optical shelf
NTK503ADE5
Figure 1-176
Shelf Front Cover NTK509CCE6 on NTK503ADE5 shelf—various views


NTK503ADE5
Prerequisites
Make sure that you
— Shelf Front Cover NTK509CCE6
— #2 Phillips screwdriver to fasten the ground cable
— a padlock to lock the shelf front cover (optional)
— a fuseholder pull tool (N0207221) (optional)
— an LC fiber tool kit (174-0099-900) (optional)
plans
charges
• rotated the locking tab outwards (Figure 1-189 on page 1-309) before you
install power cards.
For details, see the related procedure on connecting the power cables
(Table 1-2 on page 1-10).
Precautions
CAUTION
circuit packs.
Step Action



NTK503ADE5
Step Action
3
CAUTION
If the air deflector grill is present, remove it from the
shelf. The air deflector grill interferes with the left-
hinged variants of the 14-slot shelf covers/doors, for
example, NTK509CCE6.

If you want to Then go to
install the shelf front cover and ground cable step 5
store the fuseholder pull tool (optional) step 18
store the LC fiber tool kit (optional) step 21
lock the shelf front cover (optional) step 27
remove the ground cable and shelf front cover step 37


NTK503ADE5
Step Action
Installing left-side hinge bracket to left side of shelf

5 Remove all KEPS nuts from the left-side shelf mounting bracket (see the
following illustration).
Figure 1-177
Removing all KEPS nuts from left side shelf mounting bracket
M6 KEPS
(x6)
M5 KEPS
(x2)


NTK503ADE5
Step Action
6 Place the left-side hinge bracket (410-5164-001) over the studs on the left
side of the shelf (see “Installing left-side hinge bracket and ground cable”).
7 Secure the left-side hinge bracket into place using the KEPS nuts that you
removed in step 5.
8 Attach the ground cable (N0214964) to the ground point (adjacent the ground
symbol), with the ring lug facing vertically down (see “Installing left-side hinge
bracket and ground cable”).
Figure 1-178
Installing left-side hinge bracket and ground cable
Left-side hinge
bracket Ground cable
Left-side hinge bracket
(410-5164-001), attached to ground
installed over studs and
part of bracket point adjacent to
secured into place with KEPS
kit 500-0095-001 ground symbol
nuts


NTK503ADE5
Step Action
9 Route the ground cable horizontally around the front of the shelf wall (to
facilitate later ground cable attachment).
Installing top right-side latch receptacle to shelf
10 Remove the KEPS nut from the top right-side shelf mounting bracket (see the
Figure 1-179
Removing KEPS nuts from top right-side shelf mounting bracket


NTK503ADE5
Step Action
11 Place the top right-side shelf mounting bracket over the studs and secure into
place using the KEPS nut (see Figure 1-180).
Figure 1-180
Installing top right-side shelf mounting bracket


NTK503ADE5
Step Action
12 Fasten the top right-side shelf mounting bracket from inside the right wall of
the shelf using an M3 SEMS screw and flat washer (see Figure 1-181).
Figure 1-181
Fastening top right-side shelf mounting bracket from inside right wall of shelf
Installing bottom right-side latch receptacle to shelf

13 Remove the KEPS nuts from the bottom right-side shelf mounting bracket
(see the following illustration).
Figure 1-182
Removing KEPS nuts from bottom right-side shelf mounting bracket


NTK503ADE5
Step Action
14 Place the bottom right-side shelf mounting bracket over the studs and secure
into place with the KEPS nuts (see the following illustration).
Figure 1-183
Installing bottom right-side shelf mounting bracket


NTK503ADE5
Step Action
Installing shelf front cover

15 With the shelf front cover in the open position, align the hinge receptacles
over top of the hinge pins and lower into position to engage the hinge pins
(see Figure 1-184).
Figure 1-184
Installing shelf front cover on hinges


NTK503ADE5
Step Action
Attaching ground cable

16 Connect the ground cable to the tab connector on the inside of the shelf front
cover (see Figure 1-185).
Figure 1-185
Attaching ground cable to tab connector on rear of shelf front cover (left side of shelf)
For a view from the rear left with the shelf front cover closed, see Figure 1-186
on page 1-306.


NTK503ADE5
Step Action
Figure 1-186
Rear-left view with shelf front cover closed and ground cable attached

If you Then
want to store the fuseholder pull tool step 18
want to lock the shelf front cover step 27
close but not lock the shelf front cover close the shelf front cover and
close the latches to fasten the
shelf front cover into position.
You have completed this
procedure.


NTK503ADE5
Step Action
Storing the fuseholder pull tool (optional)

18 Place the fuseholder pull tool in the storage pocket on the bottom left (rear)
of the shelf front cover.
19 Remove the release liner from the mating disk.
20 Align the fuseholder pull tool inside the shelf front cover (see Figure 1-187),
with the loop-and-hook disk side towards the shelf front cover and press into
place.
Go to step 17.
Figure 1-187
Fuseholder pull tool (N0207221)—recommended storage (in storage pocket of Shelf Front Cover
NTK509CCE6)


NTK503ADE5
Step Action
Storing the LC fiber tool kit (optional)

21 Open the tube to remove the contents of the LC fiber tool kit (LC fiber tool,
instruction label, hook and loop fasteners [such as VELCRO], beaded tie).
22 Apply the loop fastener self adhesive discs to the LC fiber tool.
23 Attach the hook fastener discs to the loop fastener discs.
24 Remove the release liner from the hook fastener discs.
25 Align the LC fiber tool to position and apply it to the shelf front cover.
Apply the LC fiber tool within approximately 75 mm (2.95 in.) from the outside
edge of the shelf front cover (the right edge as viewed from the front when the
shelf front cover is closed). See Figure 1-188.
26 Apply the instruction label on the inside of the shelf front cover, to the right of
the LC fiber tool. Do not cover any ventilation holes or other labels on the shelf
front cover.
Figure 1-188
Example of storage of LC fiber tool and instruction sheet inside a shelf front cover


NTK503ADE5
Step Action
Locking the shelf front cover (optional)

27 Make sure that you rotated the locking tab outwards before you install power
cards (see Figure 1-189).
For details, see the related procedure on connecting the power cables (Table
1-2 on page 1-10).
In Figure 1-189, the locking tab is positioned to protrude through the shelf
front cover when it is closed, and then ready to install the padlock.
Figure 1-189
Positioning the locking tab


NTK503ADE5
Step Action
28 Close the shelf front cover and close the latches to fasten the shelf front cover
into position (see Figure 1-190).
Figure 1-190
Shelf Front Cover NTK509CCE6 and latches closed
Adjusting latch receptacles, if required

If the latch receptacles Then go to
require adjusting for smooth shelf front cover closure and step 30
latch engagement
do not require adjusting (The shelf front cover closes step 36
smoothly and is ready for a padlock.)


NTK503ADE5
Step Action
30 Loosen the adjustment screw, two on each latch receptacle (see Figure
1-191).
31 Move the latch receptacles vertically and horizontally as required.
Figure 1-191
Loosening adjustment screws (2) on latch receptacle and adjusting as required
32 With the shelf front cover latches in the open position, close the shelf front
cover.
33 Hold a latch receptacle in place and open the shelf front cover.
34 Tighten the latch receptacle adjustment screws.
35 Repeat step 30 to step 34 to adjust the second latch receptacle.
Inserting a padlock
36 Insert the padlock through the locking tab and close the padlock.


NTK503ADE5
Step Action

Note: A minimum 1 inch (25.4 mm) clearance is required above the shelf
front cover to remove or lift it off the hinge pins.
37 Unlock and remove the padlock, if applicable.
38 Open the latches to unfasten the shelf front cover.
39 Open the shelf front cover a minimum of 40 degrees to lift the shelf front cover
up off the hinge pins.
40 Disconnect the ground cable from the tab connector on the inside of the shelf
front cover, on the left side.
41 Lift the shelf front cover off the hinges.
42 Handle the shelf front cover with care.
—end—

Procedure 1-22
for 6500 14-slot converged optical/rear electrical shelf
NTK503CDE5
Use this procedure to install or remove Shelf Front Cover NTK509CCE6 (see
“Shelf Front Cover NTK509CCE6 for 6500 14-slot converged optical/rear
electrical shelf NTK503CDE5”) for the 6500 14-slot converged optical/rear
electrical shelf NTK503CDE5.
The Shelf Front Cover NTK509CCE6 can be locked with an external padlock
for physical security. Instructions are included in this procedure. Locking the
shelf front cover is optional.

• the fuseholder pull tool (N0207221) inside the shelf front cover.
• the LC fiber tool kit (174-009-900) inside the shelf front cover.
Figure 1-192
Shelf Front Cover NTK509CCE6 for 6500 14-slot converged optical/rear electrical shelf
NTK503CDE5


Installing or removing Shelf Front Cover NTK509CCE6 for 6500 14-slot converged optical/rear
electrical shelf NTK503CDE5
Note: Shelf Front Cover NTK509CCE6 can be retrofitted onto existing

installed systems (hinge and latch brackets install over existing shelf
brackets). This kit can be used on the 14-slot converged optical
(NTK503ADE5) and converged optical/rear electrical (NTK503CDE5)
shelves. See Procedure 1-21, “Installing or removing Shelf Front Cover
NTK509CCE6 for 6500 14-slot converged optical shelf NTK503ADE5”.
Shelf Front Cover NTK509CCE6 can also be used with 14-slot
packet-optical shelf NTK503SA. See Procedure 1-23, “Installing or
removing Shelf Front Cover NTK509CCE6 for 6500 14-slot packet-optical
shelf NTK503SA”.
Prerequisites
Make sure that you
— the Shelf Front Cover NTK509CCE6
— a nut driver
— #2 Phillips screwdriver
plans
charges
• rotated the locking tab outwards (“14-slot shelf latch receptacles” on page
1-318) before you install power cards.
(“Installation procedures” on page 1-10).
Note: If you plan to lock the shelf front cover, rotate open the locking tab on
the right hand side of the shelf before installing the power cable. Some types
of power cables prevent this locking tab from being rotated in service.


Precautions
CAUTION
circuit packs.
Step Action

3
CAUTION



Step Action

5 If the shelf ground cable is installed, remove it (see “Ground location”).
Figure 1-193
Ground location
6 Remove all KEPS nuts from the left-side shelf mounting bracket.
side of the shelf.
removed in step 6.


Step Action
symbol), with the ring lug facing vertically down (see “Ground cable
installed”).
Figure 1-194
Ground cable installed


Step Action

11 Remove the KEPS nut from the top right-side shelf mounting bracket (see
“14-slot shelf latch receptacles”).
Figure 1-195
14-slot shelf latch receptacles
KEPS nut
Locking tab rotated
outwards, ready for
padlock, as applicable
Latch receptacle
(two places)
Locking tab rotated

outwards, ready for
padlock, as applicable


Step Action
place using the KEPS nut (see “Installing top right-side shelf mounting
bracket”).
Figure 1-196


Step Action
the shelf using an M3 SEMS screw and flat washer (see “Fastening top right-
side shelf mounting bracket from inside right wall of shelf”).
Figure 1-197

14 Remove the KEPS nuts from the bottom right-side shelf mounting bracket.
into place with the KEPS nuts.
over top of the hinge pins and lower into position to engage the hinge pins.


Step Action

17 Connect the ground cable to the tab connector on the inside left of the shelf
front cover (see “Ground cable connected to tab connector”).
Figure 1-198
Ground cable connected to tab connector


Step Action

If you Then
want to store the fuseholder pull tool go to step 19
want to lock the shelf front cover go to step 28
procedure.
Note: If you plan to lock the shelf front cover, rotate open the locking tab on
the right hand side of the shelf before installing the power cable. Some types
of power cables prevent this locking tab from being rotated in service.
21 Align the fuseholder pull tool inside the shelf front cover with the
loop-and-hook disk side towards the shelf front cover and press into place
(see “Fuseholder pull tool (N0207221)—recommended storage (in storage
pocket of Shelf Front Cover NTK509CCE6)”).
Go to step 18.
Figure 1-199
Fuseholder pull tool (N0207221)—recommended storage (in storage pocket of
Shelf Front Cover NTK509CCE6)


Step Action

shelf front cover is closed). See “Example of storage of LC fiber tool and
instruction sheet inside a shelf front cover”.
the LC fiber tool.
Figure 1-200


Step Action

cards.
When the locking tab is positioned to protrude through the closed shelf front
cover, it is ready to install a padlock.
into position.
latch engagement
31 Loosen the adjustment screw, two on each latch receptacle (see “Loosening
adjustment screws (2) on latch receptacle and adjusting as required” on page
1-325).


Step Action
Figure 1-201
“V” notch
identifies
plunger latch
at normal
position
Adjustment
screws
Latch receptacle
Adjust latch
receptacle
vertically and
horizontally
as required
cover.
Inserting a padlock


Step Action
44 If the latch alignment is still not acceptable, loosen the adjustment screws for
both latch receptacles approximately 1/4 turn (4 screws in total).
The receptacles should now be able to move, both up and down and side to
side.
45 Close the shelf front cover. The taper on the latches will cause the latch to
move into position for optimal alignment. (Hand adjustment may be required.)
46 Open the shelf front cover and tighten all 4 adjustment screws.
The shelf front cover should now open and close freely.
—end—

Procedure 1-23
for 6500 14-slot packet-optical shelf NTK503SA
Use this procedure to install or remove Shelf Front Cover NTK509CCE6 (see
Figure 1-202) for the 6500 14-slot packet-optical shelf NTK503SA shelf.
cover is optional.

Figure 1-202
Shelf Front Cover NTK509CCE6 for 6500 14-slot packet-optical shelf NTK503SA
Brackets
Bracket not required
not required


Installing or removing Shelf Front Cover NTK509CCE6 for 6500 14-slot packet-optical shelf
NTK503SA
Prerequisites
Make sure that you
— Shelf Front Cover NTK509CCE6
plans
charges
• rotated the locking tab outwards (“Shelf Front Cover NTK509CCE6 and
latches closed” on page 1-336) before you install power cards.
Precautions
CAUTION
circuit packs.
Step Action



NTK503SA
Step Action
3
CAUTION

5 Attach the ground cable (N0214964) using a #2 Phillips screwdriver to the left
side of the shelf, below the ground symbol (see “Attaching the ground cable”
on page 1-330).


NTK503SA
Step Action
Figure 1-203
Attaching the ground cable
Ground point
(see “Installing shelf front cover on hinges” on page 1-331).


NTK503SA
Step Action
Figure 1-204


NTK503SA
Step Action
8 Connect the ground cable to the tab connector on the inside of the Shelf Font
Cover (left side of the shelf) (see Figure 1-205 and Figure 1-206).
Figure 1-205
Ground cable connected to tab connector on rear of shelf front cover (left side
of shelf)
Tab connector
Inside of shelf
front cover
Figure 1-206
Shelf front cover

closed
Ground cable
attached


NTK503SA
Step Action
9 Close the shelf front cover and close the latches to fasten into position.
If you Then
want to store the fuseholder pull tool go to step 11
want to lock the shelf front cover go to step 20
procedure.

13 Align the fuseholder pull tool inside the shelf front cover (see “Fuseholder pull
tool (N0207221)—recommended storage (in storage pocket of Shelf Front
Cover NTK509CCE6)”), with the loop-and-hook disk side towards the shelf
front cover and press into place.
Go to step 17.
Figure 1-207
Shelf Front Cover NTK509CCE6)


NTK503SA
Step Action

18 Align the LC fiber tool to position and apply to the shelf front cover.
the LC fiber tool.
Figure 1-208


NTK503SA
Step Action

cards (see “Positioning the locking tab”).
In “Shelf Front Cover NTK509CCE6 and latches closed” on page 1-336 the
locking tab is positioned to protrude through the shelf front cover when it is
closed, and then ready to install the padlock.
Figure 1-209
Latches Locking tab, shown rotated

open outwards (ready for padlock
to lock the shelf front cover)


NTK503SA
Step Action
into position (see “Shelf Front Cover NTK509CCE6 and latches closed”).
Figure 1-210
Latches closed
Locking tab
rotated outwards,
ready for padlock,
as applicable

—end—

Procedure 1-24
Installing a 6500 14-slot Shelf Front Cover Extension
Kit NTK509CZ for use with Shelf Front Cover
NTK509CCE6
Use this procedure to install a 14-slot Shelf Front Cover Extension Kit
NTK509CZ to use to increase the depth of the Shelf Front Cover
NTK509CCE6.
In this procedure you also replace the light pipe on the shelf front cover.
For an overview, see the following illustrations:

• “Extension kit NTK509CZ installed”
• “Views with measurements (top view and front view (NTK509CZ)” on page
1-338
• “Removing KEPS or SEMS, hinges and hinge bracket—left side (to
prepare to install NTK509CZ)” on page 1-339
Figure 1-211
Extension kit NTK509CZ installed


Installing a 6500 14-slot Shelf Front Cover Extension Kit NTK509CZ for use with Shelf Front Cover
NTK509CCE6
Figure 1-212
Views with measurements (top view and front view (NTK509CZ)
Top view
Front view


NTK509CCE6
Figure 1-213
Removing KEPS or SEMS, hinges and hinge bracket—left side (to prepare to install NTK509CZ)
Prerequisites
Make sure that you have the following tools and materials:
• a 14-slot Shelf Front Cover Extension Kit (NTK509CZ)
• M6 and M5 KEPS nuts, and a 10 mm open-end wrench
• hook and loop fasteners (such as VELCRO)
plans
charges


NTK509CCE6
Precaution
CAUTION
circuit packs.
Step Action

Removing shelf front cover
3 For additional details related to this subset of steps, see “Installing or
removing Shelf Front Cover NTK509CCE6 for 6500 14-slot converged
optical/rear electrical shelf NTK503CDE5” on page 1-313.
4 Lift the latches on the front of the shelf front cover.
5 Open the shelf door wide.
6 Remove the ground cable, which is attached to the shelf front cover.
8 Set the shelf front cover aside in a safe place. You will re-install the shelf front
cover later in this procedure (step 21).
Unpacking extension kit
9 Unpack the 14-slot Shelf Front Cover Extension Kit (NTK509CZ) and inspect
the condition of the parts.


NTK509CCE6
Step Action
Attaching extension kit brackets on left side of shelf

10 Remove the M5 and M6 KEPS nuts from the left side hinge bracket.
See “Removing KEPS or SEMS, hinges and hinge bracket—left side (to
prepare to install NTK509CZ)” on page 1-339 and “Removing KEPS or
SEMS, hinges and hinge bracket—left side (to prepare to install NTK509CZ)”.
Figure 1-214
Removing KEPS or SEMS, hinges and hinge bracket—left side (to prepare to
install NTK509CZ)
11 Remove the hinges from the hinge bracket that you removed in step 10. Then
re-install them on the left extension bracket using the SEMS screws.


NTK509CCE6
Step Action
12 Using the KEPS nuts, attach the left extension kit bracket to the left side of
the shelf.
See the following illustrations.
Figure 1-215
Installing extension bracket (NTK509CZ) and male hinges—left side


NTK509CCE6
Step Action
Figure 1-216
Extension bracket (NTK509CZ) and male hinges installed—left side


NTK509CCE6
Step Action
Figure 1-217
Extension bracket (NTK509CZ) and male hinges installed—left side


NTK509CCE6
Step Action
Figure 1-218
Close-up of extension kit brackets (NTK509CZ) —for left side and right side of shelf

Attaching extension kit brackets on right side of shelf
14 Remove the following from the right side of the shelf card assembly as shown
in “Removing KEPS nuts, receptacle brackets, screw and washer—right side
(to prepare to install NTK509CZ)” on page 1-346 and “Removing KEPS nuts,
receptacle brackets, screw and washer—right side (to prepare to install
NTK509CZ)” on page 1-347:
a. KEPS nut and receptacle bracket from the top of the mounting bracket
b. the screw and washer from the inside right wall
c. two KEPS nuts and receptacle bracket from the bottom of the mounting
bracket


NTK509CCE6
Step Action
Figure 1-219
Removing KEPS nuts, receptacle brackets, screw and washer—right side (to prepare to install
NTK509CZ)


NTK509CCE6
Step Action
Figure 1-220
Removing KEPS nuts, receptacle brackets, screw and washer—right side (to prepare to install
NTK509CZ)
15 Using the screw, the washer, and the M6 KEPS nuts, that you removed in step
14, attach the two right extension kit brackets to the right side of the shelf as
follows, as shown in “Attaching extension brackets (NTK509CZ)—right side”
on page 1-348:
a. attach the screw and washer through the inside right wall to the top
extension bracket
b. attach the two KEPS nuts to the bottom extension bracket
c. KEPS nut to the top extension bracket


NTK509CCE6
Step Action
Figure 1-221
Attaching extension brackets (NTK509CZ)—right side


NTK509CCE6
Step Action
16 Tighten all screws and nuts plus a 1/4 turn.

You have installed the extension kit brackets (see the following illustrations).
Figure 1-222
Extension kit (NTK509CZ) attached—right side


NTK509CCE6
Step Action
Figure 1-223
Extension kit (NTK509CZ) attached—right side

18 Remove two screws, the light pipe, and two nuts from the shelf front cover, as
shown in the applicable illustration.
NTK509CCE6 Shelf Front Cover)” on page 1-351
NTK509CCE6 Shelf Front Cover)” on page 1-352


NTK509CCE6
Step Action
Figure 1-224
Replacing the light pipe with 420-1837-001—removing parts (for NTK509CCE6 Shelf Front Cover)


NTK509CCE6
Step Action
Figure 1-225
Replacing the light pipe with 420-1837-001—installing new parts (for NTK509CCE6 Shelf Front
Cover)



NTK509CCE6
Step Action
Re-installing shelf front cover onto extension kit brackets

21 Re-install the shelf front cover and reconnect the ground cable onto the
extension kit brackets by following the applicable procedure:
• “Installing or removing Shelf Front Cover NTK509CCE6 for 6500 14-slot
converged optical/rear electrical shelf NTK503CDE5” on page 1-313, or
• for all other types of 14-slot shelves, see “Installation procedures” on
page 1-10.
You have completed installing the 14-slot Shelf Front Cover Extension Kit
NTK509CZ and re-installed the shelf front cover. Go to step 22.
Adjusting the hinge points
22 Ensure that the locking tab is flipped up during alignment process.
23 If the latch is striking below the receptacle, loosen both hinge nuts
approximately ¼ turn nuts (four nuts total).
24 Lift the door up and while holding the door, tighten the nuts.
25 If the latch is striking above the receptacle, reverse the effect by pulling down
on the door.
26 If the latch alignment is still not acceptable, loosen the adjustment screws for
both latch receptacles approximately ¼ turn (four screws total).
The receptacles should now be able to move, both up and down and side to
side.
27 Close the shelf door. The taper on the latches will cause the latch to move into
position for optimal alignment. (Hand adjustment may be required.)
28 Open the door and tighten all four adjustment screws.
The door should now open and close freely.
Reattaching ground cable
29 Re-attach the ground cable to the spade inside the shelf front cover.
—end—

Procedure 1-25
Installing or removing a 6500 14-slot Shelf Front Cover
Kit W/ Extended Depth NTK509CD for 6500 14-slot
converged shelf NTK503ADE5/NTK503CDE5
Use this procedure to install or remove a 6500 14-slot Shelf Front Cover Kit
W/Extended Depth NTK509CD and the 6500-14 Supplementary bracket kit
(500-0095-001), which provides increased shelf front cover depth for the 6500
14-slot converged shelf (NTK503ADE5 and NTK503CDE5 variants) (“6500
14-slot Shelf Front Cover Kit W/ Extended Depth (NTK509CD) + 6500-14
Supplementary bracket kit (500-0095-001)—for 6500 14-slot converged shelf
NTK503ADE5/NTK503CDE5” on page 1-355). “Top view and front view—
6500 14-slot Shelf Front Cover Kit W/ Extended Depth (NTK509CD)” on page
1-356 shows dimensions. “Shelf Front Cover Kit W/ Extended Depth
(NTK509CD)—various views with NTK503ADE5 shown” on page 1-357
provides views of the shelf front cover installed.
cover is optional.



Installing or removing a 6500 14-slot Shelf Front Cover Kit W/ Extended Depth NTK509CD for 6500
14-slot converged shelf NTK503ADE5/NTK503CDE5
Figure 1-226
6500 14-slot Shelf Front Cover Kit W/ Extended Depth (NTK509CD) + 6500-14 Supplementary
bracket kit (500-0095-001)—for 6500 14-slot converged shelf NTK503ADE5/NTK503CDE5
14-slot packet-optical Shelf Front Cover Kit W/ 6500 14 Supplementary bracket kit
Extended Depth (NTK509CD) (500-0095-001)


Figure 1-227
Top view and front view—6500 14-slot Shelf Front Cover Kit W/ Extended Depth (NTK509CD)
Top view
Front view


Figure 1-228
Shelf Front Cover Kit W/ Extended Depth (NTK509CD)—various views with NTK503ADE5 shown


Prerequisites
Make sure that you
— 14-slot packet-optical Shelf Front Cover Kit W/ Extended Depth
NTK509CD
— a 6500-14 Supplementary bracket kit (500-0095-001)
plans
charges
• rotated the locking tab outwards (“Positioning the locking tab” on page
1-372) before you install power cards.
ATTENTION
Latch receptacles are adjustable (“Loosening adjustment screws (2) on latch
receptacle and adjusting as required” on page 1-374), if required, to align the
shelf front cover latch plungers and facilitate smooth shelf front cover closure
and latch engagement.


Precautions
CAUTION
circuit packs.
Step Action

3
CAUTION
shelf. The air deflector grill interferes with the Shelf
Front Cover W/ Extended Depth NTK509CD.



Step Action

5 Remove all KEPS nuts from the left-side shelf mounting bracket (see
“Removing all KEPS nuts from left side shelf mounting bracket”).
Figure 1-229
Removing all KEPS nuts from left side shelf mounting bracket
M6 KEPS
(x6)
M5 KEPS
(x2)


Step Action
side of the shelf (see “Installing left-side hinge bracket and ground cable”).
removed in step 5.
symbol), with the ring lug facing vertically down (see “Installing left-side hinge
bracket and ground cable”).
Figure 1-230
Installing left-side hinge bracket and ground cable
Left-side hinge
bracket Ground cable
Left-side hinge bracket
(410-5164-001), attached to ground
installed over studs and
part of bracket point adjacent to
secured into place with KEPS
kit 500-0095-001 ground symbol
nuts


Step Action
10 Remove the KEPS nuts from the top right-side shelf mounting bracket (see
the following illustration).
Figure 1-231
Removing KEPS nuts from top right-side shelf mounting bracket


Step Action
place using the KEPS nut (see “Installing top right-side shelf mounting
bracket”).
Figure 1-232
Flat washer
(N0083497)
M3 SEMS screw
(N0038285)
Top right-side shelf

mounting bracket
(N0198470)
Top
right-side
shelf
mounting
bracket
(N0198470) Secured
placed over into place
studs with KEPS
nut


Step Action
the shelf using an M3 SEMS screw and flat washer (see the following
illustration).
Figure 1-233
M3 SEMS screw
(N0038285)
Flat washer
(N0083497)
Inside right wall

of shelf


Step Action

13 Remove the KEPS nuts from the bottom right-side shelf mounting bracket
Figure 1-234
Removing KEPS nuts from bottom right-side shelf mounting bracket
M6 KEPS
(x2)


Step Action
into place with the KEPS nuts (see the following illustration).
Figure 1-235
Installing bottom right-side shelf mounting bracket
M6 KEPS
(x2)
M6 KEPS
(x2)
Bottom right-side shelf
mounting bracket
(N0198471)
Bottom right-side shelf

mounting bracket (N0198471)
placed over studs Secured into place
with KEPS nuts


Step Action

Figure 1-236


Step Action

16 Connect the ground cable to the tab connector on the inside of the shelf front
cover (see “Attaching ground cable to tab connector on rear of shelf front
cover (left side of shelf)”).
For a view from the rear left with the shelf front cover closed, see “Rear-left
view with shelf front cover closed and ground cable attached” on page 1-369.
Figure 1-237
Attaching ground cable to tab connector on rear of shelf front cover (left side of shelf)
Tab connector


Step Action
Figure 1-238
Shelf front cover

closed Ground cable connected
Ground cable
attached

If you Then go to
close but not lock the shelf front cover close the shelf front cover
and close the latches to
fasten the shelf front cover
into position. You have
completed this procedure.


Step Action

18 Note the following information about the fuseholder pull tool.
The fuseholder pull tool includes loop-and-hook disks: one bonded to the rear
of the fuseholder pull tool and the mating disk attached to the front.
The mating disk has pressure-sensitive adhesive with a release liner in place.
20 Align the fuseholder pull tool inside the shelf front cover, with the
(see “Fuseholder pull tool (N0207221)—recommended storage (inside shelf
front cover)”).
Go to step 17.
Figure 1-239
Fuseholder pull tool (N0207221)—recommended storage (inside shelf front cover)
Mating disk
in place
Fuseholder pull tool
Fuseholder
pull tool,
inside the
shelf front
cover, pressed
into place (view
from inside View from outside shelf
shelf front front cover


Step Action

the LC fiber tool.
Figure 1-240


Step Action

In “Positioning the locking tab” the locking tab is positioned to protrude
through the shelf front cover when it is closed, and then ready to install the
padlock.
Figure 1-241


Step Action
into position (see “Shelf front cover and latches closed”).
Figure 1-242
Shelf front cover and latches closed
Locking tab
Latches rotated outwards,
closed ready for padlock,
as applicable

latch engagement


Step Action
adjustment screws (2) on latch receptacle and adjusting as required”).
Figure 1-243
“V” notch
identifies
plunger latch
at nominal
position
Adjustment
screws
Latch receptacle
Adjust latch
receptacle
vertically and
horizontally as
required
cover.
Inserting a padlock


Step Action

39 Open the shelf front cover a minimum of 40 degrees.
—end—

Procedure 1-26
Installing or removing on NTK503SA a 6500 14-slot
Shelf Front Cover Kit W/ Extended Depth NTK509CD
This procedure applies to new installations only for the 14-slot packet-optical
shelf (NTK503SA).
Use this procedure to install or remove a 6500 14-slot Shelf Front Cover Kit
W/ Extended Depth NTK509CD, which provides increased shelf cover depth
for the 6500 14-slot packet-optical shelf NTK503SA (“14-slot packet-optical
Shelf Front Cover Kit with Extended Depth (NTK509CD)”). “Top view and front
view—14-slot packet-optical Shelf Front Cover Kit with Extended Depth
(NTK509CD)” on page 1-377 shows dimensions. “Shelf Front Cover Kit with
Extended Depth (NTK509CD) on NTK503SA shelf—various views” on page
1-378 provides views of the shelf front cover installed.
cover is optional.
For convenience, you can store the fuseholder pull tool (N0207221) inside the
shelf front cover. The related instructions are included in this procedure.
Figure 1-244
14-slot packet-optical Shelf Front Cover Kit with Extended Depth (NTK509CD)


Installing or removing on NTK503SA a 6500 14-slot Shelf Front Cover Kit W/ Extended Depth
NTK509CD
Figure 1-245
Top view and front view—14-slot packet-optical Shelf Front Cover Kit with Extended Depth
(NTK509CD)
Top view
Front view


NTK509CD
Figure 1-246
Shelf Front Cover Kit with Extended Depth (NTK509CD) on NTK503SA shelf—various views


NTK509CD
Prerequisites
Make sure that you
— 14-slot packet-optical Shelf Front Cover Kit with Extended Depth
NTK509CD
If the male hinges are not attached to the NTK503SA shelf, also use
the #2 Phillips screwdriver to attach the male hinges to the shelf using
the M4 SEMS screws.
plans
charges
• rotated the locking tab outwards (“Positioning the locking tab” on page
1-388) before you install the upper power card (Feed A).
Precautions
CAUTION
circuit packs.
Step Action



NTK509CD
Step Action
3
CAUTION
Front Cover Kit W/Extended Depth NTK509CD.

install male hinges (if applicable) step 5
Note: Go to step 5 only if the
male hinges are not pre-
attached to the NTK503SA
shelf. Otherwise, go to step 6.
install the ground cable and shelf front step 6
cover
remove the ground cable and shelf front step 17
cover
Installing male hinges—only applicable if male hinges are not pre-attached to shelf
5 Use a #2 Phillips screwdriver to install the male hinges on the left side wall of
the shelf with the M4 SEMS mounting screws (supplied with the kit).
Two M4 SEMS mounting screws are required for each male hinge.
“Installing 14-slot packet-optical Shelf Front Cover Kit with Extended Depth
(NTK509CD)—left side” on page 1-381 shows a view from the left side of the
shelf with a close-up of the holes into which you install the male hinges.
“Installing 14-slot packet-optical Shelf Front Cover Kit with Extended Depth
(NTK509CD)—right side” on page 1-382 shows a view from the right of the
shelf.


NTK509CD
Step Action
Figure 1-247
Installing 14-slot packet-optical Shelf Front Cover Kit with Extended Depth (NTK509CD)—left side
The fan grill has been

removed. It is not required.
Shelf Front Cover NTK509CD

includes a fan grill.
Close-up of the holes into which males hinges

are installed
Install each male hinge on the left side wall of the

shelf with two M4 SEMS screws.


NTK509CD
Figure 1-248
Installing 14-slot packet-optical Shelf Front Cover Kit with Extended Depth (NTK509CD)—right
side


NTK509CD
Step Action
Installing the ground cable and shelf front cover

Note: The ground cable and fasteners are included in the NTK509CD Shelf
Front Cover Kit with Extended Depth.
6 Use a #2 Phillips screwdriver to attach ground cable N0214964 to the left side
of the shelf, below the ground symbol (see “Attaching the ground cable”).
7 Route the ground cable horizontally around the front of the shelf wall. This
arrangement facilitates the task of connecting the ground cable (in step 9).
Figure 1-249
Attaching the ground cable
Close-up of ground cable
NTK503SA shelf, view from left
Close-up of ground point

for the shelf front cover
ground cable


NTK509CD
Step Action
Figure 1-250
Installing shelf front cover onto the hinge pins


NTK509CD
Step Action
9 Attach the ground cable to the tab connector on the rear of the shelf front
cover, on the left side of the shelf. See the following illustrations.
Figure 1-251
Attaching the ground cable (shelf front cover open)—view from inside left
Shelf front
cover, open,
view from
inside
Tab
connector
Figure 1-252
Rear left view with shelf front cover closed and ground cable attached
Shelf front Ground

cover, cable
closed attached
Ground
cable Shelf Front
attached Cover, closed
View Close-up,
from left view from left


NTK509CD
Step Action

If you Then go to
do not want to lock the shelf front cover close the shelf front cover and
procedure.

11 Note the following information about the fuseholder pull tool.
The fuseholder pull tool includes loop-and-hook disks: one bonded to the rear
of the fuseholder pull tool and the mating disk attached to the front.
The mating disk has pressure-sensitive adhesive with a release liner in place.


NTK509CD
Step Action
13 Align the fuseholder pull tool inside the shelf front cover, with the
(see “Fuseholder pull tool (N0207221)—recommended storage (inside shelf
front cover)”).
Go to step 10.
Figure 1-253
Fuseholder pull tool (N0207221)—recommended storage (inside shelf front cover)
Fuseholder pull tool

Mating disk
in place
Fuseholder
pull tool,
inside the
shelf front
cover, pressed
into place (view
from inside
shelf front View from outside shelf
cover front cover


NTK509CD
Step Action

For details, see the related procedure on connecting the power cables (in
“Installation procedures” on page 1-10).
In “Positioning the locking tab”, the locking tab is positioned to protrude
padlock.
Figure 1-254
Locking tab,
shown rotated
outwards (ready to
use to lock the shelf
front cover)
Latches
open


NTK509CD
Step Action
into position (see “Shelf Front Cover NTK503SA and latches closed”).
Figure 1-255
Shelf Front Cover NTK503SA and latches closed
Locking tab
rotated outward,
ready for padlock,
Latches closed as applicable


NTK509CD
Step Action
—end—

Procedure 1-27
Installing or removing Shelf Front Cover NTK509DCE6
on 6500 14-slot converged optical/front electrical
shelf NTK503BDE5
Use this procedure to install or remove Shelf Front Cover NTK509DCE6 on
the 14-slot converged optical/rear electrical shelf NTK503BDE5.
Shelf Front Cover NTK509DCE6 is a left lift-off hinged door, which from the
open position can be lifted off the hinges if required (the ground cable must be
disconnected at the spade receptacle).
Note: Shelf Front Cover NTK509DCE6 can be retrofitted onto existing

installed systems (hinge and latch brackets installed over existing shelf
brackets). This kit can be used on the 14-slot converged optical/front
electrical NTK503BDE5 shelves.
For convenience, you can store the LC fiber tool kit (174-009-900) inside the
shelf front cover. The related instructions are included in this procedure.
Prerequisites
Make sure that you have
• the following tools and materials:
— Shelf Front Cover NTK509DCE6
— a nut driver
— a Phillips screwdriver
plans
charges
• rotated the locking tab outwards (“Shelf Front Cover NTK509CCE6 and
latches closed” on page 1-405) before you install power cards


Installing or removing Shelf Front Cover NTK509DCE6 on 6500 14-slot converged optical/front
electrical shelf NTK503BDE5
Precautions
CAUTION
circuit packs.
Step Action

3
CAUTION
Front Cover NTK509DCE6.



Step Action
Preparing to install Shelf Front Cover NTK509DCE6

5 For a view of Shelf Front Cover NTK509DCE6, see the following illustration.
Figure 1-256
Shelf Front Cover NTK509DCE6 on 14-slot shelf NTK503BDE5
Front exhaust grill
Latch
Branding
Right top latch
bracket
Left hinge bracket
System alarm lamp
Circuit pack status lens (Power, Critical,
window Major, Minor, ACO)
Inlet air grills ESD Caution logo

and NE ID label
location
Ground
cable and
hardware
Right bottom latch
Left hinge bracket bracket
Inlet air grill

Latch


Step Action
Installing left side hinge brackets to left side of shelf

6 Remove all KEPS nuts (top and bottom) from the left side shelf mounting
bracket (see the following illustration).
Figure 1-257
Removing KEPS nuts from left side shelf mounting bracket
M6 KEPS
(x2)
Top of shelf
M6 KEPS
(x2)
Bottom of shelf


Step Action
7 Place the left-side hinge bracket over the studs and fasten all M6 KEPS nuts
Figure 1-258
Installing left-side hinge bracket over studs and fastening M6 KEPS nuts
Top of shelf
Studs
KEPS nuts
Bottom of shelf
KEPS nuts
Studs
410-5165-001
(x2)


Step Action
Attaching ground cable to ground point (left side of shelf)

8 Attach ground cable N0214964 to the ground location adjacent to the ground
symbol with the ring lug facing vertically down (see “Attaching ground cable
to ground point”).
Figure 1-259
Attaching ground cable to ground point

10 Remove the KEPS nut from the top right shelf side mounting bracket (see
“Removing KEPS nut”).
Figure 1-260
Removing KEPS nut


Step Action
11 Place the top right-side latch receptacle over the stud and fasten the KEPS
nut (see “Installing top right-side latch receptacle”).
Figure 1-261
Installing top right-side latch receptacle
N0083497
Top right side
N0038285 latch receptacle
N0198470
Stud
KEPS
nut


Step Action
12 Fasten the top right-side latch receptacle from the inside right wall of the shelf
using M3 SEMS screws and a flat washer.
the shelf using an M3 SEMS screw and flat washer (see the following
illustration).
Figure 1-262
M3 SEMS screw
(N0038285)
Flat washer
(N0083497)
Inside right wall

of shelf
Installing bottom right side latch receptacle to shelf

14 Remove the KEPS nuts from the bottom right side shelf mounting bracket
Figure 1-263
Removing KEPS nuts from bottom right side shelf mounting bracket
M6 KEPS
nuts (x2)


Step Action
15 Place the bottom right side latch receptacle bracket over the studs and fasten
the KEPS nuts (see “Securing bottom right side latch receptacle bracket”).
Figure 1-264
Securing bottom right side latch receptacle bracket
N0198479
Studs
M6 KEPS
nuts (x2)


Step Action

over top the hinge pins and lower into position to engage the hinge pins (see
“Installing shelf front cover over top and bottom hinge pins”).
Figure 1-265
Installing shelf front cover over top and bottom hinge pins
Top
Hinge pins
Bottom


Step Action

17 Connect the ground cable to the tab connector on the rear of the shelf front
cover (left side), See the following illustration.
Figure 1-266
Ground cable connected to tab connector (view from rear of shelf front cover)
Tab connector
18 Close the shelf front cover and fasten by closing the top and bottom latches
(see “Ground cable connected, view from left side of shelf (shelf front cover
closed)”).
Figure 1-267
Ground cable connected, view from left side of shelf (shelf front cover closed)


Step Action

If you want to Then
store the fuseholder pull tool go to step 20
store the LC fiber tool kit go to step 21
lock the shelf front cover go to step 27
remove the shelf front cover go to step 37
close, but not lock the shelf front cover close the shelf front cover and
shelf front cover into position. You
have completed this procedure.

of the shelf front cover (see the following illustration).
Go to step 19.
Figure 1-268
shelf front cover)


Step Action

26 Install the instruction label on the inside of the shelf front cover, to the right of
the LC fiber tool.
Figure 1-269


Step Action

27 Make sure that you rotated the locking tabs outwards before you install power
In “Positioning the locking tab”, the locking tabs are positioned to protrude
padlock.
Figure 1-270
Latch open Top

(close-up
of open
latch)
Locking tabs,
shown rotated
outwards
(ready to use
to lock shelf
front cover)
Bottom
(close-up
of open
Latch open latch)


Step Action
into position (see “Shelf Front Cover NTK509CCE6 and latches closed”).
Figure 1-271
Latch closed
Locking tab
rotated outwards,
ready for padlock,
as applicable
Latch closed


Step Action

latch engagement
adjustment screws (2) on latch receptacle and adjusting as required”).
Figure 1-272
“V” notch
identifies
plunger latch
at normal
position
Adjustment
screws
Latch receptacle
Adjust latch
receptacle
vertically and
horizontally
as required
cover.


Step Action
Inserting a padlock
—end—

Procedure 1-28
Installing a 6500 14-slot Optical/Front Electrical Shelf
Cover Extension Kit NTK509CX for use with Shelf
Front Cover NTK509DCE6
Use this procedure to install a 6500 14-slot Optical/Front Electrical Shelf
Cover Extension Kit NTK509CX to use to increase the depth of the Shelf Front
Cover NTK509DCE6. The kit provides additional brackets that are bolted on
top of the existing bracket mounting points on the 6500 shelf.
In this procedure you also replace the light pipe on the shelf front cover with
the extended version.
See step 19 in “Installing or removing Shelf Front Cover NTK509DCE6 on

6500 14-slot converged optical/front electrical shelf NTK503BDE5” on page
1-391 for more information on the Shelf Front Cover NTK509DCE6, including
the following options:
• storing for convenience inside the shelf front cover the following tools:
– the fuseholder pull tool
– the LC fiber tool kit (174-009-900)
• locking the shelf front cover
Prerequisites
Make sure that:
• the mounting brackets have been attached to the shelf or that the shelf has
been installed in a frame
• you have the following tools and materials:
— the 14-slot Optical/Front Electrical Shelf Cover Extension Kit
(NTK509CX):
— Shelf Front Cover NTK509DCE6
— a nut driver
— a Phillips screwdriver
plans
charges


Installing a 6500 14-slot Optical/Front Electrical Shelf Cover Extension Kit NTK509CX for use with
Shelf Front Cover NTK509DCE6

Precautions
CAUTION
circuit packs.
Step Action

3
CAUTION
Front Cover NTK509DCE6.
4 Make sure that you have removed and discarded the air deflector grill from
the 14-slot converged optical/front electrical shelf. The air deflector grill
interferes with Shelf Front Cover NTK509DCE6.


Step Action
5 For an overview of NTK509CX kit installation, see the following illustration.

Figure 1-273
NTK509CX kit—installation overview
N0038285
M3 SEMS
N0083497
M3 flat washer
From NTK509CX kit
Hinge brackets
410-6600-001
From NTK509CX kit
Lock tab bracket
410-6601-001
From NTK509CX kit
M6 KEPS Nut
N0038249
3 places
Latch receptacle bracket

410-6602-001
From NTK509CX kit


Step Action
Installing left side hinge brackets to left side of shelf

6 Remove all KEPS nuts (top and bottom) from the left side shelf mounting
bracket (see “Removing KEPS nuts from left side shelf mounting bracket” on
page 1-394).
7 On the top left side and bottom left side of the shelf, place the hinge brackets
(“Hinge bracket 410-6600-001 (top left side and bottom left side of shelf)”)
over the studs and fasten all M6 KEPS nuts (“NTK509CX kit—installation
overview” on page 1-410).
Figure 1-274
Hinge bracket 410-6600-001 (top left side and bottom left side of shelf)
Attaching ground cable to ground point (left side of shelf)

8 Attach ground cable N0214964 to the ground location adjacent to the ground
symbol with the ring lug facing vertically down. (See “Attaching ground cable
to ground point” on page 1-396. Refer to the illustration for ground cable and
ground point details only. The hinge bracket in the illustration is not part of the
NTK509CX kit.)
Installing lock tab bracket (top right side of shelf)
10 Remove the KEPS nut from the top right shelf side mounting bracket (see
“Removing KEPS nut” on page 1-396).


Step Action
11 Place the lock tab (“Lock tab bracket 410-6601-001 (top right side of shelf)”)
over the top right-side stud and fasten the KEPS nut (“NTK509CX kit—
installation overview” on page 1-410).
Figure 1-275
Lock tab bracket 410-6601-001 (top right side of shelf)
12 Fasten the lock tab from the inside right wall of the shelf using M3 SEMS
screws and a flat washer (see detail in “NTK509CX kit—installation overview”
on page 1-410).
the shelf using an M3 SEMS screw and flat washer (see “Fastening top right-
side shelf mounting bracket from inside right wall of shelf” on page 1-398).
Installing latch receptacle bracket to shelf bottom right side
14 Remove the KEPS nuts from the bottom right side shelf mounting bracket
(see “Removing KEPS nuts from bottom right side shelf mounting bracket” on
page 1-398).


Step Action
15 Place the latch receptacle bracket (“Latch receptacle bracket 410-6602-001

(bottom right side of shelf)”) over the bottom right side studs and fasten the
KEPS nuts (“NTK509CX kit—installation overview” on page 1-410).
Figure 1-276
Latch receptacle bracket 410-6602-001 (bottom right side of shelf)



Step Action
17 Remove the two screws, the light pipe, and two nuts from the shelf front cover
(“Replacing the existing light pipe and installing the extended version”).
Figure 1-277
Replacing the existing light pipe and installing the extended version


Step Action
over top the hinge pins and lower into position to engage the hinge pins.
21 Connect the ground cable to the tab connector on the rear of the shelf front
cover (left side).
22 Close the shelf front cover and fasten by closing the top and bottom latches.
23 To perform the following tasks for the Shelf Front Cover NTK509DCE6, go to
step 19 on page 1-402 in “Installing or removing Shelf Front Cover
NTK509DCE6 on 6500 14-slot converged optical/front electrical shelf
NTK503BDE5”:
• store the fuseholder pull tool
• store the LC fiber tool kit
• lock the shelf front cover
• remove the shelf front cover
• close but not lock the shelf front cover
Note that in “Installing or removing Shelf Front Cover NTK509DCE6 on 6500

14-slot converged optical/front electrical shelf NTK503BDE5”, the hinge, lock
tab, and receptacle brackets in the illustrations are of a different type than the
NTK509CX kit.
—end—

Procedure 1-29
Connecting a terminal server, a terminal, or a modem
to the 6500 14-slot shelf
Use this procedure to connect a terminal server, a VT100 (or VT100
emulating) terminal, or a modem to the shelf. For cable and connector
specifications, see the section on cable and connector details in
Installation - General Information, 323-1851-201.0. Torque all fixing pins to
5 lb-in.
If you plan to use Site Manager for the maintenance activity and have a
terminal that has never been connected to a shelf processor (SP) running the
correct 6500 network element software load, make sure that the correct
version of Site Manager is installed on the terminal. Also make sure that you
have first connected the terminal to the SP (running the correct network
element software load) with an Ethernet cable.
This LAN connection is required briefly for the automatic transfer of necessary
nodal information files from the SP to the terminal. See Site Manager for 6500
Packet-Optical Platform Fundamentals, 323-1851-195, for information on Site
Manager installation requirements and procedures.
Note 1: For the 14-slot shelves, if you are using Site Manager connection
over a modem, use a RS-232 cable whose DTR and CD pins are not tied
together and the modem should be set up to reset the Carrier Detect (CD)
properly (from Modem properties). Set up the modem to control Carrier
Detect and DTR.
Note 2: The SP2 NTK555CAE5, NTK555EAE5, and NTK555FAE5 do not
have a DCE port. You can use the DTE port on the access panel of the
14-slot shelves.
only.


Connecting a terminal server, a terminal, or a modem to the 6500 14-slot shelf
Prerequisites
plans
charges
Precaution
CAUTION
circuit packs.
Step Action

3 Determine the device you want to connect to the shelf.
If the device is a Then go to
terminal server, or VT100 (or VT100 emulating) terminal step 4
modem step 8
Connecting a terminal to a 6500 14-slot shelf for temporary maintenance activity

4 Connect the data circuit-terminating equipment (DCE) end of the terminal
cable to the RS-232 connector on the shelf processor (see “Connecting a
terminal cable to the shelf processor” on page 1-418).


Step Action
Figure 1-278
Connecting a terminal cable to the shelf processor
5 Connect the data terminating equipment (DTE) end of the null terminal cable
to the terminal server or VT100 terminal (or VT100 terminal emulator).
6 At the terminal server or VT100 terminal (or VT100 terminal emulator), set the
terminal communications parameters to the following values:
Baud Rate = 9600
Bits/Parity = 8
Parity = No
Stop bits = 1
7 After you complete the temporary maintenance activity, disconnect the
terminal cable from the connector on the shelf processor.
Connecting a modem to a 6500 14-slot shelf
Programming the modem
8 Connect your modem to your personal computer (PC). Refer to your modem
documentation for instructions.
9 Power up your PC and modem.
10 Activate the terminal-emulation program on the PC.


Step Action
11 Configure the modem by using the terminal-emulation program on your PC.

See “Modem configuration” and your modem documentation.
Table 1-11
Modem configuration
Parameter Setting
Transfer rate 9600 bit/s
Auto-answer Yes
Flow control Bidirectional hardware (RTS/CTS)
Answer mode result code ON
12 Program the modem to save this configuration.

13 Disconnect the modem from the PC.
Connecting the modem to a 6500 14-slot shelf
14 Connect the DTE end of the modem cable to the DTE connector on the
access panel.
15 Connect the DCE end of the modem cable to the modem. The 6500 shelf can
now support a remote modem-based Site Manager session.
16 Connect a telephone line to the modem. See your modem documentation.
You have completed the terminal connection procedure.
Modifying the modem initialization sequence
17 Connect the server side modem (the one that will be connected to the 6500
DTE port) to serial port COM1 on your PC.
18 Open HyperTerminal and connect it to COM1.
19 Display a list of the modem settings by entering:
AT\S
A list of the modem settings is displayed. If the serial port flow setting is
enabled, one of the settings can read:
SERIAL FLOW BHW AT\Q3
20 Disable the serial port flow setting by entering:
AT\Q0
The modem responds with OK.


Step Action
21 Check that the setting has changed by entering:

AT\S.
The setting can now read:
SERIAL FLOW OFF AT\Q0
22 Save the settings by entering:
AT&W
All settings are kept when the modem is turned off.
23 Disconnect the modem from the PC and connect it to the 6500 DTE port.
24 Dial up to the modem and log in to the network element with Site Manager or
HyperTerminal.
—end—

2-1
Installing OMX, fiber manager, DSM,

passive equipment, and routing/
connecting related cables 2-
This section describes how to install the following hardware:

• OMX 4CH enhanced + fiber manager equipment drawer
• OMX 16CH DWDM equipment drawer
• fiber manager drawer
• DS1 service module (DSM) shelf (high-order and low-order) and its
NTN458RA breaker interface panel (BIP), which can power the DSM shelf
You can also use the 1U BIP (NTK599DA) or the 1U fuse interface panel
(FIP) (NTK599EA) to power the DSM shelf. See the procedure on
installing the 1U BIP or the 1U FIP in Installation - General Information,
323-1851-201.0.
• 2110 shelf
Note 1: The electrical interfaces described in this section are intended for
intra-building use only. All electrical I/O interfaces must be isolated from
external (outside) wiring through a channel bank, regenerator, repeater, or
protection equipment approved for that purpose.
Note 2: This section refers to the information in the engineering
documentation package (EDP), installation documentation package
(IDP), or equivalent site/network engineering plans. Ciena provides a
custom service that can provide this documentation (contact your Ciena
representative for details of this service). If not provided by Ciena, it is the
responsibility of the user to obtain the necessary information (for example,
from a OnePlanner design file).

2-2 Installing OMX, fiber manager, DSM, passive equipment, and routing/connecting related cables
For installation procedures for the following passive equipment

• 6-Slot Passive Photonics Chassis (PPC6)
refer to Installation - Passive Chassis (2150 & Photonics), Filters, and

Modules, 323-1851-201.5.
See the feature overview section in Part 1 of Planning, NTRN10ER, for

information regarding the possible bay configurations and the engineering
rules.
The 6500 supports high-order STS-managed connections on DS1TM when

provisioned along with high-order cross-connect circuit packs. The Site
Manager Path Connections application should be used to create, delete, edit,
and display the STS-managed connections on the HO-DSM equipment.
Note: The term DSM is used for LO-DSM and HO-DSM in this section
unless indicated otherwise.
Before you begin the procedures in this section, make sure that you have:
• determined your site prerequisites
• determined your equipment prerequisites
• available all required tools and materials
Refer to the section on preparing for installation in Installation - General
Information, 323-1851-201.0 for information on the above.
• you have read the section on observing product and personnel safety
guidelines in Installation - General Information, 323-1851-201.0
Precautions
CAUTION
Risk of shelf malfunction
Ciena recommends that you do not use cellular phones at any
6500 site. The use of cellular phones in proximity to 6500
equipment can cause shelf malfunction.
CAUTION
handling can cause damage to static sensitive components.

Installing OMX, fiber manager, DSM, passive equipment, and routing/connecting related cables 2-3
Abbreviations used in procedures

1U one rack unit (1.75 in.)
BIP breaker interface panel
DSM DS1 service module
DVM digital voltmeter
EDP engineering documentation package
EIA Electronics Industries Alliance
ESD electrostatic discharge
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
FIP fuse interface panel
IDP international documentation package
OMX optical multiplexer
Procedure list
Table 2-1 lists the procedures in this section.
Note: After you installed all shelves, the system is ready for system line-
up and testing (SLAT). Make sure the network element is powered down
before you proceed to SLAT. See Commissioning and Testing,
323-1851-221.
Table 2-1
Procedure Comment
“Installing and grounding equipment drawers” on page 2-6 Required if you are using
OMX equipment drawers
or DSCM drawers
(NT0H57LA)
“Installing a fiber manager equipment drawer” on page 2-27 Required if you are using
fiber manager
(NT0H57BB or
174-0094-900 [1U Bulk
Fiber Management Tray])
equipment drawers
“Installing a DSCM tray in a DSCM drawer (NT0H57LA)” on page 2-32 Required if you are using
DSCM trays

Table 2-1
Procedure Comment
“Connecting OMX 4CH equipment drawers to the 6500 shelves” on page Required if you are using
2-36 OMX 4CH equipment
drawers
“Connecting OMX 16CH DWDM equipment drawers to the 6500 shelves” Required if you are using
on page 2-41 OMX 16CH DWDM
equipment drawers
“Routing fiber-optic cables for the OMX 4CH equipment drawer” on page Required if you are using
2-47 OMX 4CH equipment
drawers
“Routing fiber-optic cables for the OMX 16CH DWDM equipment drawer” on Required if you are using
page 2-51 OMX 16CH DWDM
equipment drawers
“Guidelines for routing fiber-optic cables in the NT0H57BB fiber manager” Required if you are using
on page 2-56 fiber manager
(NT0H57BB) equipment
drawers
“Guidelines for routing fiber-optic cables in the 1U Bulk Fiber Management Required if you are using
Tray 174-0094-900” on page 2-61 1U Bulk Fiber
Management Tray
(174-0094-900)
equipment drawers
“Installing the NTN458RA DSM breaker interface panel” on page 2-72 Required if you are using
DS1 DSM shelves
“Installing the DS1 service module (DSM) shelf” on page 2-79 Required if you are using
DS1 DSM shelves
“Connecting power cables to the DSM shelf (DSM OAM hardware release Required if you are using
5.0 or earlier)” on page 2-87 DS1 DSM shelves
“Connecting power cables to the DSM shelf (DSM OAM hardware release Required if you are using
6 or later)” on page 2-95 DS1 DSM shelves
“Connecting alarm control and communication cables to the DS1 service Required if you are using
module” on page 2-106 DS1 DSM shelves
“Connecting DS1 cables to the DS1 service module” on page 2-115 Required if you are using
DS1 DSM shelves
“Routing DS1 cables to/from the DS1 service module” on page 2-118 Required if you are using
DS1 DSM shelves

Table 2-1
Procedure Comment
“Inserting or removing a DSM 84xDS1 termination module” on page 2-119 Required if you are using
DS1 DSM shelves
“Connecting the DS1 service module to the 6500 shelf” on page 2-126 Required if you are using
DS1 DSM shelves
“Installing and removing the DS1 service module front cover” on page 2-129 Perform as required or
when referred to from
another procedure
“Installing a 2110 shelf” on page 2-131 Perform as required or

another procedure
“Installing 2110-Tx-xxxx DCMs into the 2110 shelf” on page 2-135 Perform as required or
another procedure

Procedure 2-1
Installing and grounding equipment drawers
Use this procedure to install the following equipment drawers in the equipment
rack:
• OMX 4CH enhanced + fiber manager
• OMX 16CH DWDM
• two-channel TPT (TPT-2)
• four-channel TPT (TPT-4)
• 10-channel TPT (TPT-10)
Also use this procedure to install the DSCM drawer (NT0H57LA) (“DSCM
drawer (NT0H57LA)” on page 2-7), in which case follow the instructions that
apply to 1U drawers. The DSCM drawer (NT0H57LA) is shipped with brackets
already installed for mounting in a 19-inch equipment rack. The brackets can
be also used for 23-inch installations by removing them from the supplied
installation, rotating them 90 degrees and then reattaching them to the
drawer’s sides.
The OMX is a 1U (OMX 4CH) or 2U (OMX 16CH DWDM) external drawer that
contains optical filters, a small patch panel with bulkhead connectors, and
fiber management components. The drawers can be installed anywhere in the
rack. It is recommended that you install the drawers directly beneath a shelf.
The OMX drawers are shipped with one set of mounting brackets already
installed. The installed brackets are for front-mounting the drawer in a 19-inch
equipment rack. ETSI mounting brackets and 23-inch mounting brackets are
also shipped with these drawers.
The OMX equipment drawer can be front-mounted or mid-mounted.

• For front-mounting, attach the bracket at the front of the shelf, see
“Attaching brackets for front-mounting installation (example shows a 1U
drawer)” on page 2-7.
• For mid-mounting, attach the bracket using the second set of holes, see
“Attaching brackets for mid-mounting installation (example shows a 1U
drawer)” on page 2-8.


Figure 2-1
DSCM drawer (NT0H57LA)
Figure 2-2
Attaching brackets for front-mounting installation (example shows a 1U drawer)


Figure 2-3
Attaching brackets for mid-mounting installation (example shows a 1U drawer)
For OMX 16CH DWDM, see the following illustrations for examples of
mounting brackets:
• “Attaching PTE2000-EEA mounting brackets with 5 in. setback (example
shows 16CH OMX DWDM)” on page 2-9
• “Attaching ETSI mounting brackets (example shows 16CH OMX DWDM)”
on page 2-10
• “Attaching 23-in. mounting brackets with 5 in. setback (example shows
16CH OMX DWDM)” on page 2-10


Figure 2-4
Attaching PTE2000-EEA mounting brackets with 5 in. setback (example shows 16CH OMX DWDM)
Figure 2-5
Attaching PTE2000-EEA mounting brackets with 4 in. setback (example shows 16CH OMX DWDM)


Figure 2-6
Attaching ETSI mounting brackets (example shows 16CH OMX DWDM)
Figure 2-7
Attaching 23-in. mounting brackets with 5 in. setback (example shows 16CH OMX DWDM)


Figure 2-8
1U front mount 23-in. mounting bracket, 5-in. setback (4CH OMX)
The two-channel transponder protection tray (TPT-2) is a 1U high single-mode

or multi-mode passive tray containing two splitters and two couplers that split
and couple an optical signal.
The four-channel transponder protection tray (TPT-4) is a 1U high

single-mode or multi-mode passive tray containing four splitters and four
couplers that split and couple an optical signal.
The 10-channel transponder protection tray (TPT-10) is a 2U high single-mode

passive tray containing ten splitters and ten couplers that split and couple an
optical signal.


The following illustration shows a 2U TPT-10 with the mounting brackets pre-
installed in the 5-inch mounting position measured from the front of the
component.
Figure 2-9
Example of TPT-10 (5-inch setback from front of TPT-10—pre-installed mounting bracket


To mount a 2U single-mode Transponder Protection Tray in the 5-inch setback

position from the front of a rack footprint, attach the mounting brackets as
shown in “Setback positions for mounting brackets for 2U TPT-10”.
Figure 2-10
Setback positions for mounting brackets for 2U TPT-10
Rear of
rack
Measured
from front
of rack
Measured
6 in. from front of
(152.4mm) component
6 in.
(152.4mm)
5 in. 5 in.
(127mm) (127mm)
1.968 in. Front of TPT-10 (NT0H59AC)

Front of
(50 mm)
rack
11.81 in. 0.394 in.
(300mm) (10mm)


To front mount a drawer in the 6-inch setback position, attach the mounting
brackets as shown in “Front mount (6-inch setback)” for a regular 1U drawer.
Note: For the regular 1U drawer, the mounting brackets are mounted in a
reverse position (from the 40 mm and 5-inch setback positions).
Figure 2-11
Front mount (6-inch setback)


Prerequisites
The following table lists the tools and materials required to install and ground
OMX drawers.
Table 2-2
Tools and materials for installing and grounding equipment drawers
Item Quantity Supplied
Mounting brackets 2 sets yes

(2 brackets
per set)
Phillips flat countersunk screws 4-40 X 3/16-in. (for 12 yes

attaching mounting brackets to the drawer)
1U drawers: single-hole grounding lug 2 no

OMX 16CH DWDM: two-hole grounding lug 2 yes
1U drawers: two-hole lug for 6 AWG (for system 2 not supplied

grounding point) with the 1U
This two-hole lug (which is not supplied) is a choice in drawer
addition to the single-hole lug (which is supplied).
6 AWG wire (for grounding), as desired, for 1U 1 no

equipment drawer
See details regarding the related two-hole lug.
Two-hole lug (#10 bolt, 5/8" spacing) for 6 AWG wire for 2 supplied
grounding 1U drawer with 1U
drawer
#12-24 x 1/2-inch hex head thread forming screws 4 yes
#12 external-tooth lock washers 4 yes
#10-32 x 3/4-inch Phillips Head machine screws 4 yes
#10-32 flange-mount nuts 4 yes
#10 external-tooth lock washers 4 yes
M5 x 20 mm machine screws 4 yes
M5 external-tooth lock washers 4 yes
M6 x 20 mm machine screws 4 yes
M6 flange-mount nuts 4 yes

Table 2-2
Tools and materials for installing and grounding equipment drawers
M6 external-tooth lock washers 4 yes
#1 Phillips screwdriver 1 no
5/16-inch socket (for hex-head screws) 1 no
Torque wrench 1 no
The torque values required for attaching the screws from “Tools and materials
for installing and grounding equipment drawers” on page 2-15 are listed in the
following table.
Table 2-3
Torque values
Item Torque
Phillips flat countersunk screws 4-40 X 3/16-in. (for 1.01 N-m (9 lb-in.)
attaching mounting brackets to the drawer)
#12-24 x 1/2-inch hex head thread forming screws 3.61 N-m (32 lb-in.)
#10-32 x 3/4-inch Phillips head machine screws 2.71 N-m (24 lb-in.)
M5 x 20mm machine screws 3.39 N-m (30 lb-in.)
M6 x 20mm machine screws 5.08 N-m (45 lb-in.)
Mounting in a rack Tighten the mounting

hardware to the rack
manufacturer's torque
specifications.



• the tools and materials listed for your OMX type in “Tools and materials for
installing and grounding equipment drawers” on page 2-15
• the correct mounting bracket for installation. “1U OMX mounting brackets
used with the 6500” specifies the mounting bracket (types A, C, or E) that
fit the specific rack types and hole spacing
• the information on where you must install the OMX or TPT in the
equipment rack. See Part 1 of Planning, NTRN10ER, and the engineering
documentation package (EDP) or installation documentation package
(IDP) or equivalent site/network engineering plans
charges
Table 2-4
1U OMX mounting brackets used with the 6500
Bracket label Rack type and hole spacing
A EIA 19-in. with 1.25-in. (31.75-mm) hole spacing
C EIA 23-in. wide with 1.25-in. (31.75-mm) hole spacing
E ETSI widths with 0.98-in. (25-mm) hole spacing


Precautions
DANGER


working with power.

CAUTION
handling can cause damage to static sensitive components.
ATTENTION
Drawers are shipped with mounting brackets installed for front-mounting into
a 19-in. equipment rack with 1.25-in. (31.75 mm) EIA hole spacing. If you are
front-mounting the drawer with the brackets already installed into a 19-in.
rack, begin with step 10.
Step Action


Step Action

cord to the ESD jack on the shelf.
Installing the brackets on the equipment drawer
3 Place the drawer on a hard, level surface with the front facing toward you and
select your next step.
drawers with the already installed 19-in. step 10
mounting brackets
otherwise step 4
4 Remove the mounting brackets installed in the front-mounting holes of the

shelf.
5 For 23-inch installations of the DSCM drawer (NT0H57LA), use the same
brackets you have removed from the supplied installation, rotate them
90 degrees, then reattach them to the sides of the drawer. Then go to step 10
to install the DSCM drawer in the rack.
For ETSI installations of the DSCM drawer (NT0H57LA), go to step 6 and
follow the instructions for 1U drawers.
For installations of other drawers, select the appropriate mounting brackets
according to Table 2-4 on page 2-17. Then go to step 6.
6 Select the appropriate mounting holes to use.
• “Attaching brackets for front-mounting installation (example shows a 1U
drawer)” on page 2-7
• “Attaching brackets for mid-mounting installation (example shows a 1U
drawer)” on page 2-8
on page 2-10


Step Action
7 Position the mounting bracket for your application as follows:

• For mid-mounting on a 19-in. rack, line up the wider face of the 19/23
bracket in the mid-mounting holes on one side of the drawer.
• For front-mounting in a 19-in., 23-in. or ETSI rack, line up the narrower
face of a 19/23/535 bracket in the front-mounting holes on one side of the
drawer.
• For mid-mounting on a 19-in. or 23-in. or ETSI rack, line up the narrower
face of a 19/23/535 bracket in the mid-mounting holes on one side of the
drawer.
• For front-mounting in an ETSI rack, line up the narrower face of a 19/23
bracket in the front-mounting holes on one side of the drawer.
See the examples in the following illustrations:

on page 2-10
• “1U front mount 23-in. mounting bracket, 5-in. setback (4CH OMX)” on
page 2-11
8 Hold the bracket in position against the side of the drawer. Insert the screws
in the top and bottom holes and tighten. See “Torque values” on page 2-16.
9 Attach the second mounting bracket on the other side of the drawer (repeat
step 7 and step 8).
Installing the equipment drawer in the rack
10
CAUTION
Make sure that the drawer is adequately supported
during the rack-mounting procedure.
Lift and position the drawer in the rack.


Step Action
kit provided.
19-in. or 23-in. the thread forming screws
ETSI the machine screws with cage nuts
12 On one side of the drawer, insert a screw with lock washer through the top
hole in the mounting bracket and into the rack rail and secure the screw.
13 On the other side of the drawer, insert one screw with lock washer through
the top hole in the mounting bracket and into the rack rail and secure the
screw.
14 Insert one screw with lock washer into each of the remaining holes on both
sides of the drawer.
15 Tighten all the screws to secure the drawer to the rack rails. Tighten the
mounting hardware to the rack manufacturer’s torque specifications. Use a
torque wrench to verify that torque has been applied correctly. In the case of
the PTE2000 rack, for the M6 and 12-24 mounting options, that specification
is 5.65 N-m (50 lb-in.) for installation and 4.52 N-m (40 lb-in.) for inspection.
Grounding the equipment drawer
16 Measure and cut a length of insulated ground wire to reach from the ground
point on the drawer to the system ground point. See “Attaching ring lugs to
ground wire”.
Figure 2-12
Attaching ring lugs to ground wire
Strip
required
amount
Crimp-type
1-hole lug


Step Action
For 1U drawers, the mounting bracket on the left side of the drawer is the
ground point for the drawer. A second ground point for the drawer is located
on the left side of the drawer. See “Second ground point on left side of 1U
OMX drawer”.
Figure 2-13
Second ground point on left side of 1U OMX drawer
For OMX 16CH DWDM drawers, the ground point is located inside the
module on the top left of the Channel 1 add/drop connectors. See “Dual-hole
ground point inside OMX 16CH DWDM”.
Figure 2-14
Dual-hole ground point inside OMX 16CH DWDM


Step Action
For the 1U drawers and the OMX 16CH DWDM drawers, the metallic
grounding strip on the rack rail is the connection point for the system ground.
See Figure 2-15. If the mounting brackets rest on the metallic grounding strip,
you do not require the ground cable.
For the 2U 10-channel Transponder Protection Tray, the ground point is
located on the left side (Figure 2-16).
Figure 2-15
Dual-hole ground point and metallic ground strip on rack rail
Figure 2-16
Ground point for a 2U 10-channel TPT-10


Step Action
17 Prepare the ground cable by stripping 14 mm (0.5 in.) of insulation from both
ends of the 6 AWG ground cable, based on the manufacturer's
recommendations or standard practice.
18 Select the appropriate ground lug to insert and crimp at each end of the
stripped wire.
If you are grounding Then
a 1U drawer using the ground point insert each stripped end into a
on the left side of the drawer two-hole ground lug and crimp. Then
go to step 19.
an OMX 16CH DWDM insert each stripped end into a
two-hole ground lug, and crimp. Then
go to step 25.
a 2U TPT-10 insert each stripped end into a
two-hole ground lug, and crimp. Then
go to step 33.
Grounding a 1U drawer using the ground point on the left side of the drawer
19 Route the ground cable behind the back rack upright to the ground point on
the left side of the drawer. See Figure 2-13 on page 2-22.
20 Position the lug over the holes and insert the screws (with the lockwasher
attached) through the lug. The screws are provided with the drawer.
21 Tighten the screws. See “Torque values” on page 2-16.
22 Secure the lug on the other end of the ground wire to the system ground point
(see Figure 2-17).
Figure 2-17
Example of grounding each OMX drawer individually to rack


Step Action
23 Tighten the screws. See “Torque values” on page 2-16.

24 If required, put the appropriate East and/or West label sticker(s) on the
faceplate of the drawer. Go to step 32.
Grounding an OMX 16CH DWDM
25 Open the OMX 16CH DWDM drawer by unscrewing the two lock-screws on
the top side (left and right) of the front panel. Then, pull down the OMX 16CH
DWDM front panel. For a view of the top right lock screw (front panel closed),
see the following illustration.
Figure 2-18
Lock screw on OMX 16CH DWDM front panel (front panel closed)
26 Locate the dual hole grounding point inside the OMX 16CH DWDM. The dual
hole grounding point is located in the top left portion of the module, near the
Band 1 fiber connectors (see “Dual-hole ground point inside OMX 16CH
DWDM” on page 2-22).
27 Insert the ground wire in the OMX 16CH DWDM by routing the wire and the
dual hole lug through the round aperture on the side of the OMX 16CH
DWDM. The round aperture is where the ground wire must exit the OMX
16CHM DWDM when the front panel is closed (see “Dual-hole ground point
inside OMX 16CH DWDM” on page 2-22).


Step Action
28 Select the two required screws in the OMX 16CH DWDM installation kit, and
secure the ground wire to the dual hole ground point inside the OMX 16CH
DWDM (see “Dual-hole ground point inside OMX 16CH DWDM” on page
2-22).
29 Tighten the screw. See “Torque values” on page 2-16.
30 Secure the lug (see “Torque values” on page 2-16) on the other end of the
ground wire to the system ground point (see “Dual-hole ground point and
metallic ground strip on rack rail” on page 2-23).
31 Close the OMX 16CH DWDM front panel by pulling up the panel and securing
the two external lock-screws.
32 If required, put the appropriate East and/or West label sticker(s) on the
faceplate of the OMX equipment drawer.
You have completed this procedure. If you have performed this procedure to
install a DSCM drawer (NT0H57LA), next perform “Installing a DSCM tray in
a DSCM drawer (NT0H57LA)” on page 2-32.
Grounding a 2U TPT-10
33 Locate the dual-hole grounding point on the left side of the drawer. See
“Ground point for a 2U 10-channel TPT-10” on page 2-23.
34 Route the ground cable behind the back rack upright to the ground point on
the left side of the drawer.
35 Position the dual-hole lug over the hole and insert the screws (with the
lockwasher attached) through the dual hole lug. See “Torque values” on page
2-16.
Note: The screws are provided with the drawer.
36 Use screws to secure the dual-hole lug on the other end of the ground wire to
the system ground point (see “Dual-hole ground point and metallic ground
strip on rack rail” on page 2-23). See “Torque values” on page 2-16.
—end—

Procedure 2-2
Installing a fiber manager equipment drawer
Use this procedure to install a fiber manager equipment drawer in the rack.
Two types of fiber managers are available: NT0H57BB with flip-up fiber spools
(Figure 2-19 on page 2-30) and 1U Bulk Fiber Management Tray
174-0094-900 with fixed fiber semi-circular spools (Figure 2-20 on page 2-31).
Prerequisites
Make sure that you have
• a torque wrench
charges
Precautions
DANGER


working with power.

CAUTION
circuit packs.


Step Action
3 Determine the correct height for the fiber manager equipment drawer below
the shelf, on the equipment rack.
4 Determine the type of rack in which you will install the fiber manager
equipment drawer. Note that the fiber manager equipment drawer is shipped
with the mounting brackets pre-configured for a 23-in. rack.
If you are installing the fiber Then go to
manager in a
19-in. rack step 5
23-in. rack step 6
ETSI step 5
5 Detach the brackets from the fiber manager. Attach the long side of each new
bracket to the side of the fiber manager.
Installing the fiber manager on the rack
kit provided.
19-in. or 23-in. the thread forming screws
ETSI the machine screws with cage nuts
7 Install the fiber manager equipment drawer on the rack using the hardware
you selected.


Step Action
8 Insert and tighten the four mounting screws in the bottom hole of each
bracket.
Tighten the mounting hardware to the rack manufacturer’s torque
specifications. Use a torque wrench to verify that torque has been applied
correctly. In the case of the PTE2000 rack, for the M6 and 12-24 mounting
options, that specification is 5.65 N-m (50 lb-in.) for installation and 4.52 N-m
(40 lb-in.) for inspection.
Grounding the fiber manager equipment drawer
9 Fasten one end of the ground cable to the ground point on the left-hand side
of the fiber manager equipment drawer. Fasten the other end of the ground
cable to an appropriate location on the rack.
CAUTION
mounting screws onto the frame, otherwise, you risk
Installing the storage tray cover

NT0H57BB go to step 11
174-0094-900 you have completed this procedure
11 Position the storage tray cover, press the two spring-loaded locks, push the
storage tray cover in, and release the spring-loaded locks. See “Fiber
manager NT0H57BB” on page 2-30.
—end—

Figure 2-19
Fiber manager NT0H57BB

Figure 2-20
1U Bulk Fiber Management Tray 174-0094-900

Procedure 2-3
Installing a DSCM tray in a DSCM drawer (NT0H57LA)
Follow this procedure to install a dispersion slope compensation module
(DSCM) tray in a DSCM drawer (NT0H57LA).
Normally, the DSCM trays are not shipped installed in the DSCM drawer. You
must perform this procedure to install every DSCM tray received.
The DSCM drop-in plate assembly provides slack storage.
Prerequisites
Make sure that you
• Have installed the DSCM drawer (NT0H57LA) (see “Installing and
grounding equipment drawers” on page 2-6).
• Have a 5/16-in. wrench.
• Have the hex cap nuts (4) supplied with the DSCM drawer (NT0H57LA)
• Have the engineering documentation package (EDP) or installation
plans.
• Observe all the safety requirements described in Installation - General
Information, 323-1851-201.0.
• Have the appropriate personal grounding device to dissipate electrostatic
charges.


Precautions
DANGER


described in Installation - General Information, 323-1851-
201.0, the section on observing product and personnel safety
guidelines, the section on consequences of incorrect
grounding. For additional details, see the section on working
with power.

CAUTION
equipment.
Step Action
1 Open the DSCM tray drawer by pressing and holding the two locking latches
located on the sides of the drawer, and pulling it toward you until the drawer
is fully extended.
2 Locate the locking clip at the back left corner of the drawer. Lock the drawer
open by rotating the locking clip counter-clockwise until it rests on the edge
of the drawer.


Step Action
3 Insert the DSCM tray (“DSCM tray”) into the DSCM tray drawer as follows:
a. Place the DSCM tray at an angle so that the slots at the rear of the tray
align with the rear studs on the drawer.
b. Align the front slots on the tray with the front studs on the drawer and
lower the front of the tray to the base of the drawer
Figure 2-21
DSCM tray


Step Action
4 Fasten the DSCM tray to the drawer using the four nuts as follows:
a. Insert a nut to each of the screws at the front of the tray and tighten.
b. Insert a nut to each of the screws at the back of the tray and tighten.
See “DSCM tray in a DSCM drawer”.
Figure 2-22
DSCM tray in a DSCM drawer
5 Locate the locking clip at the back left corner of the drawer. Unlock the drawer
by rotating the locking clip clockwise.
6 Close the drawer by pressing and holding the locking tabs on the sides of the
tray while you slide the tray into the rack.
—end—

Procedure 2-4
Connecting OMX 4CH equipment drawers to the 6500
shelves
Use the procedure to access connectors in OMX 4CH Enhanced + fiber
manager equipment drawers and to establish connections to the DWDM
optical interface circuit packs in the 6500 shelves.
Prerequisites
Make sure that you have the tools and materials listed in the following table.
Table 2-5
Required tools and materials
Antistatic wrist and heel straps 1 no
Fiber-optic cleaning kit 1 no
Fiber inspection scope 1 no
Precautions
DANGER

of incorrect grounding. For additional details, see the
subsection on working with power.


Connecting OMX 4CH equipment drawers to the 6500 shelves
CAUTION
When inserted in a shelf slot, the optical interface circuit pack
emits laser light that can blind. Keep all optical connectors on
end of an optical fiber.
CAUTION
packs.
CAUTION
Risk of affecting network reliability
Always clean fiber connectors before making connections to
ensure network reliability.
CAUTION
Possible risk of damage to equipment and fiber
Make sure that the bulkhead connectors are lowered and
snapped into place before closing the drawer. Failure to do so
could cause damage to the connector unit, the fibers attached
to the connector unit, or both.
Observe the minimum bend radius of 30 mm (1.18 inches) for

the patch cords. Always use the fiber management
components in the drawer to route the fiber.
Allow for sufficient slack in the fibers entering and exiting the
drawer. If you do not allow sufficient slack, the fibers can
become stretched and damaged when you open the drawer.
Step Action


Step Action

3 Open the OMX 4CH equipment drawer by pressing and holding the two
locking latches on the drawer and pulling the drawer toward you until it is fully
open.
4 Verify if the drawer has a locking clip and if the locking clip is spring-loaded.
The locking clip is located in the back left corner of the drawer.
If the drawer Then
has a non-spring-loaded locking lock the drawer open by rotating the
clip locking clip counter-clockwise until it
rests on the edge of the drawer.
Then go to step 5.
does not have a locking clip or the go to step 5
locking clip is spring-loaded
5 Locate the connector on the OMX 4CH required to make the necessary
connection. See “OMX 4CH connectors”.
Figure 2-23
OMX 4CH connectors
B
O
BAND OTS THRU CH 1 CH 3 CH 5 CH 7
T DROP OUT OUT DROP DROP DROP DROP
T
O
P ADD IN IN ADD ADD ADD ADD
T
O BAND OTS THRU CH 1 CH 3 CH 5 CH 7
P TX IN IN ADD ADD ADD ADD
B
O
T RX OUT OUT DROP DROP DROP DROP


Step Action
6 Lift the pull-up tab on the top of the bulkhead to access the connector. See
“OMX 4CH connector bulkheads” (an example of channel 1 or [CH1] add
port).
Figure 2-24
OMX 4CH connector bulkheads
TX
RX
1
7 Scope the channel 1 (CH1) connector on the OMX 4CH add port. Clean if
necessary, and scope again. See the section on cleaning connectors in
8 Scope the fiber-optic patch cord connector. Clean if necessary, and scope
again. See the section on cleaning connectors in Installation - General
Information, 323-1851-201.0.
9 Scope the Tx port on the DWDM circuit pack. Clean if necessary, and scope
Information, 323-1851-201.0.
10 Connect channel 1 (CH1) on the OMX 4CH add port to the Tx port on the
DWDM circuit pack.
11 Lower the connector by pushing down on the tab at the top of the unit, until
the bulkhead snaps into place.
12 Locate the connector on the OMX 4CH required to make the necessary
connection, in this case, (CH1) drop port. See “OMX 4CH connectors” on
page 2-38.


Step Action
13 Lift the pull-up tab on the top of the bulkhead to access the connector. See
“OMX 4CH connector bulkheads” on page 2-39.
14 Scope the channel 1 (CH1) connector on the OMX 4CH drop port. Clean if
necessary, and scope again. See the section on cleaning connectors in
Information, 323-1851-201.0.
16 Scope the Rx port on the DWDM circuit pack. Clean if necessary, and scope
Information, 323-1851-201.0.
17 Connect channel 1 (CH1) on the OMX 4CH drop port to the Rx port on the
optical interface circuit pack.
18 Route the slack fiber around the fiber management components in the
drawer.
19 Use curly ties or hook and loop fasteners (such as VELCRO) to bundle the
fibers where they enter the drawer.
20 Make sure that you have lowered all the bulkheads and that the fibers are
routed correctly around the fiber management components.
If the drawer has a Then
non-spring-loaded locking clip return the locking clip to the original
upright position
spring-loaded locking clip push the clip down
22 Perform step 5 through step 21 for the OMX 4CH protection module.
23 To close the drawer, press and hold the locking tabs on the drawer while you
slide the drawer into the shelf. The locking tabs click into position when the
drawer is in place.
—end—

Procedure 2-5
Connecting OMX 16CH DWDM equipment drawers to
the 6500 shelves
Use this procedure to access connectors in OMX 16CH DWDM equipment
drawers and to establish connections to the DWDM optical interface circuit
packs in the 6500 shelves.
Prerequisites
Make sure that you have the tools and materials listed in the following table.
Table 2-6
Required tools and materials
Antistatic wrist and heel straps 1 no
Fiber-optic cleaning kit 1 no
Fiber inspection scope 1 no
Phillips # 2 screwdriver 1 no
Precautions
DANGER





Connecting OMX 16CH DWDM equipment drawers to the 6500 shelves
CAUTION
To ensure network reliability, clean the fiber connectors before
you make connections.
CAUTION
When the gray slider adapter is extended to the furthest
outward position and an SC or LC connector is inserted into
the SC or LC coupling, the slider adapter can separate at the
seams due to the pressure being applied.
Firmly support the slider adapter when inserting an SC or LC
connector to avoid equipment damage.
CAUTION
Risk of damage to equipment and fiber
Make sure that the sliders are pushed fully to the rear before
closing the front cover. Failure to do so could cause damage to
the connector unit, the fibers attached to the connector unit, or
both.
Observe the minimum bend radius of 30 mm (1.18 inches) for

the patch cords. Always use the fiber management
components to route the fiber.
drawer. If sufficient slack is not left, the fibers can become
stretched and damaged when the drawer is opened.
CAUTION
packs.
Step Action


Step Action

3 Using a Phillips #2 screwdriver, open the front cover of the OMX 16CH
DWDM by turning the screws counterclockwise, see “OMX 16CH DWDM”.
Figure 2-25
OMX 16CH DWDM
4 Locate the required slider adapter. For the connector labels, see the following
illustrations:
• “Labels for OMX 16CH DWDM C-band” on page 2-44
• “Labels for OMX 16CH DWDM L-band” on page 2-44


Step Action
Figure 2-26
Labels for OMX 16CH DWDM C-band
Figure 2-27
Labels for OMX 16CH DWDM L-band
5 Pull the slider adapter out. See “Using the slider adapter” on page 2-45.
6 Remove the connector dust cover.
7 Scope the channel 1 (CH1) connector on the OMX 16CH DWDM add port.
Clean if necessary, and scope again. See the section on cleaning connectors
Information, 323-1851-201.0.
9 Carefully insert the optical fiber connector into the slider adapter.
A click indicates that you have inserted the optical fiber connector correctly.


Step Action
Figure 2-28
Using the slider adapter
10 Scope the Tx port on the DWDM circuit pack. Clean if necessary, and scope
Information, 323-1851-201.0.
11 Connect channel 1 (CH1) on the OMX 16CH DWDM add port to the Tx port
on the DWDM circuit pack.
12 Locate the connector on the OMX 16CH required to make the next
connection. In this case (CH1) drop port.
13 Pull the slider adapter out. See “Using the slider adapter”.
14 Remove the connector dust cover.
15 Scope the channel 1 (CH1) connector on the OMX 16CH DWDM drop port.
Clean if necessary, and scope again. See the section on cleaning connectors
Information, 323-1851-201.0.
17 Carefully insert the optical fiber connector into the slider adapter.
A click indicates that you have inserted the optical fiber connector correctly.


Step Action
18 Push the slider adapter in.

19 Scope the Rx port on the DWDM circuit pack. Clean if necessary, and scope
Information, 323-1851-201.0.
20 Connect channel 1 (CH1) on the OMX 16CH DWDM drop port to the Rx port
on the optical interface circuit pack.
21 Route the slack fiber around the fiber management components in the
OMX16CH drawer.
fibers where they enter the drawer.
23 Perform step 4 through step 22 for the OMX 16CH DWDM protection module.
24 Move any slack fiber so that you can close the OMX 16CH DWDM door.
fibers close to the entry point of the fiber manager. See “Guidelines for routing
fiber-optic cables in the NT0H57BB fiber manager” on page 2-56.
26 Close the front cover of the OMX 16CH DWDM by turning the screws
(clockwise).
27 Perform fiber management. See “Guidelines for routing fiber-optic cables in
the NT0H57BB fiber manager” on page 2-56.
—end—

Procedure 2-6
Routing fiber-optic cables for the OMX 4CH
equipment drawer
Use this procedure to route the optical fibers from the OMX 4CH + fiber
manager tray through the fiber management trough below the card cage of the
14-slot shelf. Consult your system diagram for site-specific details.
Prerequisites
Make sure that:
• The OMX cable (Ethernet cable) has been installed.
• All fibers and connectors are clean (see the section on cleaning
connectors in Installation - General Information, 323-1851-201.0).
• All fibers are labeled.
When you complete this procedure, the optical fibers are routed from the OMX
4CH + fiber manager tray to the circuit pack area of the 14-slot shelf.

When installing the 6500 shelves and equipment within a new or existing rack,
it is the customer’s responsibility to provide fiber management. When the
customer’s fiber management requirements are not specified, Ciena
recommends that split flex tubing be used to route and secure fibers.
If you are using split flex tubing to route and secure fiber-optic cables, secure
the split flex tubing approximately every 12-in. (30.5 cm) to the transverse
arms of the equipment rack using lacing cord or wax string.
CAUTION
Invisible laser radiation
The 6500 Packet-Optical Platform operates up to a hazard
level of 1M. Use only viewing instruments with proper optical
attenuation.


Routing fiber-optic cables for the OMX 4CH equipment drawer
CAUTION
Make sure that the bulkhead connectors are lowered and
snapped into place before closing any drawers. Failure to do so
could cause damage to the connector unit, the fibers attached
to the connector unit, or both.
Observe the minimum bend radius of 30 mm (1.18 in.) for the

patch cords. Always use the fiber management components in
the drawer to route the fiber.
any drawers. If sufficient slack is not left, the fibers can become
CAUTION
packs.
Step Action

2 Open the OMX 4CH + fiber manager tray by pressing and holding the two
locking latches on the drawer and pull the drawer toward you until it is fully
open.
CAUTION
Incorrect handling can result in damage to the optical
fibers.


Step Action
3 If this OMX connects to circuit packs in slots on the left hand side, route the
fibers entering or exiting the tray through the opening on the left side (see
“OMX 4CH + fiber manager tray optical fiber routing (left side)”). If this OMX
connects to circuit packs in slots on the right hand side, route the fibers
entering or exiting the tray through the opening on the right side (see “OMX
4CH + fiber manager tray optical fiber routing (right side)” on page 2-50).
Consult your system diagram for site-specific details.
Follow the bend radius rule when you route fiber. Do not exceed a 30-mm
(1.18-in.) bend radius when you route fiber. Do not exceed a 3-in. (76.2-mm)
bend radius when you coil or bend fibers.
Store excess fiber slack within the tray.
You can bundle together the fibers that enter the tray. Use tie wraps or curly
locks.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the optical fibers, make sure that
the optical fibers inside the OMX are clear of the cover
when you replace the cover.
Figure 2-29
OMX 4CH + fiber manager tray optical fiber routing (left side)
B
O
BAND TX
CH 1 DROP
CH 1 ADD
CH 2 DROP
CH 2 ADD
CH 3 DROP
CH 3 ADD
CH 4 DROP
CH 4 ADD
BAND RX
T
O
T
O
B
O
CAUTION
INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN
AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM


Step Action
Figure 2-30
OMX 4CH + fiber manager tray optical fiber routing (right side)
B
O
BAND TX
CH 1 DROP
CH 1 ADD
CH 2 DROP
CH 2 ADD
CH 3 DROP
CH 3 ADD
CH 4 DROP
CH 4 ADD
BAND RX
T
O
T
O
B
O
CAUTION
INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN
AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM
4 Repeat step 1 and step 3 for the other OMX (if applicable).
5 Use hook and loop fasteners (such as VELCRO) to bundle fiber-optic cables
entering and exiting the shelf.
6 Slide the OMX drawer into the rack while pressing the locking tabs in the
middle of the sides of the drawer. The front locking tabs click when the tray is
in the correct position.
—end—

Procedure 2-7
Routing fiber-optic cables for the OMX 16CH DWDM
equipment drawer
Use this procedure to route the optical fibers within the OMX 16CH DWDM
equipment drawer. Consult your system diagram for site-specific details.
No fiber slack storage devices are provided inside the OMX 16CH DWDM.
You must manage fiber slack outside the OMX 16CH DWDM. The steps in this
procedure provide guidelines on fiber management. Make sure that you
confirm the preferred method of fiber slack management for the system with
the person responsible for installation.
Prerequisites
Make sure you that:
• The OMX 16CH DWDM equipment drawer is installed. For installation
information, see “Installing and grounding equipment drawers” on page
2-6.
• All fibers and connectors are clean (see the section on cleaning
connectors in Installation - General Information, 323-1851-201.0).
• All fibers are labeled.
• You find out the strategy for fiber slack management for the system from
your next level of support (for installation).
• You have a #2 Phillips screwdriver.

When installing the 6500 shelves and equipment in a new or existing rack, it
is the customer’s responsibility to provide fiber management. When the
customer’s fiber management requirements are not specified, Ciena
recommends that split flex tubing be used to route and secure fibers.
If you are using split flex tubing to route and secure fiber-optic cables, secure
the split flex tubing approximately every 12 inches (30.5 cm) to the transverse
arms of the equipment rack using lacing cord or wax string.


Routing fiber-optic cables for the OMX 16CH DWDM equipment drawer
CAUTION
packs.
CAUTION
Invisible laser radiation
The 6500 operates up to a hazard level of 1M. Use only
viewing instruments with proper optical attenuation.
CAUTION
Make sure that the slider adapters (which hold the fiber
connectors) are completely inserted back into place before you
close the OMX 16CH DWDM front panel. Failure to do so can
cause damage to the connector unit, the fibers attached to the
connector unit, or both.

patch cords. Always follow the fiber routing guidelines within
this procedure.
Step Action

2 Use a Phillips screwdriver to unfasten the two lock-screws on the top side (left
and right) of the front panel of the OMX 16CH DWDM drawer. Then pull down
the OMX 16CH DWDM front panel. See “Lock screw on the OMX 16CH
DWDM front panel (front panel closed)” on page 2-53.


Step Action
Figure 2-31
Lock screw on the OMX 16CH DWDM front panel (front panel closed)
The internal fibers are already routed inside the OMX 16CH DWDM drawer.
3 For the routing of external fibers, follow the inter-shelf routing fiber diagram
inside the OMX 16CH DWDM front panel. See “Inter-shelf fiber routing label
inside the OMX 16CH DWDM front cover” on page 2-54. For external and
internal fiber routing in the OMX 16CH DWDM, see “Routing fibers inside the
OMX 16CH DWDM” on page 2-54. For external fibers, follow the guidelines
shown on the inter-shelf routing fiber label, which are as follows:
• Slider adapters on the left side: Route to the left side of the drawer the
duplex LC fibers going to the slider adapters for
— Band 1 and Band 2 on the C-band OMX 16CH DWDM (NT0H32JA),
and
— Band 5 and Band 6 on the L-band OMX 16CH DWDM (NT0H32KA)
• Slider adapters in the center: Route to the right side of the drawer
— the SC fibers going to the OTS slider adapters for both the C-band
and the L-band OMX 16CH DWDM, and
— the L-band slider adapters on the C-band OMX 16CH DWDM.
(These ports are the L-band upgrade ports only available on the
NT0H32JA.)


Step Action
Figure 2-32
Inter-shelf fiber routing label inside the OMX 16CH DWDM front cover
Figure 2-33
Routing fibers inside the OMX 16CH DWDM
• Slider adapters on the right side: Route to the left side of the drawer the
duplex LC fibers going to the slider adapters for
— Band 3 and Band 4 on the C-band OMX 16CH DWDM (NT0H32JA),
and
— Band 7 and Band 8 on the L-band OMX 16CH DWDM (NT0H32KA)
“Routing fibers inside the OMX 16CH DWDM” shows the external fibers
connected in the OMX 16CH DWDM.


Step Action
4 Make sure that the fibers enter and exit the OMX 16CH DWDM through the
apertures on the side of the drawer. See “Lock screw on the OMX 16CH
DWDM front panel (front panel closed)” on page 2-53 for a view of the fibers
entering and exiting the OMX 16CH DWDM (front panel closed).
Store fiber slack outside the OMX 16CH DWDM, using alternative methods.
For example, tie fiber bundles (fastened with curly locks or hook and loop
fasteners, such as VELCRO) on the side of the rack. Make sure that you
confirm the preferred method of fiber slack management with the person
responsible for installation.
Follow the bend radius rule when you store the excess fiber slack outside the
drawer. Do not exceed a 30 mm (1.18-inch) bend radius when you route fiber.
Do not exceed a 3-inch (76.2-mm) bend radius when you coil or bend fibers.
5 Use curly locks or hook and loop fasteners (such as VELCRO) to bundle
fiber-optic cables entering and exiting the OMX 16CH DWDM. See “Lock
screw on the OMX 16CH DWDM front panel (front panel closed)” on page
2-53 and “Routing fibers inside the OMX 16CH DWDM” on page 2-54.
6 Pull up the front panel and secure the two external lock-screws to close the
OMX 16CH DWDM.
—end—

Procedure 2-8
Guidelines for routing fiber-optic cables in the
NT0H57BB fiber manager
Follow these guidelines when you are routing slack fiber through the
NT0H57BB fiber manager.
Do not use the NT0H57BB fiber manager with devices that have MPO-type
connectors. For more information, including a list of devices that have
MPO-type connectors, see the table of additional hardware components in
Planning - Ordering Information, 323-1851-151.
For guidelines related to the 1U Bulk Fiber Management Tray 174-0094-900,

see “Guidelines for routing fiber-optic cables in the 1U Bulk Fiber
Management Tray 174-0094-900” on page 2-61.
Precautions
CAUTION
Risk of insufficient fiber slack
Be sure the fiber manager, and the drawer from which the fiber
is being routed, are fully open before you begin to route the
fiber around the fiber manager spools. You must leave
sufficient slack in the fiber so that you can open the drawers
without stretching the fiber.
CAUTION
Risk of fiber damage
Each fiber manager can manage a maximum of 16 fibers.
Each fiber spool in the drawer can manage 1.6 meters of fiber
(maximum 3-mm diameter). Do not stretch the fiber, or wrap
the fiber on the spools too tightly, or you risk damaging the
fiber.
CAUTION
You must always clean fiber connectors before you make
connections to ensure network reliability. For details, see the
section on cleaning connectors in Installation - General
Information, 323-1851-201.0.


Guidelines for routing fiber-optic cables in the NT0H57BB fiber manager
ATTENTION
The fiber manager has two sliding fiber management components located on
the left and right sides of the drawer. Each of these components has two tabs
that lock into position across the top of the dish, to hold the routed fibers in
position.
To open the tab to route fiber through the dish, press the tab toward the back
of the latch while you lift the tab. Press down on the tab to close it.
CAUTION
patch cords. Always use the fiber management features in the
drawer to route the fiber.
Allow for sufficient slack in the fibers that enter and exit the
drawers. If sufficient slack is not left, the fibers can become
Fiber routing methods

You can route and store fiber as follows:
• storage with entrance and exit on the same side of the NT0H57BB fiber
manager
• storage with entrance and exit on opposite sides of the NT0H57BB fiber
manager (also called passthrough)


Guidelines for routing fiber-optic cables in the NT0H57BB fiber manager
Guidelines for routing fiber

Guideline Detail
1 Make sure every fiber is labeled.
2 Label each flip-up spool in the fiber manager.
3 Follow the bend radius rule when you route fiber.

Do not exceed a 30 mm (1.18-in.) bend radius when you coil or bend
fiber.
4 Route the fiber on the spools in the following order:

front spools -> bottom to top
rear spools -> bottom to top
the fibers
• entering and exiting the fiber manager drawer
• in the rear middle of the fiber manager drawer
“Routing slack fiber on spools in the fiber manager (NT0H57BB), same side”
on page 2-59 illustrates how to route slack fiber around the spools in the fiber
manager. “Bundling fibers entering and exiting the fiber manager
(NT0H57BB) (example shows same side routing)” on page 2-60 illustrates
how to bundle the fibers. (Both examples show same side routing/fibers
entering and exiting on the same side of the NT0H57BB fiber manager.)
—end—

Figure 2-34
Routing slack fiber on spools in the fiber manager (NT0H57BB), same side
Label here
Curly ties
Note 1: Use curly ties to bundle fibers

entering and exiting the tray.
Note 2: Do not stretch fibers when wrapping
them around the fiber spools.
Note 3: Route fiber onto the spools in this order:
· front spools first - bottom spool to top spool
· rear spools after the front spools are full - bottom spool to top spool
Note 4: Attach a label to each spool to identify the fiber on the spool.

Figure 2-35
Bundling fibers entering and exiting the fiber manager (NT0H57BB) (example shows same side
routing)
Open
Closed

Procedure 2-9
Guidelines for routing fiber-optic cables in the 1U Bulk
Fiber Management Tray 174-0094-900
Follow these guidelines when you are routing slack fiber through the 1U Bulk
Fiber Management Tray 174-0094-900.
For guidelines related to fiber manager NT0H57BB, see Procedure 2-8,

“Guidelines for routing fiber-optic cables in the NT0H57BB fiber manager”.
Precautions
CAUTION
Risk of insufficient fiber slack
Be sure the 1U Bulk Fiber Management Tray and the drawer
from which the fiber is being routed, are fully open before you
begin to route the fiber around the fixed fiber semi-circular
spools. You must leave sufficient slack in the fiber so that you
can open the drawers without stretching the fiber.
CAUTION
Risk of fiber damage
Do not stretch the fiber, or wrap the fiber around the fiber
semi-circular spool tightly, or you risk damaging the fiber.
CAUTION
You must always clean fiber connectors before you make
connections to ensure network reliability. For details, see the
section on cleaning connectors in Installation - General
Information, 323-1851-201.0.
ATTENTION
The 1U Bulk Fiber Management Tray has two sliding fiber management
components located on the left and right sides of the drawer. Each of these
components has two tabs that lock into position across the top of the dish, to
hold the routed fibers in position.
To open the tab to route fiber through the dish, press the tab toward the back
of the latch while you lift the tab. Press down on the tab to close it.


Guidelines for routing fiber-optic cables in the 1U Bulk Fiber Management Tray 174-0094-900
CAUTION
patch cords. Always use the fiber management features in the
drawer to route the fiber.
Allow for sufficient slack in the fibers that enter and exit the
drawers. If sufficient slack is not left, the fibers can become
Guidelines for routing fiber

Follow the general pattern of slack storage take-up for all lengths with some
slack outside the 1U Bulk Fiber Management Tray to facilitate opening and
closing the 1U Bulk Fiber Management Tray.
Guideline Detail
1 Make sure every fiber is labeled.
2 Follow the bend radius rule when you route fiber.

Do not exceed a 30-mm (1.18-in.) bend radius when you coil or bend
fiber.
3 Each 1U Bulk Fiber Management Tray can accommodate a maximum

of fibers as specified in “1U Bulk Fiber Management Tray—capacity” on
page 2-63. Information on other diameters that can be accommodated
in the 1U Bulk Fiber Management Tray is also provided.
See the examples of fiber routing listed in the following tables:
• “Same side fiber routing—examples” on page 2-64
• “Opposite side (passthrough) fiber routing—examples” on page 2-68
the fibers entering and exiting the 1U Bulk Fiber Management Tray.


Table 2-7
1U Bulk Fiber Management Tray—capacity
Fiber diameter Number of fiber Number of fiber Average length per

patchcords patchcords fiber patchcord
passing through entering and
from one side to exiting on the
the other side same side (left
side or right side)
1.6 mm 60 30 3.9 m (12.7 ft)

(15 fibers on each
side)
2.0 mm 48 24 3.4 m (11.2 ft)

(12 fibers on each
side)
3.0 mm 24 12 1.7 m (5.5 ft)

(6 fibers on each
side)
Fiber routing methods

You can route and store fiber as follows:
• storage with entrance and exit on the same side of the 1U Bulk Fiber
Management Tray
• storage with entrance and exit on opposite sides of the 1U Bulk Fiber
Management Tray (called passthrough in the following figures)
For examples of how to route fiber around the fixed fiber semi-circular spools
in the 1U Bulk Fiber Management Tray based on the length of fiber slack and
entrance and exit method, see the applicable illustration listed in the following
tables:
• “Same side fiber routing—examples” on page 2-64
• “Opposite side (passthrough) fiber routing—examples” on page 2-68


Table 2-8
Same side fiber routing—examples
Length in m Length in ft See
0.6 m 2 ft “Example—routing slack fiber on fiber spools in the

1U Bulk Fiber Management Tray (174-0094-900)—
0.6 m (2 ft) same side” on page 2-65



1.7 to 1.8 m 5.5 to 6 ft “Example—routing slack fiber on fiber spools in the

1.7 to 1.8 m (5.5 to 6 ft) same side” on page 2-67
1.8 to 2.0 m 6 to 6.5 ft “Example—routing slack fiber on fiber spools in the

1.8 to 2.0 m (6 to 6.5 ft) same side” on page 2-67
The same side figures show examples of routing fiber on the left side of the
1U Bulk Fiber Management Tray. Follow the same guidelines when routing on
the right side of the 1U Bulk Fiber Management Tray.

Figure 2-36
Example—routing slack fiber on fiber spools in the 1U Bulk Fiber Management Tray
(174-0094-900)—0.6 m (2 ft) same side
Figure 2-37
(174-0094-900)—0.9 m (3 ft) same side

Figure 2-38
(174-0094-900)—1.2 m (4 ft) same side
Figure 2-39
(174-0094-900)—1.5 m (5 ft) same side

Figure 2-40
(174-0094-900)—1.7 to 1.8 m (5.5 to 6 ft) same side
Figure 2-41
(174-0094-900)—1.8 to 2.0 m (6 to 6.5 ft) same side

Table 2-9
Opposite side (passthrough) fiber routing—examples
Length in m Length in ft See
0.9 m 3 ft “Example—routing slack fiber on fiber spools in

the 1U Bulk Fiber Management Tray
(174-0094-900)—0.9 m (3 ft) passthrough” on
page 2-69

page 2-69

page 2-70
1.5 m+ 5 ft+ “Example—routing slack fiber on fiber spools in

(174-0094-900)—1.5 m+ (5 ft+) passthrough” on
page 2-70

page 2-71

Figure 2-42
(174-0094-900)—0.9 m (3 ft) passthrough
Figure 2-43
(174-0094-900)—1.2 m (4 ft) passthrough

Figure 2-44
(174-0094-900)—1.5 m (5 ft) passthrough
Figure 2-45
(174-0094-900)—1.5 m+ (5 ft+) passthrough

Figure 2-46
(174-0094-900)—1.8 m (6 ft) passthrough
—end—

Procedure 2-10
Installing the NTN458RA DSM breaker interface panel
Use this procedure to:
• install the NTN458RA DSM breaker interface panel (BIP) in the equipment
rack
• connect the ground cable
• connect power to the equipment frame (input wiring)
• test input power
• connect office (bay) alarm cables to the BIP
Alternatively, you can use the 1U BIP (NTK599DA) or the 1U FIP (NTK599EA)
to power the DSM. For installation instructions, see the procedure on installing
the 1U breaker interface panel (NTK599DA) or the 1U fuse interface panel
(NTK599EA) in Installation - General Information, 323-1851-201.0. For
details on BIP and FIP support, see Common Equipment, 323-1851-102.1.
The NTN458RA BIP is shipped in a single container. The following

components are included in the container:
• one NTN458RA BIP
• one pair of 19-in. brackets and attaching screws
• one pair of 23-in. brackets and attaching screws
• four mounting screws
• one ground cable
Prerequisites
Make sure that
• The BIP is not supplied with power cables. You must purchase or
assemble the power cables according to the specifications.
• Before you install the BIP, you must make sure that:
— The equipment rack is installed, secured, and grounded according to
the manufacturer’s instructions.
— You have appropriate equipment space and battery power.
— All required interface, power, and communications cables are
available.
— You have a voltmeter.


— You have non-oxidizing compound.

— You have the appropriate personal grounding device to dissipate
Precautions
DANGER



DANGER
Risk of electrical shock
The -48 Vdc office battery supply can deliver severe electrical
shock that can cause personal injury. Follow all of your
company’s safety precautions, those found in this document
and in Installation - General Information, 323-1851-201.0.
CAUTION
Before connecting input cables, make sure input power to
panel is turned off.


CAUTION
packs.
Step Action
Inspecting the BIP shipping container
3 Perform a visual inspection of the containers for any sign of damage that can
occur during shipment.
4 Remove the contents of the shipping container.
5 Verify the BIP container contents.
6 Verify that all of the items listed are present.
Installing the BIP in the equipment frame
7 Identify the equipment frame.
If you are mounting the BIP in a Then go to
19-in. equipment frame step 8
23-in. open equipment frame step 9
8 Attach the 19-in. mounting bracket to the side of the BIP, at 5 inches from the
front. See “NTN458RA breaker interface panel (BIP)” on page 2-75.
Go to step 10.
9 Attach the 23-in mounting bracket to the side of the BIP, at 5 inches from the
front. See “NTN458RA breaker interface panel (BIP)” on page 2-75.

Figure 2-47
NTN458RA breaker interface panel (BIP)


Step Action
10 Mount the BIP on the equipment frame using four mounting screws provided.
The minimum clearance required above BIP 1 is 0.5 inches.
• With one hand, hold and position the BIP to the frame.
• With the other hand, insert the screws that attach the right side of the BIP
to the frame.
• Continue to hold the BIP in position with one hand.
• With the other hand, insert the screws that attach the left side of the BIP
to the frame.
• Use a screw driver to tighten the four screws.
Use a torque wrench to verify that torque has been applied correctly:
35 lb-in. (4.29 N-m).
Refer to Common Equipment, 323-1851-102.1, for BIP specifications and
power cabling selection.
Connecting the ground cable
DANGER
Improper grounding and risk of electrocution
Failure to turn circuit breakers to the OFF position can
cause personal injury.
11 Attach a 2-hole compression lug onto the ground wire. The size of ground
wire depends on the input interruption device.
12 If required, lightly coat non-oxidizing compound on the lug, grounding
terminal and surrounding contacting surface. Connect the lug to the terminal
using KEPS nut as shown in “Attaching ground lug” at the rear of the BIP.
(2.27 N-m).
Figure 2-48
Attaching ground lug


Step Action
13 Use the thread forming screws supplied with the shelf to attach the other end
of the ground cable to the frame.
Connecting power to the equipment frame (input wiring)
Note: Ensure you follow operating company guidelines when attaching input
wiring.
14 Ensure that the input power is off and that all circuit breakers located on the
front of the BIP are in the OFF (0 position) on both the A and B sides. No
LEDs should be on.
15 Crimp straight or angled, 2-hole compression lugs onto copper wires.
16 Insulate lug barrels with UL94 V-0 rated heat shrink tubing.
17
DANGER
In all cases, ensure heat shrink tubing completely
covers all exposed metal on the power input lugs to the
BIP. Failure to comply could result in electrocution.
18 Remove plastic covers from both pairs of BATT and RTN input terminals.
19 Clean all input terminals with a nonabrasive, nonmetallic pad.
20 If required, lightly coat non-oxidizing compound on lugs and input BATT and
RTN terminals, and then connect lugs to the input terminals on rear of the
breaker panel, as shown in “Input lug connections” and “NTN458RA breaker
interface panel (BIP)” on page 2-75.
Use a torque wrench to verify that torque has been applied correctly: tighten
lugs to 20 lb-in. (2.27 Nm).
Figure 2-49
Input lug connections


Step Action
21 After connecting input lugs to both sides (Sides A and B), supply input power
to Sides A and B. See the breaker interface panel (BIP) (NTN458RA)
specifications in Common Equipment, 323-1851-102.1, for electrical
requirements.
Both PWR (power) LEDs (A and B) on front panel must light (green).
22 Use a voltmeter to test voltage and polarity at input terminals of breaker
panel.
23 Re-attach plastic input terminal covers.
Before re-attaching plastic input terminal covers, it may be necessary to cut
out the tongues of the lug covers in order to accommodate the two-hole lugs
for the AWG #2 cabling.
Testing input power
24 Turn off power to either Side A or B.
25 Verify that corresponding PWR (power) LED extinguishes.
26 Verify that ALARM LED turns red.
27 Repeat step 24 to step 26 on the other side not yet tested.
28 Shut off all power to the breaker interface panel.
Connecting office (bay) alarms to the BIP
29 At the rear of the panel, slide out the alarm wiring pinout insert. The alarm
wiring pinout information for this BIP is also shown in “NTN458RA breaker
interface panel (BIP)” on page 2-75.
30 Wire wrap the office alarm cable to the appropriate pins. The minimum
number of wire-wrap connections for each pin is five.
31 Route the BIP cable harness along the frame.
The minimum clearance required below BIP 2 is 1.75 inches.
—end—

Procedure 2-11
Installing the DS1 service module (DSM) shelf
Perform this procedure to install the DS1 DSM shelf.
The DS1 service module is shipped preassembled in a single container.
The DSM shelf is connected to the 6500 shelf through an OC-3/STM-1 line
and can be located within fiber-optic cable reach at the same site.
This procedure is valid for all supported 19-in. and 23-in. bay frames. For a list
and top view of all valid (open) bay frame mounting arrangements, see the
following illustration.
Figure 2-50
Valid mounting arrangements for open equipment frame (top view)
23” bay — 3” C channel (front access) 19” bay — 3” C channel (front access)
Mounting centers
Bay uprights
Bay uprights Mounting bracket
Mounting bracket
Mounting centers
23” bay — unequal flange (rear access) 19” bay — unequal flange (rear access)
Mounting centers Bay uprights
Mounting bracket
Bay uprights
Mounting bracket Mounting centers
Prerequisites
Make sure that you have the following tools and materials:
• a Phillips screwdriver
• a torque wrench
charges


Precautions
DANGER



CAUTION
packs.
Step Action
3 Perform a visual inspection of the containers for any sign of damage that can
occur during shipment.


Step Action
4 Remove the contents of the shipping container.

5 Verify the DSM container contents. See the following illustration.
Figure 2-51
DSM - shipping container contents (example shows mounting brackets for a 19 in. equipment rack
with 5 in. setback)


Step Action
6 Verify that the ground cable and all the modules required for this shelf are
present.
7 Verify that the two circuit packs (DSM 84xDS1 termination modules) are
inserted in their correct slots.
8 Determine if you are installing the DSM in the same equipment frame with the
6500 shelf or in a separate bay.
The minimum required clearance below a DSM is 1.75 inches. The distance
from the front of the DSM to the front edge of the frame base plate is 4.97
inches. The DSM is flush with the rear edge of the frame base plate.
9 Select your next step. Note that the DSM shelf is shipped with the mounting
brackets configured for a 23-in. bay frame.
If you are mounting the DSM in a Then go to
19-in. bay frame step 10
23-in. open bay frame step 11
10 Detach the brackets from the DSM. Attach the long side of each 19-in.
mounting bracket to the side of the DSM (see the following illustration).


Step Action
Figure 2-52
DSM shelf (example shows mounting brackets for a 19 in. equipment rack with 5 in. setback)
11 Carefully open the front cover of the DSM.

12 Mount the DSM on the bay frame using the alignment studs and four #12-24
self-tapping screws.


Step Action
13
CAUTION
Risk of dropping the equipment
To prevent the shelf from tipping and falling, you must
install the studs in the holes that match the bottom
holes of the shelf.
Insert the alignment studs in the equipment frame, in the holes that match the
top holes of the shelf.
14 Hang the shelf from the alignment studs.
15 Insert and tighten the shelf screws in the bottom hole of each bracket.
(576 g-m) for installation and 40 lb-in. (460 g-m) for inspection.
16 Remove the alignment studs.
17
CAUTION
Risk of improper ground due to poor contact with a
painted frame
If the frame is painted, follow your company procedures
to remove the paint from the area where the bolt will be
fastened. Ensure the bolt washer makes direct contact
with the frame.
Insert and tighten the shelf screws in the same holes that the alignment studs
were in.
(576 g-m) for installation and 40 lb-in. (460 g-m) for inspection.
18 Connect the DSM ground cable. See “Installing and grounding the DSM shelf
(example shows a 23 in. equipment rack)” on page 2-85.


Step Action
Figure 2-53
Installing and grounding the DSM shelf (example shows a 23 in. equipment rack)


Step Action
19 Connect the DSM I/O connectors. See “Connecting DS1 cables to the DS1
service module” on page 2-115.
20 Connect the DSM power cable. See “Connecting power cables to the DSM
shelf (DSM OAM hardware release 5.0 or earlier)” on page 2-87 or
“Connecting power cables to the DSM shelf (DSM OAM hardware release 6
or later)” on page 2-95.
21 Connect the DSM alarm, control, and communication cables. See
“Connecting alarm control and communication cables to the DS1 service
module” on page 2-106.
22 Install the DSM 84xDS1 termination module. See “Inserting or removing a
DSM 84xDS1 termination module” on page 2-119.
23 Connect the DSM 84xDS1 termination module to the 6500 shelf. See
“Connecting the DS1 service module to the 6500 shelf” on page 2-126.
On the left and right side of the DSM, ensure that cables do not block the
ventilation.
24 Repeat step 2 through step 23 for all DSMs, as required.
25 Close the front cover.
—end—

Procedure 2-12
Connecting power cables to the DSM shelf (DSM OAM
hardware release 5.0 or earlier)
Perform this procedure to connect power cables to the DSM shelf for DSM
OAM hardware release 5.0 or earlier.
Prerequisites
Make sure that:
• The DSM OAM adapter module is Hardware Release 5 or earlier.
• The fixed wiring includes a quickly accessible disconnect device.
• You have a digital voltmeter (DVM).
Power cabling from the BIP/FIP to the DS1 service module (DSM) is not
included in the shipping container when you order a DSM shelf. You must
order the appropriate cable. This power cable corresponds to the long
segment in “DSM adapter cable (required only for DSM OAM HW Rel 5 or
earlier)”.
Figure 2-54
DSM adapter cable (required only for DSM OAM HW Rel 5 or earlier)
A- (-48V) red
A+(return) white
with red trace
Power module A
power connector
to BIP A-
To OAM
A
power A A+
adapter
to BIP B- module
B B+
power B
Power module B
BIP cable power connector DSM adapter cable
(the DSM adapter cable is
B- (-48V) red supplied with the DSM)
with blue trace
B+ (return) white
with blue trace


Connecting power cables to the DSM shelf (DSM OAM hardware release 5.0 or earlier)
For EMC purposes, place a ferrite on the DSM power cable. See the following
illustration.
Figure 2-55
Placing the ferrite on the DSM power cable


Precautions
DANGER



DANGER
ensure that the shelf power is turned off at the power
CAUTION
packs.


CAUTION
To avoid damage to the power connector pins:
• Ensure the power cable is plugged horizontal to the power
connector and perpendicular to the OAM module.
• Secure the power cable to the nearest possible rigid point on the
bay before routing the cable.
• Route the power cable between the OAM module and the left side
of the shelf as shown in “Routing the DSM power cable” on page
2-99. Take care not to push the connector downwards as shown in
“Improper routing of the DSM power cable” on page 2-100. Pushing
the connector downwards puts tension on the connectors and can
lead to damage.
Step Action
Connecting power to the DSM
3 Turn off the power at the power distribution panel or BIP/FIP for the A and B
feeds.
4 Each of the A and B power cables provided with the DSM is divided into two
segments of different sizes. See “DSM adapter cable (required only for DSM
OAM HW Rel 5 or earlier)” on page 2-87. Connect the non-terminated end of
the short segment to the power terminal block on the DSM OAM module. See
“DSM OAM adapter module (hardware release 5) with cover off” on page
2-91 and “Connecting power, control, and communication cables to the DS1
service module (example shows a 23-in. equipment rack with 5-in. setback)”
on page 2-92.


Step Action
Figure 2-56
DSM OAM adapter module (hardware release 5) with cover off

Figure 2-57
Connecting power, control, and communication cables to the DS1 service module (example
shows a 23-in. equipment rack with 5-in. setback)


Step Action
5 Connect the long segment to the output connector on the BIP/FIP. See
“Installing the NTN458RA DSM breaker interface panel” on page 2-72.
6 Turn on the circuit breaker at the power distribution panel or BIP/FIP for the
A feed.
7 Using a digital voltmeter (DVM), measure the voltage at the long segment
cable connector pins in reference to the ground.
• The red cable and the red/blue cable must respectively indicate -48 V dc
and must connect to the -48 V dc terminal at the OAM adapter module. If
the red cable and red/blue cable connect in the order given to the Return
terminals at the OAM adapter module, then the cables are not assembled
properly and must be replaced.
• The white/red cable and the white/blue cable must indicate 0 V dc and
must connect to the Return terminals at the OAM adapter module. If the
power cable is assembled properly and the voltages at the connector pins
are reversed, verify the cable connection at the bay power distribution.
If the values indicated by the DVM are incorrect, then the cables are wired
incorrectly. Verify that the power cables are terminated correctly at the power
distribution panel or BIP/FIP. If the power cables are terminated properly at
the power distribution panel or BIP/FIP, you must replace the power cable.
8 Turn off the circuit breaker at the power distribution panel or BIP/FIP for the A
feed.
9 Connect the long segment to the short segment.
10 Turn on the circuit breaker at the power distribution panel or BIP/FIP for the A
feed.
11 Using a digital voltmeter (DVM), measure the voltage at the power A terminal
on the OAM adapter module, in reference to the ground.
• The red cable and the red/blue cable must respectively indicate -48 V dc
and must connect to the -48 V dc terminal at the OAM adapter module. If
the red cable and red/blue cable connect in the order given to the Return
terminals at the OAM adapter module, then the cables are not assembled
properly and must be replaced.
• The white/red cable and the white/blue cable must indicate 0 V dc and
must connect to the Return terminals at the OAM adapter module. If the
power cable is assembled properly and the voltages at the connector pins
are reversed, verify the cable connection at the bay power distribution.
12 Turn off the circuit breaker at the power distribution panel or BIP/FIP for the A
feed.
13 Repeat step 4 through step 12 for the B feed.


Step Action
Running the power cables along the bay frame

14 Run the power cables along the equipment frame.
Testing DSM power
Note: At least one DSM DS1x84 termination module, as well as the OAM
adapter module, must be installed in the DSM shelf for the power LED to turn
on.
15 On the OAM adapter module, switch circuit breaker A and circuit breaker B to
‘OFF’. See “DSM OAM adapter module (hardware release 5) with cover off”
on page 2-91.
16 Turn off power B on the power distribution panel or BIP/FIP.
17 Turn on power A on the power distribution panel or BIP/FIP.
18 On the OAM adapter module, switch circuit breaker A to ‘ON’. The power LED
on the front of the DSM turns yellow to indicate that one power feed is active.
19 Turn on power B on the power distribution panel or BIP/FIP.
20 On the OAM adapter module, switch circuit breaker B to ‘ON’. The power LED
on the front of the DSM turns green to indicate that both power feeds are
active.
21 Turn off power A on the power distribution panel or BIP/FIP.
22 On the OAM adapter module, switch circuit breaker A to OFF. The power LED
Initializing the NTN458RA BIP
23 If you are using the NTN458RA BIP, when you have completed connecting
power to the bay configuration of DSM shelves from the BIP, push the Reset
button on the front faceplate of the BIP.
—end—

Procedure 2-13
Connecting power cables to the DSM shelf (DSM OAM
hardware release 6 or later)
Perform this procedure to connect power cables to the DSM shelf for DSM
OAM hardware release 6 or later.
Prerequisites
Make sure that:
• The DSM OAM adapter module is hardware release 6 or later (see the
Figure 2-58


Connecting power cables to the DSM shelf (DSM OAM hardware release 6 or later)
• The fixed wiring includes a quickly accessible disconnect device.

• You have a digital voltmeter (DVM).
Power cabling from the BIP/FIP to the DS1 service module (DSM) is not
included in the shipping container when you order a DSM shelf. You must
order the appropriate cable.
For EMC purposes, place a ferrite on the DSM power cable. See the following
illustration.


Figure 2-59
Placing the ferrite on the DSM power cable


Precautions
DANGER



DANGER
ensure that the DSM shelf power is turned off at the power
CAUTION
packs.


CAUTION
To avoid damage to the power connector pins:
• Ensure the power cable is plugged horizontal to the power
connector and perpendicular to the OAM module.
• Secure the power cable to the nearest possible rigid point on the
bay before routing the cable.
• Route the power cable between the OAM module and the left side
of the shelf as shown in “Routing the DSM power cable”. Take care
not to push the connector downwards as shown in “Improper routing
of the DSM power cable” on page 2-100. Pushing the connector
downwards puts tension on the connectors and can lead to
damage.
Figure 2-60
Routing the DSM power cable


Figure 2-61
Improper routing of the DSM power cable
Step Action
Connecting power to the DSM
3 Turn off the circuit breaker at the power distribution panel or BIP/FIP for the
A and B feeds.
4 Connect one end of the power cable to the output connector on the power
distribution panel or BIP/FIP. See a BIP example (NTN458RA) and an
example of the shelf power cable in the following illustrations.

Figure 2-62
NTN458RA breaker interface panel (BIP)


Step Action
Figure 2-63
Shelf power cable
to BIP power A
to BIP power B
Power module A
power connector
A- (-48V) red A+ (Return)

A1
A+(return) white A- (-48V)
with red trace
B+ (Return)
B1
B- (-48V)
B- (-48V) red
with blue trace
B+ (return) white Power module B
with blue trace power connector


Step Action
A feed.
6 Using a digital voltmeter (DVM), measure the voltage at the power connector
pins in reference to ground.
• At the Mate-N-Lok connector for the DSM shelf, the A power feed cable
(red cable) must indicate -48 V dc. See “Shelf power cable” on page
2-102.
• At the Mate-N-Lok connector for the DSM shelf, the A battery return cable
(white/red cable) must indicate 0 V dc. See “Shelf power cable” on page
2-102.
• Turn off the circuit breaker at the power distribution panel or BIP/FIP for
the A feed.
If the values indicated by the DVM are not correct, then the cables are wired
distribution panel or BIP/FIP. If the power cables are terminated improperly at
B feed. Using a DVM, measure the voltage at the power connector pins in
reference to ground.
• At the Mate-N-Lok connector for the DSM shelf, the B power feed cable
(red cable) must indicate -48 V dc. See “Shelf power cable” on page
2-102.
• At the Mate-N-Lok connector for the DSM shelf, the B battery return cable
(white/red cable) must indicate 0 V dc. See “Shelf power cable” on page
2-102.
• Turn off the circuit breaker at the power distribution panel or BIP/FIP for
the B feed.
If the values indicated by the DVM are not correct, then the cables are wired
distribution panel or BIP/FIP. If the power cables are terminated improperly at
8 Plug the A power cable into the “A” Mate-N-Lok power receptacle on the DSM
OAM adapter module. See “DSM OAM adapter module (hardware release 6)
with cover off” on page 2-95.
9 Plug the B power cable into the “B” Mate-N-Lok power receptacle on the DSM
OAM adapter module.


Step Action
Testing DSM power
ATTENTION
At least one DSM DS1x84 termination module, as well as the OAM adapter
module, must be installed in the DSM shelf for the power LED to turn on.
10 On the OAM adapter module, switch circuit breaker A and circuit breaker B to
‘OFF’. See “DSM OAM adapter module (hardware release 5) with cover off”
on page 2-104.
Figure 2-64
11 Turn off power B on the power distribution panel or BIP/FIP.

12 Turn on power A on the power distribution panel or BIP/FIP.


Step Action
13 On the OAM adapter module, switch circuit breaker A to ‘ON’. The power LED
14 Turn on power B on the power distribution panel or BIP/FIP.
15 On the OAM adapter module, switch circuit breaker B to ‘ON’. The power LED
on the front of the DSM turns green to indicate that both power feeds are
active.
16 Turn off power A on the power distribution panel or BIP/FIP.
17 On the OAM adapter module, switch circuit breaker A to OFF. The power LED
Initializing the NTN458RN BIP
18 If you are using the NTN458RN BIP, when you have completed connecting
power to the bay configuration of DSM shelves from the BIP, push the Reset
button on the front faceplate of the BIP.
—end—

Procedure 2-14
Connecting alarm control and communication cables
to the DS1 service module
Use this procedure to connect the following cables to the DS1 service module:
• environmental input/output (I/O)
• OAM alarms
• RS-232
For cable and connector specifications, see Planning - Ordering Information,

323-1851-151.
only.
Prerequisites
Make sure that you have the appropriate personal grounding device to
Precaution
CAUTION
packs.
Step Action

2 Verify the compatibility of the DS1 service module alarm and environmental
I/O interfaces. See the following illustrations:
• “Environmental input connections (DS1 service module)” on page 2-107
• “Environmental output connections (DS1 service module)” on page 2-108
• “OAM alarm relays (DS1 service module)” on page 2-109
• “DSM OAM adapter module - environmental alarm pinout” on page 2-110
• “Connecting power, control, and communication cables to the DS1
service module (example shows a 23-in. equipment rack with 5-in.
setback)” on page 2-111


Connecting alarm control and communication cables to the DS1 service module
Step Action
The following illustration shows an example of a circuit of environmental input

connections using a relay interface. Environmental inputs are active low. To
drive one of the inputs low, the control circuit must short it to one of the
environmental ground pins. You can use one ground pin for up to three inputs.
Figure 2-65
Environmental input connections (DS1 service module)
Environmental input pins (see note 3)

1-1, 2-1, 3-1, 4-1, 5-1, 6-1, 7-1, 8-1
1-2, 2-2, 3-2, 4-2, 5-2, 6-2, 7-2, 8-2
Environmental
Input
NO NC
Common
Environmental
ground
(logic ground) Relay Environmental
9-1, 9-2 sensing and
Twisted wire pair relay control
connects the OAM adapter module circuits
environmental I/O pins
to the relay.
OAM adapter module
DS1 service module
Note 1: The environmental input grounds must not have a direct connection
to any other office ground.
Note 2: All of the environmental input grounds are shorted together
on the OAM adapter module.
Note 3: See OAM interface matrix pinout for pins assignment.


Step Action
The following illustration shows an example of a circuit of environmental

output connections. Each environmental output pin connects to a normally
open (NO) relay contact on the OAM adapter module. Connect the common
contacts on the output relays to the common return (RET) pins.
Figure 2-66
Environmental output connections (DS1 service module)
OAM
adapter
module
Environmental
output pins
(see Note)
Common NO Out 1 6-3
Common NO Out 2 7-3
Common NO Out 3 8-3
Common NO Out 4 9-3
Return 4-3
Return 5-3
DS1 service module

Note: See OAM interface matrix pinout for pins assignment.


Step Action
The following illustration shows an example circuit of shelf alarm relays. The
OAM alarm pins connect to relays under the control of the active DSM
DS1x84 termination module. When the DSM DS1x84 termination module
activates an alarm relay, the normally open line connects to the common line
and the normally closed (NC) line disconnects from the common line. The
NC, NO, and common lines for each shelf alarm relay are isolated from each
other, the shelf ground, and the shelf battery return.
Figure 2-67
OAM alarm relays (DS1 service module)
OAM
adapter
module
Relay
NC normally closed pin

Common See Note 1
NO normally open pin
common pin
Common pins
(see note 2)
1-5, 2-5, 3-5
5-5, 6-5, 7-5
DS1 service module
Note 1: See OAM interface matrix pinout for Visual

and Audible (Critical/MJ/MN) assignment.
Note 2: See OAM interface matrix pinout for pins assignment.

Figure 2-68
DSM OAM adapter module - environmental alarm pinout
Env in
1 8
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Environmental Ground
Environmental 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
alarm pins inputs 1-16
Env in
16
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Ground Environmental
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
output 1-4
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Environmental
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 outputs -RET
C M m sp C M m sp
N.O. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 BRET A
COM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 BRET B
N.C. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ACO
Audible
Visual 54
Legend
N.O. = Normally Open

N.C. = Normally Closed
Wirewrap matrix pinout
# 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 ENVIN1 ENVIN2 ENVIN3 ENVIN4 ENVIN5 ENVIN6 ENVIN7 ENVIN8 GND
2 ENVIN9 ENVIN10 ENVIN11 ENVIN12 ENVIN13 ENVIN14 ENVIN15 ENVIN16 GND
3 GND GND GND ENVOUT ENVOUT ENVOU1 ENVOU2 ENVOU3 ENVOU4

-RET -RET
4 AUD CR AUD MJ AUD MN AUD spare VIS CR VIS MJ VIS MN VIS spare BRET A
N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O.
5 AUD CR AUD MJ AUD MN AUD spare VIS CR VIS MJ VIS MN VIS spare BRET B
COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM
6 AUD CR AUD MJ AUD MN AUD spare VIS CR VIS MJ VIS MN VIS spare ACO
N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C.

Figure 2-69
Connecting power, control, and communication cables to the DS1 service module (example
shows a 23-in. equipment rack with 5-in. setback)


Step Action
3 On the OAM adapter module, wire wrap the following pins as required:
• environmental I/O
• OAM alarms
• environmental alarms (see “DSM OAM adapter module - environmental
alarm pinout” on page 2-110)
• grounding (see “Grounding and isolation at the DSM OAM adapter pins”)
Table 2-10
Grounding and isolation at the DSM OAM adapter pins
Type of grounding Pins Recommended pin usage
Environmental Return 4-3 Used for ENV. ALARMS OUT:

(ENV. RET) ENVOU1(pin 6-3), ENVOU2 (pin 7-3)
5-3 ENVOU3 (pin 8-3), ENVOU4 (pin 9-3)
Frame ground/ Logic 1-3, 2-3, 3-3 Additional frame ground for customer
ground defined usage
9-1, 9-2 Used as office alarms (ENV. Alarms Input)
Battery Return 9-4, 9-5 Customer defined usage (used as battery

return)
Note 1: The environmental returns are isolated from the other grounds.
Note 2: The frame ground and logic ground are tied together to form an integrated
ground.
4 On the OAM adapter module, connect the RS-232 cable (if present) to the
RS-232 connector. See “DSM OAM adapter module (hardware release 5)
with cover off” on page 2-113 or “DSM OAM adapter module (hardware
release 6) with cover off” on page 2-114.
5 Route the alarm, control, and communication cables along the equipment
frame.
—end—

Figure 2-70

Figure 2-71

Procedure 2-15
Connecting DS1 cables to the DS1 service module
Perform this procedure to connect DS1 cables to the DS1 service module. The
DS1 service module has three DS1 connector units. Each unit has two
connectors (DS1 IN and DS1 OUT) and supports 28 DS1 facilities. See “DS1
facility and corresponding I/O connector”.
Table 2-11
DS1 facility and corresponding I/O connector
DS1 I/O connector DS1 facilities
DS1 1-28 1 to 28
DS1 29-56 29 to 56
DS1 57-84 57 to 84
DS1 grounding must be built into the cables during cable assembly. Ensure
shield (sheath) drain wire is connected to the ground pin inside connector at
the shelf end of the cable and at the end of the DS1 cable opposite the shelf
end of cable (that is, both ends of the shield drain to be grounded).
only.
Prerequisites
Precaution
CAUTION
packs.
Step Action



Step Action
2 At the top of the DS1 service module, remove the protective cap from the DS1
1-28 IN and OUT connectors. See the following illustration.
Figure 2-72


Step Action
3 Rotate the connector retaining springs to the side. See “Connecting power,
control, and communication cables to the DS1 service module (example
shows a 23-in. equipment rack with 5-in. setback)” on page 2-111.
4 Connect the 1-28 IN and OUT DS1 cable connectors to the DS1 service
module. See “Connecting power, control, and communication cables to the
DS1 service module (example shows a 23-in. equipment rack with 5-in.
setback)” on page 2-111.
5 Rotate the attaching spring toward the top to maintain the connectors in
position.
6 Repeat step 1 through step 5 for DS1 29-56 and DS1 57-84 connectors.
—end—

Procedure 2-16
Routing DS1 cables to/from the DS1 service module
Perform this procedure to route DS1 cables to/from the DS1 service module.
After you connect the DS1 cables to their correct I/O connectors at the top of
the DS1 service module, use this procedure to route the cables from the DS1
service module to the equipment frame.
Prerequisites
Precaution
CAUTION
packs.
Step Action

2 Route three DS1 cables to the left (DS1 1-28 IN, DS1 1-28 OUT, and DS1 29-
56 IN) along the frame, inside the bay uprights. Use a tie-wrap to attach the
three DS1 cables together and to the frame. See “Connecting power, control,
and communication cables to the DS1 service module (example shows a 23-
in. equipment rack with 5-in. setback)” on page 2-111.
3 Route three cables to the right (DS1 29-56 OUT, DS1 57-84 IN, and DS1 57-
84 OUT) along the frame, inside the bay uprights. Use a tie-wrap to attach the
three DS1 cables together and to the frame. See “Connecting power, control,
and communication cables to the DS1 service module (example shows a 23-
in. equipment rack with 5-in. setback)” on page 2-111.
Allow for sufficient slack in the T1 cables to avoid stress on the DS1
connectors.
—end—

Procedure 2-17
Inserting or removing a DSM 84xDS1 termination
module
Perform this procedure to insert or remove a DSM 84xDS1 termination
module.
The DS1 service module is shipped with DSM 84xDS1 termination modules
(DSM 84xDS1 TM) in slots 1 and 2. A DSM 84xDS1 TM in slot 2 is optional
and works as protection for the DSM 84xDS1 TM in slot 1. Use this procedure
to insert or remove a DSM 84xDS1 TM.
When the inventory is retrieved for a DSM shelf containing a connected but
unprotected DS1 termination module in slot 1 and an unconnected DS1
termination module in slot 2, complete inventory details are displayed for the
DS1 termination module in slot 1. Only the serial number is displayed for the
DS1 termination module in slot 2.
The DSM 84xDS1TM circuit pack starts an automatic upgrade after the circuit
pack is inserted into the DSM module and fiber-connected to the appropriate
Host OC-3/STM-1 port. The upgrade can take up to 20 minutes.
When installing the DSM 84xDS1 TM, assign slots from bottom to top,
beginning with the working DSM 84xDS1 TM in slot 1, the bottom slot.
Prerequisites
Precautions
CAUTION
packs.
CAUTION
Do not force any circuit pack all the way to the back of its slot
if it resists insertion. Before you install any circuit packs, make
sure you understand the detailed procedure for insertion of
circuit packs.


Inserting or removing a DSM 84xDS1 termination module
CAUTION
Risk of false failure being reported
You must connect the DS1 I/O cables to the DS1 service
module before you insert the DSM 84xDS1 termination
module in slot 1.
CAUTION
Make sure that the DSM 84xDS1 termination module lock/eject
levers are locked in position. If the lock/eject levers are not
locked, the DSM 84xDS1 termination module does not
autoprovision.
Step Action

2 Determine the task you want to perform.
inserting a DSM 84xDS1 TM step 4
removing a DSM 84xDS1 TM step 21
Inserting a DSM 84xDS1 TM into a slot

3 On the DSM OAM adapter module, switch circuit breakers A and B to 'ON'.
See the following illustrations.


Step Action
Figure 2-73


Step Action
Figure 2-74
4 Launch Site Manager and log in to the network element. For instructions, see
Administration and Security, 323-1851-301.
5 Select Active Alarms from the Faults drop-down menu to retrieve alarms.
Clear all LOS, LOP, SF, EBER, SD and equipment alarms raised against the
Host OC-3/STM-1 circuit pack.


Step Action
6
CAUTION
Risk of upgrade failing
You must insert and fiber DSM 84xDS1 TM circuit
packs one at a time. If you are inserting DSM 84xDS1
TM circuit packs in slots 1 and 2, complete step 6 to
step 19 to insert a DSM 84xDS1 TM in slot 1, then
repeat the same steps for slot 2.
Lift the DSM 84xDS1 TM by the edges of the faceplate.

7 Turn the DSM 84xDS1 TM right side up and guide the back end into the
required slot. Make sure that the left and right edges of the DSM 84xDS1 TM
enter the slot guide rails.
8 Push the DSM 84xDS1 TM into the DS1 service module until 75% of its
length is in the DS1 service module.
9 Pull the lock/eject levers at the left and right of the DSM 84xDS1 TM faceplate
to their completely extended positions.
10 Push the DSM 84xDS1 TM towards the back of the DS1 service module. The
lock/eject levers will slip into the grooves at the left and right edges of the slot
frame.
11 Push the left and right lock/eject levers towards the DSM 84xDS1 TM
faceplate so that the connector at the back of the DSM 84xDS1 TM mates
with the backplane.
You can feel the latch snap into the locked position as the DSM 84xDS1 TM
mates with the DS1 service module backplane. The lock/eject levers then
snap towards the faceplate. (The left lever snaps right and the right lever
snaps left.)
12 Ensure the levers are locked in position, holding the DSM 84xDS1 TM
securely in the shelf.
Do not use excessive force when pushing the lock/eject levers towards the
faceplates. If the levers do not want to lock into place, remove the DSM
84xDS1 TM and examine the connector at the back of the DSM 84xDS1 TM.
After you insert the DSM 84xDS1 TM, the Status LED must turn off after
approximately 30 seconds. If the Status LED remains on, the circuit pack has
faults and must be returned to Ciena. The OAM fail LED remains on until
there is a fiber connection between the DSM 84xDS1 TM and the Host OC-3/
STM-1.
13 Put the Host OC-3/STM-1 facility in-service. Refer to Part 1 of
Configuration - Provisioning and Operating, 323-1851-310.


Step Action
14 Test power at the Tx and Rx ports of the DSM 84xDS1 TM. Refer to
Commissioning and Testing, 323-1851-221, for the procedures to test power
at optical interface ports.
15 Ensure that SDCC is provisioned on the Host OC-3/STM-1 facility. Refer to
Part 1 of Configuration - Provisioning and Operating, 323-1851-310.
16 Connect fiber between the DSM 84xDS1 TM and the Host OC-3/STM-1
circuit pack. Refer to Procedure 2-18, “Connecting the DS1 service module
to the 6500 shelf”.
17 Verify that the OAM fail LED turns off.
18 Wait for the DSM 84xDS1 TM to upgrade. This upgrade can take up to 20
minutes if the software release of the DSM 84xDS1 TM and shelf processor
differ.
The DSM 84xDS1 TM appears in the Site Manager DSM window once the
upgrade completes. To open the DSM window, select Shelf Level View from
the Configuration drop-down menu, then click the Show DSM button.
19 Wait another three minutes before continuing this procedure.
20 If necessary, repeat step 6 to step 19 to insert a DSM 84xDS1 TM in slot 2.
Removing a DSM 84xDS1 TM from a slot
21 Pull the lock/eject levers at the left and right of the DSM 84xDS1 TM faceplate
to their completely extended positions.
The DSM 84xDS1 TM connector disengages from the backplane.
22 Pull the DSM 84xDS1 TM out of the slot.
—end—

Figure 2-75
Routing fiber-optic cables to the DS1 service module (example shows a 23-in. equipment rack
with 5 in. setback)

Procedure 2-18
Connecting the DS1 service module to the 6500 shelf
Perform this procedure to connect the DS1 service module to the 6500 shelf.
Prerequisites
Before you perform this procedure, you must insert the DSM 84xDS1
termination module (DSM 84xDS1 TM) in slot 1 and connect the DS1 I/O
cables to the DS1 service module.
Inspect and clean fiber patch cords before connecting fiber-optic cables. See
the section on cleaning connectors in Installation - General Information,
323-1851-201.0.
Make sure you have:

• LC-SC adapter patch cords, if the optical interface circuit pack does not
have LC connectors and will be connected to a DS1 service module with
LC connectors
• LC-LC adapter patch cords, if both the optical interface circuit pack and
DS1 service module have LC connectors
charges
Precaution
CAUTION
packs.
Step Action

2 Connect one end of the patch cord to the working OC-3/STM-1 Tx port on the
6500 shelf. See “Connecting or disconnecting fiber-optic cables” on page
1-245.


Connecting the DS1 service module to the 6500 shelf
Step Action
3 Connect the other end of the patch cord to IN port on the DSM 84xDS1 TM
slot 1 port. See “Connecting or disconnecting fiber-optic cables” on page
1-245.
4 Connect one end of the patch cord to the working OC-3/STM-1 Rx port on the
14-slot shelf. See “Connecting or disconnecting fiber-optic cables” on page
1-245.
5 Connect the other end of the patch cord to OUT port on the DSM 84xDS1 TM
slot 1 port. See “Connecting or disconnecting fiber-optic cables” on page
1-245.
6 Repeat step 1 through step 5 for the protection OC-3/STM-1 circuit pack on
the 14-slot shelf, and the DSM 84xDS1 TM slot 2.
7 Ensure there are no alarms on the DS1 service module and on the 6500
network element. If an alarm is displayed, perform the related troubleshooting
procedure. See Fault Management - Alarm Clearing, 323-1851-543.
8 Return the optical connector applicator back to its location.
9 Route the fiber-optic cable from the DS1 service module to the 14-slot shelf.
10 Store the fiber slack in the fiber storage. See “Routing fiber-optic cables to the
DS1 service module (example shows a 23-in. equipment rack with 5 in.
setback)” on page 2-125.
11 Install the DS1 service module front cover. See “Installing and removing the
DS1 service module front cover” on page 2-129.
—end—

Figure 2-76
Routing fiber-optic cables to the DS1 service module (example shows a 23-in. equipment rack
with 5 in. setback)

Procedure 2-19
Installing and removing the DS1 service module front
cover
Perform this procedure to install or remove the DSM front cover.
Prerequisites
Precaution
CAUTION
packs.
Step Action

Removing the DS1 service module front cover
2 Open the DS1 service module (DSM) front cover.
3 Loosen the two screws attaching the front cover to each side of the DSM. See
“DSM shelf (example shows mounting brackets for a 19 in. equipment rack
with 5 in. setback)” on page 2-130.
4 Carefully open the front cover.
You have completed the DSM front cover removal.
Installing the DS1 service module front cover
5 Position the front cover to the DSM.
6 Adjust the front cover attaching brackets to the holes on the DSM left and right
lower sides.
7 Insert and tighten the two screws attaching the front cover to each side of the
DSM. See “DSM shelf (example shows mounting brackets for a 19 in.
equipment rack with 5 in. setback)” on page 2-130.
8 Close the DSM front cover.
—end—

Figure 2-77

Procedure 2-20
Installing a 2110 shelf
Use this procedure to install a 2110 shelf into the 19-in., 23-in. or ETSI rack.
This procedure applies to the 2110 shelf for the DSCMs (B-955-0003-00x),
which can be equipped with one full-width 2110-Tx-xxxx Dispersion
Compensation Module (DCM, also referred to as DSCM) (166-0203-9xx and
166-0403-9xx) or up to two half-width 2110-Tx-xxxx DCMs (B-955-0003-00x,
B-955-0003-3xx, 166-0203-9xx and 166-0403-9xx). If equipped with a
half-width DCM, the remaining slot can be equipped with a 2110 blank (filler
panel) (B-955-0004-001). For the installation procedure for DSCM modules
(NTT870AAE5-AHE5/AJE5-ANE5/APE5-AQE5, NTT870CAE5-CHE5/CJE5,
NTT870EAE5-EDE5, and NTT870GAE5-GGE5), refer to “Installing a DSCM
tray in a DSCM drawer (NT0H57LA)” on page 2-32.
Prerequisites
• a #2 Phillips-head screwdriver
• a 5/16-in. wrench
• the engineering documentation package (EDP) or installation
plans
charges


Precautions
DANGER



CAUTION
packs.
Step Action
3 Unpack and inspect the 2110 shelf.


Step Action
4 Position and attach a 19-inch, 23-inch, or ETSI mounting bracket to the side
of the 2110 shelf, securing it with the supplied mounting screws as shown in
“Example of installing 19-inch brackets on 2110 shelf”.
5 Secure the other bracket to the other side in the same way.
6 Position the 2110 shelf in the equipment frame and attach the brackets to the
frame with four screws, two screws on each side, as shown in “Example of
installing a 2110 shelf with 19-inch brackets” on page 2-134.
—end—
Figure 2-78
Example of installing 19-inch brackets on 2110 shelf

Figure 2-79
Example of installing a 2110 shelf with 19-inch brackets

Procedure 2-21
Installing 2110-Tx-xxxx DCMs into the 2110 shelf
Use this procedure to install one or two half-width DCM modules, or a
full-width DCM module into a 2110 shelf.
Prerequisites
Make sure that you
• have the engineering documentation package (EDP) or installation
plans
• read the section on observing product and personnel safety guidelines in
Installation - General Information, 323-1851-201.0
charges
Precaution
CAUTION
packs.
Step Action

2 If present, remove the blank module from the slot that will hold the new DSCM
by turning its panel fasteners and removing it from the drawer. See “Installing
a half-width module” on page 2-136.
3 From the front of the 2110 shelf, slide the rear of the DSCM into the required
slot as shown in “Installing a half-width module” on page 2-136 and “Installing
a full-width module” on page 2-137.


Installing 2110-Tx-xxxx DCMs into the 2110 shelf
Step Action
4 Push the module until it is fully seated into the chassis and the back of the
module faceplate is flush against the front of the chassis.
5 Turn the panel fastener on each side of the DSCM faceplate to secure the
module to the chassis.
Note: On the half-width modules, the inner fastener does not engage the
drawer. This does not compromise the mechanical stability of the unit.
Equipping these modules with two fasteners enables them to be used in
either slot.
6 Clean and connect all fiber jumpers to the appropriate ports on the module.
—end—
Figure 2-80
Installing a half-width module

Figure 2-81
Installing a full-width module


6500 Packet-Optical Platform
Installation - 14-slot Shelves
Copyright© 2014-2019 Ciena® Corporation. All rights reserved.
Release 12.4
Publication: 323-1851-201.3
Document status: Standard
Issue 2
Document release date: March 2019
CONTACT CIENA
For additional information, office locations, and phone numbers, please visit the Ciena
web site at www.ciena.com

6500 R12.4 Installation-14-Slot Shelves)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

6500 R12.4 Installation-14-Slot Shelves)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

6500 Packet-Optical Platform

Installation - 14-slot Shelves

323-1851-201.3 - Standard Issue 2

6500 Packet-Optical Platform Installation - 14-slot Shelves

6500 Packet-Optical Platform Installation - 14-slot Shelves

6500 Packet-Optical Platform Installation - 14-slot Shelves

New in this release and documentation roadmap xi

Installing 6500 14-slot shelves 1-1

6500 Packet-Optical Platform Installation - 14-slot Shelves

Installing OMX, fiber manager, DSM, passive equipment, and

6500 Packet-Optical Platform Installation - 14-slot Shelves

6500 Packet-Optical Platform Installation - 14-slot Shelves

6500 Packet-Optical Platform Installation - 14-slot Shelves

New in this release and documentation

This technical publication contains information on how to install Release 12.4

Use Installation - 14-slot Shelves, 323-1851-201.3 (this technical publication)

For T-Series installation information, refer to Installation - T-Series Shelves,

6500 Packet-Optical Platform Installation - 14-slot Shelves

6500 technical publications

6500 Packet-Optical Platform Installation - 14-slot Shelves

6500 D-Series and S-Series roadmap

Documentation Installation - Administration Fault Management - Common Equipment

SAOS-based Command Fault and MIB

6500 Packet-Optical Platform Installation - 14-slot Shelves

6500 T-Series roadmap

T-Series Administration Fault Management -

SAOS-based Command Fault and MIB

6500 Packet-Optical Platform Installation - 14-slot Shelves

Installing 6500 14-slot shelves 1-

This section contains information on how to install the Ciena 6500

6500 Packet-Optical Platform Installation - 14-slot Shelves

This section contains the following topics:

For installation procedures for the following passive equipment

refer to Installation - Passive Chassis (2150 & Photonics), Filters, and

6500 Packet-Optical Platform Installation - 14-slot Shelves

• supported shelf processors—Planning - Ordering Information,

Circuit packs with 90-degree SFPs

6500 Packet-Optical Platform Installation - 14-slot Shelves

— Ciena-supplied and/or Ciena-approved equivalent LC fiber patchcords

Shelf front covers and extension kits—overview

For additional details, see Planning - Ordering Information, 323-1851-151.

6500 Packet-Optical Platform Installation - 14-slot Shelves

NTK509CY: 6500 14-slot Shelf — supported —

NTK509CCE6: Shelf Front Cover — supported —

NTK509CCE6: 6500 14-slot — supported —

NTK509CCE6: Shelf Front Cover — — supported

6500 Packet-Optical Platform Installation - 14-slot Shelves

NTK509CZ: 6500 14-slot Shelf — supported —

NTK509CD: 6500 14-slot Shelf — supported —

6500 Packet-Optical Platform Installation - 14-slot Shelves

NTK509DCE6: Shelf Front Cover — The NTK509DCE6 front —

6500 Packet-Optical Platform Installation - 14-slot Shelves

NTK509CX: 14-slot Optical/Front — supported —

Abbreviations used in procedures

BIP breaker interface panel

CFP C form-factor pluggable

DPO dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) pluggable optics

DSM DS1 service module

DVM digital voltmeter

6500 Packet-Optical Platform Installation - 14-slot Shelves

EDP engineering drawing package

EEA Extended Equipment Aperture

EIA Electronics Industries Alliance